JP7517670B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, gaming machines are known that can execute a display effect using a display device when a gaming ball enters a starting hole (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In these types of gaming machines, it is possible to create display effects using character images, patterns, etc.

JP 2016-202930 A JP 2016-198339 A JP 2016-182376 A

However, even with the above gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in terms of technology to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The present invention was made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to improve the entertainment value of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve at least some of the problems described above, and can be realized as the following application examples. Note that the reference symbols and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this section indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described below in order to aid in understanding the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way.

[Application example 1]
a first display area capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A gaming machine including a second display area capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, the second display area being an image display area different from the first display area and not overlapping with the first display area,
When the first display area is located inside the second display area,
A first effect in which a plurality of hold icons are displayed in a first direction in the first display area;
A second effect is performed after the first effect, in which the direction in which the plurality of reserved icons are arranged is changed from the first direction to a second direction while maintaining the display of the plurality of reserved icons;
After the second performance, a third performance is executed in which the direction in which the plurality of reserved icons are arranged is changed from the second direction to the first direction while maintaining the display of the plurality of reserved icons.
The third performance is executed in a manner in which all of the reserved icons displayed in the first display area including the plurality of reserved icons are not pre-read.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The present invention can increase the enjoyment of games.

FIG. FIG. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board of the gaming machine. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM. 1 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in gaming machines. 10 is a diagram for explaining judgment tables T1 to T4 and T10. FIG. An explanatory diagram of the jackpot type determination table T5. An explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 during non-time-saving mode. An explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 during time-saving mode. This is an explanatory diagram of the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of the large prize opening pattern determination table T8. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. 13 is a flowchart of a main control process. 13 is a flowchart of a main-side timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. This is a flowchart of the special chart 2 pre-determination processing. This is a flowchart of the special diagram 1 pre-judgment processing. 13 is a flowchart of a normal operation process. 13 is a flowchart of a special action process. 13 is a flowchart of a special symbol waiting process. 13 is a flowchart of a jackpot determination process. This is a first flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. This is a second flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. This is a flowchart of processing during special pattern change. 13 is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. 13 is a flowchart of a game status management process. 13 is a flowchart of a game status reset process. 13 is a flowchart of special electric device processing. 13 is a flowchart of a V-type opening/closing member operation process. 13 is a flowchart of a game status setting process. 13 is a flowchart of a V-area sensor detection process. This is a flowchart for processing the number of reserved balls. 13 is a flowchart showing a sub-control main process. 13 is a flowchart of a sub-side timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart of a pre-reading performance determination process. 10 is a diagram for explaining a configuration of a pre-determination information storage area; FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a pre-reading performance pattern determination table T51. 13 is a flowchart of the variable performance start processing. An explanatory diagram of the core performance pattern determination table T52. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. This is a flowchart of processing during variable performance. 13 is a flowchart of a display control process. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an upward movement of the left sub-display device 10L. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the right rotation of the left sub-display device 10L. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second state of the left sub-display device 10L. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of upward movement of the right sub-display device 10R. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the left rotation of the right sub-display device 10R. FIG. An explanatory diagram illustrating a second state of the right sub-display device 10R. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of upward movement of the left and right sub-display devices 10. FIG. An explanatory diagram illustrating the advancement movement of the first movable part 14. An explanatory diagram illustrating the second state of the first movable part 14. An explanatory diagram illustrating the rotational movement of the first movable part 14. An explanatory diagram illustrating the second state of the second movable part 15. An explanatory diagram illustrating the rotational movement of the second movable part 15. An explanatory diagram illustrating the first combination performance of the first and second movable parts. An explanatory diagram illustrating a second combination presentation of the first and second movable parts. An explanatory diagram illustrating sub-display device linkage performance A. An explanatory diagram illustrating sub-display device linked performance B. An explanatory diagram illustrating a sub-display device linked performance C. An explanatory diagram illustrating a sub-display device linked performance D. An explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern change stop performance A. An explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern change stop performance B. An explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern change stop performance C. An explanatory diagram illustrating a decorative pattern change stop performance D. An explanatory diagram illustrating special variation effect A. An explanatory diagram illustrating special variation effect B. An explanatory diagram illustrating special variation effect C. An explanatory diagram illustrating special variation effect D. An explanatory diagram illustrating character display presentation A. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating character display presentation B. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating character display presentation C. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a character display effect D. An explanatory diagram illustrating selection presentation A. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating selection presentation B. An explanatory diagram illustrating selection presentation C. An explanatory diagram illustrating selection presentation D. An explanatory diagram illustrating a multiple image pseudo consecutive performance A. An explanatory diagram illustrating multiple image pseudo consecutive performance B. An explanatory diagram illustrating a multiple image pseudo consecutive performance C. An explanatory diagram illustrating a multiple image pseudo consecutive performance D. An explanatory diagram illustrating image display performance A. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating image display presentation B. An explanatory diagram illustrating image display presentation C. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an image display effect D. An explanatory diagram illustrating sub-display effect A. An explanatory diagram illustrating sub-display effect B. An explanatory diagram illustrating sub-display effect C. An explanatory diagram illustrating sub-display effect D. An explanatory diagram illustrating the pending arrangement direction change presentation A. An explanatory diagram illustrating the pending arrangement direction change presentation B. An explanatory diagram illustrating a pending array direction change presentation C. An explanatory diagram illustrating a pending array direction change presentation D. An explanatory diagram illustrating pending display presentation A. An explanatory diagram illustrating hold display presentation B. An explanatory diagram illustrating hold display presentation C. An explanatory diagram illustrating a hold display effect D. An explanatory diagram illustrating hold movement presentation A. An explanatory diagram illustrating hold movement presentation B. An explanatory diagram illustrating hold movement presentation C. An explanatory diagram illustrating a hold movement presentation D. An explanatory diagram illustrating the information display presentation A. An explanatory diagram illustrating the information display presentation B. An explanatory diagram illustrating the information display presentation C. An explanatory diagram illustrating the information display presentation D. An explanatory diagram illustrating pending icon linkage effect A. An explanatory diagram illustrating the pending icon linkage effect B. An explanatory diagram illustrating the pending icon linked effect C. An explanatory diagram illustrating a pending icon linked effect D. An explanatory diagram illustrating a hold change indication effect A. An explanatory diagram illustrating a hold change indication effect B. An explanatory diagram illustrating a hold change indication display C. An explanatory diagram illustrating a hold change indication effect D. An explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern display mode presentation A. An explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern display mode presentation B. An explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern display mode presentation C. An explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern display mode presentation D. An explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern change performance A. An explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern change performance B. An explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern change performance C. An explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern change performance D. An explanatory diagram illustrating pseudo consecutive performance A. An explanatory diagram illustrating pseudo consecutive performance B. An explanatory diagram illustrating pseudo consecutive performance C. An explanatory diagram illustrating pseudo consecutive performance D. An explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern opposing performance A. An explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern opposing performance B. An explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern opposing performance C. An explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern opposing performance D. An explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern pre-reading display performance A. An explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern pre-reading display performance B. An explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern pre-reading display performance C. An explanatory diagram illustrating a decorative pattern pre-reading display performance D. An explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern pre-reading performance A. An explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern pre-reading performance B. An explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern pre-reading performance C. An explanatory diagram illustrating a decorative pattern pre-reading performance D. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an operation image tilt display effect A. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an operation image tilt display presentation B. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an operation image tilt display presentation C. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an operation image tilt display effect D. FIG. An explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern button stop performance A. An explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern button stop performance B. An explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern button stop performance C. An explanatory diagram illustrating a decorative pattern button stop performance D. An explanatory diagram illustrating icon display effect A. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an icon display effect B. An explanatory diagram illustrating icon display effect C. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an icon display effect D. An explanatory diagram illustrating the performance execution confirmation performance A. An explanatory diagram illustrating the performance execution confirmation performance B. An explanatory diagram illustrating the performance execution confirmation performance C. An explanatory diagram illustrating the performance execution confirmation performance D. An explanatory diagram illustrating reach development selection performance A. An explanatory diagram illustrating reach development selection performance B. An explanatory diagram illustrating a reach development selection performance C. An explanatory diagram illustrating a reach development selection performance D. An explanatory diagram illustrating two-way group performance A. An explanatory diagram illustrating two-way group performance B. An explanatory diagram illustrating two-way group performance C. An explanatory diagram illustrating a two-way group performance D. An explanatory diagram illustrating the winning ball display presentation A. An explanatory diagram illustrating the winning ball display presentation B. An explanatory diagram illustrating the winning ball display presentation C. An explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the winning ball display presentation D.

First Embodiment
1. Structure of the gaming machine Fig. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to one embodiment of the present invention. In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as coinciding with the left-right direction as seen by a player facing the gaming machine 1. The front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the gaming machine 1 toward the player, and the rear direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the player toward the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that shoots gaming balls based on the player's shooting operation, and when the gaming balls win a specific winning device, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. The gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2, and the gaming board 2 is attached to the inside of the gaming machine frame 50. In addition to the front frame (front frame portion) 53, the gaming machine frame 50 includes an outer frame (base frame portion) that forms the outer shell of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the gaming board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit that is arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and includes a handle 60, a ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, a surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62, a performance button 63, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a select button 68. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, through which the playing area 3 of the playing board 2 can be seen.

The handle 60 is located at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and launches game balls with a launch strength according to the rotation angle. The ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is located below the front frame 53, and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is located below the ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the ball supply tray 61. The performance button 63 is an operating unit located near the ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player during performances that are executed as the game progresses. The frame lamp 66 is located above the front frame 53, and provides light-emitting performances during play. The speakers 67 are located at the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53, and provide sound performances during play.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, a main display device 7, a sub display device 10, an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, a fixed winning device (center) 19, a normal variable winning device (electric chute) 22, a gate (through chucker) 28, a first large winning device (first attacker) 31, a second large winning device (second attacker) 36, a large winning opening start port 17, a normal winning port 27 (normal winning port 27), an outlet 16, and displays 40.

The play area 3 is an area where game balls launched by operating the handle 60 flow down, and has multiple game nails protruding therein to guide the game balls. The rail member 4 is disposed at the left end of the play area 3, and guides the game balls launched by operating the handle 60 toward the top of the play area 3. The board lamp 5 is disposed on the rear side of the play area 3, and irradiates light from the rear side of the play area 3. Here, some of the board lamps 5 are connected to the right frame lamp 66R and the left frame lamp 66L, and are configured to have a continuous shape and light emission.

The main display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and is an image display device equipped with a display screen 7a. The main display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the main display device 7 has a performance pattern display area in which performance patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also called variable display).

The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas, "left", "center", and "right". The left symbol display area displays a left effect symbol (left decorative symbol) 8L. The center symbol display area displays a center effect symbol (center decorative symbol) 8C. The right symbol display area displays a right effect symbol (right decorative symbol) 8R. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers, for example, from "1" to "9". The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which will be described later. The main display device 7 can display the results of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b, which will be described later, (the result of the big win lottery) in an easy-to-understand manner to the player, by the combination of the effect symbols displayed in the left, center, and right symbol display areas.

For example, if a jackpot is won, the display will stop with a repeat number such as "777". If a loss occurs, the display will stop with a random number such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result from the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b, as well as the main display device 7. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. In addition, the variable display of the variable symbols may be scrolled up and down, or may be in other ways. The combination of the variable symbols to be displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above and can be set arbitrarily. Hereinafter, the display of the variable symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will be called "variable symbol display", "variable decorative symbol display", or simply "variable display" or "variable display". In addition, this decorative pattern change performance counts the performance during the period from when the special pattern starts changing to when it stops (also called the special pattern change period) as one change performance (one cycle of change performance). Therefore, even if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the period from when the special pattern starts changing to when it stops, the temporary stop performance is included in the decorative pattern change performance.

The main display device 7 can display on the display screen 7a not only the performance symbol changing performance, but also a jackpot performance that is performed in parallel with a jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demo performance for waiting customers, and the like. In the performance symbol changing performance, in addition to the performance symbol, performance images such as background images and character images may also be displayed. Furthermore, the main display device 7 may display on the display screen 7a, in addition to the performance symbol, an identification display (fourth symbol, not shown) that can indicate that a special symbol is changing or indicate the result of a lottery for a special symbol. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light-emitting device such as an LED provided in the play area 3.

The sub-display device 10 includes a left sub-display device 10L and a right sub-display device 10R, each of which is an image display device arranged in front of the main display device 7. The left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are movable gimmicks equipped with a display screen, and are configured to be able to change the position and orientation of the display screen by a mechanism not shown. The left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R may be liquid crystal display devices, as with the main display device 7, or may be other image display devices such as organic EL display devices, plasma displays, projectors, and dot matrices. The left sub-display device 10L is arranged at the lower left of the main display device 7, and has a first reserved image display area in which a reserved image 9A is displayed. In the first reserved image display area, the reserved image 9A is displayed according to the number of first reserved special images to be described later. The right sub-display device 10R is arranged at the lower right of the main display device 7, and has a second reserved image display area in which a reserved image 9B is displayed, and a reserved digestion image display area in which a reserved digestion image 9C is displayed. In the second reserved image display area, reserved images 9B are displayed according to the number of reserved second special figures described later. The reserved images 9A and 9B are images representing reserved positions, and are also called reserved icons 9A and 9B. The reserved consumption image 9C is an image representing the reserved position, and is also called the reserved image 9C or the reserved icon 9C. The first reserved icon and the second reserved icon are also collectively called simply reserved icons. By displaying the reserved images 9A and 9B, the number of reserved first special figures displayed on the first reserved display 43a described later and the number of reserved second special figures displayed on the second reserved display 43b can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. The reserved consumption image display area includes a reserved consumption display area that displays the reserved consumption image 9C. The reserved consumption image 9C corresponds to the currently changing effect pattern (effect patterns 8L, 8C, 8R) on the display screen 7a or the display screen of the sub-display device 10, and by displaying the reserved consumption image 9C, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the first special chart reservation or the second special chart reservation is being consumed ("consumption of reserved special chart" described below).

On the left and right sides of the main display device 7, there are provided first board movable bodies 14 (also called first movable gadgets 14), which are movable so-called gimmicks. The first movable gadgets 14 are configured with two semicircular members arranged on the left and right sides, respectively, that can move left and right. The first movable gadgets 14 are normally stationary in retracted positions (Fig. 1) on the left and right sides of the main display device 7, and can move (advance) from the retracted positions toward the center of the display screen 7a so as to approach each other, and come to rest at an advanced position in front of the display screen 7a (Figs. 53 to 55). The first movable gadgets 14 cover part of the main display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

A second board movable body 15 (also called the second movable gadget 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided above the main display device 7. The second movable gadget 15 is configured with a rectangular member (decorative part) marked "OARO" that can move up and down. The second movable gadget 15 is normally stationary in a retracted position above the main display device 7 (Figure 1), and can move (advance) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a and come to rest in an advanced position in front of the display screen 7a (Figures 56-59). The second movable gadget 15 covers part of the main display device 7 when stopped in the advanced position.

A stage section 11 is formed at the bottom of the sub-display device 10. The stage section 11 has a shape that can guide game balls rolling on the top surface of the stage section 11 to a first starting hole 20 described below. A warp section 12 is provided on the left side of the sub-display device 10. The warp section 12 has an entrance section through which game balls flow and an exit section through which game balls flow out, and causes game balls that flow in from the entrance section to flow out from the exit section to the stage section 11.

The illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is a transparent flat plate member attached to the central opening of the front frame 53, and the play area 3 of the play board 2 can be seen through the illumination panel 18. That is, the illumination panel 18 is disposed in front of the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, and the images displayed on the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 can be seen through the illumination panel 18. The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display a predetermined image on its main surface by irradiating the LED light from the end surface. The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display several types of images in multiple colors by varying the irradiation direction and color of the LED light.

The fixed winning device (center) 19 is located below the main display device 7 in the game area 3, and is equipped with a first starting hole (first starting winning hole, first ball entry hole, fixed starting hole) 20, which always allows the game ball to enter with a constant ease. The entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 triggers the drawing of a lottery for a first special symbol (jackpot lottery). In other words, the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 triggers the acquisition of a jackpot random number and the like, as well as the determination of a jackpot.

The normal variable winning device (electric chute) 22 is disposed below the first starting hole 20 in the game area 3, and includes a second starting hole (second starting winning hole, second ball entry hole, variable starting hole) 21. The entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 triggers the drawing of a second special pattern (drawing of small and big wins). The electric chute 22 includes a movable member 23 in front of the second starting hole 21, and the second starting hole 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chute solenoid 24 (Fig. 3). The second starting hole 21 is capable of receiving a game ball when the movable member 23 is in an open state. It is sufficient that the electric chute 22 allows a ball to enter the second starting hole 21 more easily when the movable member 23 is in an open state than when it is in a closed state, and may allow a ball to enter the second starting hole 21 when it is in a closed state.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is located above the first big prize device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow the game ball to pass through. The passage of the game ball through the gate 28 triggers a normal pattern lottery that determines whether or not the electric chute 22 will open. In other words, the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 triggers the acquisition of a normal pattern random number (winning random number) and a win determination, etc.

Here, the "special symbol jackpot lottery" refers to a process in which, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, a jackpot random number for determining the special symbol is obtained, and the obtained jackpot random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "jackpot" to determine whether or not a jackpot has been obtained. The result of the "jackpot" lottery is not immediately notified to the player, but rather, the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b described below displays a variable special symbol, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed stationary (determined), and the lottery result is notified to the player. The main display device 7 plays a pattern matching game in which the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner in sync with the variable display of the special symbols, and this pattern matching game more effectively notifies the player of the lottery result of the jackpot.

The "special symbol small prize lottery" refers to a process in which, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 21, a small prize random number for determining the special symbol is obtained, and the obtained small prize random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "small prize" to determine whether or not a small prize has been obtained. The result of the "small prize" lottery is not immediately notified to the player, but rather, the second special symbol display 41b described below displays a variable special symbol, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed stationary (determined), and the lottery result is notified to the player. The main display device 7 plays a pattern matching game in which the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner in sync with the variable display of the special symbols, and this pattern matching game more effectively notifies the player of the lottery result for the small prize.

"Drawing a normal pattern" refers to a process in which, when a gaming ball passes through gate 28, a random number for determining the normal pattern is acquired, and this acquired random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "win" to determine whether or not there is a win. The result of the drawing for the normal pattern is also not immediately announced when the gaming ball passes through gate 28; rather, a fluctuating display of the normal pattern is performed on normal pattern display 42 (described below), and after a predetermined fluctuating time has elapsed, the normal pattern corresponding to the lottery result is displayed as a confirmed one (lit or unlit), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first large prize winning device (first attacker, first special variable prize winning device) 31 is located above and to the right of the first starting hole 20 in the game area 3, and includes a first large prize winning hole (first special prize winning hole) 30, a V area 39, a non-V area 70, and a V opening and closing member 71. The first large prize winning hole 30 includes an opening and closing member (first special prize winning hole opening and closing member) 32 that allows or prevents the reception of game balls by a swing-type opening and closing action. The opening and closing member 32 is driven by a first large prize winning hole solenoid 33 (Figure 3). Game balls can enter the first large prize winning hole 30 when the opening and closing member 32 is in the open state.

The first large prize winning device 31 is equipped with a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (Figure 3), a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, a non-V area sensor 70a (Figure 3), a first large prize winning port sensor 30a (Figure 3), a V opening/closing member 71, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73 (Figure 3). The V area (specific area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specific area) 70 are configured inside the first large prize winning device 31 as areas through which a game ball that has passed through the first large prize winning port 30 can pass. The first large prize winning port sensor 30a is disposed upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70, and detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize winning port 30. The V area sensor 39a is disposed in the V area 39, and detects the passage of a game ball into the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is disposed in the non-V area 70 and detects the passage of the game ball into the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71. The V opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to distribute the game ball to the V area 39 in a first state (rotating state), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is located at the origin and distributes the game ball to the non-V area 70 in a second state (stopped state). In addition, the V-opening member 71 may be configured to move in a left-right direction with respect to the game board 2, as long as it has a function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70, without being limited to rotational movement. That is, when the V-opening member solenoid 73 is energized, it is in a retreat state (first state) in which the game ball is distributed to the V area 39, and when the V-opening member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is in an advance state (second state) in which the game ball is distributed to the non-V area 70. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the passage of the game ball into the V area 39 is a trigger for transition to a high probability state described later. In other words, the V area 39 is a probability variable operation port. On the other hand, the non-V area 70 is not a probability variable operation port. The first large winning device 31 of this embodiment further includes a first large winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first large winning device 31. The first big prize device discharge sensor is installed at the point where the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 join downstream, and counts the number of game balls that pass through the V area sensor 39a or the non-V area sensor 70a.

The second large prize winning device (second attacker, small prize attacker, second special variable prize winning device) 36 is located to the upper right of the first large prize winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and is equipped with a second large prize winning opening (second special prize winning opening) 35. The second large prize winning opening 35 is equipped with an opening/closing member (second special prize winning opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that inhibits or allows the reception of game balls by swinging open and closed. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by a second large prize winning opening solenoid 38 (Figure 3). When the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state, game balls can enter the second large prize winning opening 35. This second large prize winning device is a small prize attacker that is activated when a game ball enters the second starting opening 21 and wins the small prize lottery.

The large prize opening start opening 17 is located above the first large prize opening 30 in the game area 3, and the first large prize opening 30 opens when the game ball passes through.

The general winning opening 27 is provided at the bottom of the play area 3. The outlet 16 is provided at the bottom of the play area 3, and ejects game balls that do not win at any of the winning openings out of the play area 3. The displays 40 are located near the center of the right side of the play board 2. Details of the displays 40 will be described later.

The game area 3 has a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right game area 3B on the right side. A hitting style in which the game ball is shot so that it flows down the left game area 3A is called a "left hit". On the other hand, a hitting style in which the game ball is shot so that it flows down the right game area 3B is called a "right hit". The game machine 1 is configured so that a left hit can aim for winning at the first starting hole 20. On the other hand, a right hit can aim for passing through the gate 28 and winning at the second starting hole 21, the first large winning hole 30, and the second large winning hole 35.

Figure 2 is an enlarged view of the display devices 40. The display devices 40 include a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol reserved display 43a, a second special symbol reserved display 43b, and a normal symbol reserved display 44. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays the normal symbol. The first special symbol reserved display 43a displays the number of reserved activations (first special symbol reserved) of the first special symbol display 41a. The second special symbol reserved display 43b displays the number of reserved activations (second special symbol reserved) of the second special symbol display 41b. The regular symbol reserve display 44 displays the number of reserved activations (regular symbol reserves) stored in the regular symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to as "special symbols." The first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are collectively referred to as "special symbol display 41." The first special symbol reserve display 43a and the second special symbol reserve display 43b are collectively referred to as "special symbol reserve display 43."

The special symbol display 41 variably displays (varies) the special symbol (identification information) and then displays it in a stopped state to notify the result of a lottery (jackpot lottery) based on winning at the first start port 20 or the second start port 21. The special symbol (stopped symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) that is stopped is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the special symbol lottery. If the stopped symbol is a special symbol (jackpot symbol) of a predetermined jackpot stop mode, a special game (jackpot game) is played in which the first jackpot opening 30 or the second jackpot opening 35 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed (the type of jackpot that has been won). The opening patterns of the jackpot openings (first jackpot opening 30 and second jackpot opening 35) in the jackpot game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 variably displays (varies) the special symbol (identification information) and then displays it in a stopped state to notify the result of the lottery (small prize lottery) based on the winning of the second starting hole 21. The special symbol (stopped symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display) that is stopped is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the special symbol lottery. If the stopped symbol is a special symbol (small prize symbol) with a predetermined small prize stopping mode, a special game (small prize game) is played in which the second large prize hole 35 is opened in a predetermined opening pattern. The opening pattern of the second large prize hole 35 in the small prize game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol winning lottery depending on the lighting state of the LEDs. For example, when a big win (one of the multiple types of big wins described below) is won, the big win symbol is displayed with the first, second, fifth, and sixth LEDs from the left lit, as in "○○●●○○●●" (○: lit, ●: off). When a small win is won, the small win symbol is displayed with the first and second LEDs from the left lit, as in "○○●●●●●●" (○: lit, ●: off). When a loss occurs, a losing symbol is displayed with only the rightmost LED lit, as in "●●●●●●●○". A mode in which all LEDs are turned off as a losing symbol may be adopted. Before the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, a variable display (variable display) of the special symbol is performed for a predetermined variable time. The variable display mode may be, for example, each LED is lit so that light flows repeatedly from left to right. The manner of the variable display is not limited to the above manner and can be any lighting manner as long as the LEDs are not displayed as stopped (illuminated in a specific manner). For example, the manner of the variable display may be such that all LEDs flash simultaneously.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21, the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as the jackpot random number obtained for that entry are temporarily stored in the special pattern reservation memory area 85 (Fig. 5). Specifically, if the game ball enters the first start hole 20, it is stored in the first special pattern reservation memory area 85a (Fig. 5) as the first special pattern reservation, and if the game ball enters the second start hole 21, it is stored in the second special pattern reservation memory area 85b (Fig. 5) as the second special pattern reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special pattern reservations that can be stored in each special pattern reservation memory area 85, and in this embodiment, the upper limit is four for both the first special pattern reservation memory area 85a and the second special pattern reservation memory area 85b. The special pattern reservation stored in the special pattern reservation memory area 85 is consumed when it becomes possible to variably display the special pattern based on that special pattern reservation. "Consuming the reserved special symbols" refers to determining the jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the reserved special symbols, and executing the variable display of the special symbols to show the result of the determination. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, even if the variable display of the special symbols based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, even if a winning occurs during the variable display of the special symbols or during the execution of the special game, the right to the jackpot lottery for the winning can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of reserved special symbols is displayed on the reserved special symbol display 43. The first reserved special symbol display 43a and the second reserved special symbol display 43b are each composed of, for example, four LEDs. Each reserved special symbol display 43 displays the number of reserved special symbols by lighting the LEDs for the number of reserved special symbols.

The variable display of the normal symbol is triggered by the passage of the game ball through the gate 28. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays (varies) the normal symbol, and then displays it still to notify the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28. The normal symbol that is displayed still (normal symbol stop symbol, normal symbol derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display) is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of normal symbols by the normal symbol lottery. If the normal symbol stop symbol is a specific normal symbol that has been determined in advance (a normal symbol in a predetermined stop mode, i.e., a normal winning symbol), an auxiliary game is played in which the second start hole 21 is opened in an opening pattern that corresponds to the current game state. The opening pattern of the second start hole 21 will be described later.

The normal pattern display 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays a normal pattern according to the result of the normal pattern lottery depending on the lighting state of the LEDs. For example, if the lottery result is a win, a normal winning pattern with both LEDs lit is displayed as "○○" (○: lit, ●: off). If the lottery result is a loss, a normal loss pattern with only the right LED lit is displayed as "●○". A mode in which all LEDs are turned off as a normal loss pattern may be adopted. Before the normal pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the normal pattern is displayed in a predetermined change time. The mode of the change display may be, for example, both LEDs are turned on alternately. The mode of the change display is not limited to the above mode and can be any lighting mode as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, the mode of the change display may be all LEDs flashing at once.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal pattern random number (winning random number) acquired for that passage is temporarily stored as a normal pattern reserve in the normal pattern reserve memory area 86 (Figure 5). There is an upper limit to the number of normal pattern reserves that can be stored in the normal pattern reserve memory area 86, and the upper limit in this embodiment is four. The normal pattern reserve stored in the normal pattern reserve memory area 86 is consumed when it becomes possible to variable display the normal pattern based on that normal pattern reserve. The consumption of the normal pattern reserve means determining the normal pattern random number (winning random number) corresponding to that normal pattern reserve and executing the variable display of the normal pattern to show the result of the determination. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, even if the variable display of the normal pattern based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, even if a prize is won during the variable display of the normal pattern or during the execution of the auxiliary game, the right to draw the normal pattern for that passage can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of reserved maps is displayed on the reserved map display 44. The reserved map display 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of reserved maps by lighting up the LEDs corresponding to the number of reserved maps.

2. Electrical Configuration of the Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figs. 3 and 4. Fig. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board of the gaming machine 1. Fig. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (Fig. 3), a sub-control board 90 (Fig. 4), an image control board 100 (Fig. 4), a lamp control board 107 (Fig. 4), a sound control board 106 (Fig. 4), and a payout control board 110 (Fig. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as big win lottery and transition of game state, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is a performance control board that controls performances executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. The sub-control unit can be configured by at least including the sub-control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game on the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data to and from other boards, etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87. The input/output circuit 87 may be built into the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. Examples of sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the large prize opening start port sensor 17a, the first start port sensor 20a, the second start port sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first large prize port sensor 30a, the second large prize port sensor 35a, the V area sensor 39a, the non-V area sensor 70a, and the normal prize port sensor 27a. Examples of solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric chute solenoid 24, the first large prize port solenoid 33, the second large prize port solenoid 38, and the V opening and closing member solenoid 73. The large prize opening start opening sensor 17a is provided inside the large prize opening start opening 17 and detects a game ball that has entered the large prize opening start opening 17. The first start opening sensor 20a is provided inside the first start opening 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first start opening 20. The second start opening sensor 21a is provided inside the second start opening 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second start opening 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large prize opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first large prize opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first large prize opening 30. The second large prize opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second large prize opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second large prize opening 35. The V-area sensor 39a is provided in the V-area 39 inside the first large prize opening 30 and detects game balls that have passed through the V-area 39. The non-V-area sensor 70a is provided in the non-V-area 70 inside the first large prize opening 30 and detects game balls that have passed through the non-V-area 70. The regular prize opening sensor 27a is provided inside the regular prize opening 27 and detects game balls that have won in the regular prize opening 27. The electric chute solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chute 22. The first large prize opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first large prize opening device 31. The second large prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second large prize opening device 36. The V-opening member solenoid 73 drives the V-opening member 71 of the first large prize opening device 31.

The main control board 80 is connected to the displays 40 via an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 controls the display of the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, the normal symbol display 42, the first special symbol reserved display 43a, the second special symbol reserved display 43b, and the normal symbol reserved display 44.

The payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via the input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 to monitor payouts. The payout control board 110 is connected to the prize ball payout device 120, the loan ball payout device 130, and the card unit 135, and is connected to the launch device 112 via the launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out prize balls. The paid out prize balls are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The loan ball payout device 130 pays out loan balls. The payout control board 110 drives the ball-lending motor 131 of the ball-lending device 130 to dispense balls based on a signal from a card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1. The dispensed balls are detected by a ball-lending sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is disposed adjacent to the gaming machine 1 and outputs information about ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The launching device 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a launching motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a launching volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the launching device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 by the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 by the launching volume 115. Then, the launching motor 113 is driven so that the game balls are launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launching volume 115.

The sub-control board 90 (Figure 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub-control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a one-way communication connection that only allows signals to be transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. In other words, a unidirectional circuit (not shown, for example, a circuit using a diode) is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 as a means for restricting the direction of communication.

The sub-control board 90 includes a performance control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95. The performance control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the performance of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer 91 includes a sub-ROM 93 that stores programs for controlling the performance as the game progresses, a sub-RAM 94 used as a work memory, and a sub-CPU 92 that executes the programs stored in the sub-ROM 93. Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage area provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub-ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The performance control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from other boards, etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built into the performance control microcomputer 91. The sub-control board 90 is connected to an image control board 100, an audio control board 106, a lamp control board 107, and a relay board 108 via an input/output circuit 95.

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L, right sub display device 10R) according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In addition to a program for controlling the display, the ROM 103 stores still image data and video data to be displayed on the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, specifically image data such as characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, and symbols (including performance patterns) and background images. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding the image data. The CPU 102 executes the program stored in the ROM 103. The performance control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the main display device 7 and the sub-display device 10 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 91, and controls the display based on the read image data.

The speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106, and the performance control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80. Sound data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90. The audio control board 106 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may execute audio control based on commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 may be equipped with a ROM, and audio data may be stored in the ROM. The speaker 67 may also be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute audio control. Furthermore, audio data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

The lamp control board 107 is connected to the sub display device 10, the frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the first movable role 14, and the second movable role 15, and controls them. The performance control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 through the lamp control board 107 based on commands received from the main control board 80. In other words, the performance control microcomputer 91 creates light pattern data (data that determines the on/off and light color, etc., also called lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5, and controls the light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 according to the light emission pattern data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The performance control microcomputer 91 operates the sub display device 10, the first movable role 14, and the second movable role 15 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The performance control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation modes of the sub display device 10, the first movable role 14, and the second movable role 15, and controls the operation of the sub display device 10, the first movable role 14, and the second movable role 15 according to the operation pattern data. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be made to control the lighting of the lamps and the operation of the movable roles 14 and 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a ROM, and data regarding the light emission pattern and operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

The relay board 108 is connected to a performance button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a. The performance button detection switch 63a detects that the performance button 63 (Figure 1) has been pressed. When the performance button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the performance button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed.

3. Data Structure of the Gaming Machine The data structure of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 5 and 6. Figure 5 (A) is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. Figure 5 (B) is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. Figure 6 (A) is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. Figure 6 (B) is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the sub RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5(A)) stores a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol change pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, a change pattern determination table T6, an electric chute opening pattern determination table T7, a large prize opening pattern determination table T8, a V-shaped opening member opening pattern determination table T9, and a small win determination table T10. These determination tables are referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5B) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special action status set area 84d, a special chart reserved memory area 85, and a normal chart reserved memory area 86. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit in the main control main process (described later) are set, and a pre-determination command, a reserved ball number command, a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V pass command, a customer waiting standby command, and the like are set. The flag set area 84b is an area in which flags indicating the state of the gaming machine and the game state are set in the main control main process (described later), and a jackpot flag, a jackpot end flag, a first winning flag, a second winning flag, a small winning flag, a V flag, a sure win flag, a time-saving flag, and the like are set. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in the main control main process (described later) are set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a probability change counter, a time reduction counter, etc. are set. The special operation status set area 84d is an area where a status in the special operation process described later is set. The special pattern reserved memory area 85 includes a first special pattern reserved memory area 85a in which the first special pattern reserved is stored, and a second special pattern reserved memory area 85b in which the second special pattern reserved is stored. The first special pattern reserved memory area 85a is provided with a first memory area, a second memory area, a third memory area, and a fourth memory area for storing random number groups (reserved information) such as random numbers for special patterns corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the first special pattern reserved, respectively. The second special symbol reserved memory area 85b is provided with a first memory area, a second memory area, a third memory area, and a fourth memory area for storing random number groups (reserved information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the second special symbol reserved, respectively. The normal symbol reserved memory area 86 is provided with a first memory area, a second memory area, a third memory area, and a fourth memory area for storing random number groups (reserved information) such as normal symbol random numbers (winning random numbers) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the normal symbol reserved, respectively. In addition to the above areas, the main RAM 84 is provided with a winning type set buffer in which special symbol stop symbol data is set, and a drive data buffer in which drive data for driving the sub display device 10 and the movable parts 14 and 15 is set.

The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 6(A)) stores a look-ahead performance pattern determination table T51, a core performance pattern determination table T52, a chance-up performance pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. These determination tables are referenced by the performance control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control main process (described later) executed by the performance control microcomputer 91. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) includes a command memory area 94a, a performance command set area 94b, a pre-judgment information memory area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command memory area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit in the sub-control main process (described later) are stored, and includes pre-judgment commands, reserved ball number commands, fluctuation start commands, fluctuation stop commands, opening commands, round designation commands, ending commands, game state designation commands, V pass commands, and customer waiting standby commands. The performance command set area 94b is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 in the sub-control main process (described later) are set, and includes a fluctuation performance start command, a pre-fluctuation end command, a fluctuation performance end command, an opening performance start command, a round performance start command, an ending performance start command, and the like. The pre-determination information storage area 94c stores pre-determination information in the sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area where counters used in the sub-control main process (described later) are set, including a random number counter, a first special reserved effect counter, a second special reserved effect counter, a normal reserved effect counter, a special chance effect counter, and a time-saving effect counter.

Figure 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. Figure 7 (A) shows the random numbers acquired by the gaming control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and Figure 7 (B) shows the random numbers acquired by the performance control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control unit side. The gaming control microcomputer 81 is configured to acquire a "jackpot random number", a "jackpot type random number", a "reach random number", a "variable pattern random number", a "normal pattern random number (win random number)", and a "small win random number" at the timing described below. The "jackpot random number" is a random number used in the lottery to determine whether or not there is a jackpot (jackpot determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The "jackpot type random number" is a random number used in the lottery to determine the type of jackpot that has been won (jackpot type determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not a reach occurs in the performance pattern change performance that indicates the result when the jackpot judgment is a miss, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The reach is a state in which there is only one performance pattern remaining among multiple performance patterns (decorative patterns) that is displayed in a changing manner, and depending on which of the performance patterns that are displayed in a changing manner are displayed as stopped, a combination of performance patterns that indicates a jackpot win (for example, a "7↓7" state). Note that the performance pattern that is displayed in a stopped state in the reach state may be displayed as if it is flickering on the display screen 7a. The "change pattern random number" is a random number used to determine a change pattern including a change time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "normal pattern random number (win random number)" is used in a lottery (normal pattern lottery) to determine whether or not to play an auxiliary game that opens the electric chute 22. The normal pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 255. The "small win random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not there is a small win (small win determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "big win random number", "big win type random number", "reach random number", and "variable pattern random number" are obtained based on the ball entering the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21. The "small win random number" is obtained based on the ball entering the second start hole 21. The random number group obtained based on the ball entering the first start hole 20 is stored in the first special pattern reserve memory area 85a, and the random number group obtained based on the ball entering the second start hole 21 is stored in the second special pattern reserve memory area 85b. The "normal pattern random number (win random number)" is obtained based on the passage through the gate 28. The obtained normal pattern random number value is stored in the normal pattern reserve memory area 86.

The performance control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "look-ahead performance random number" and a "chance up random number" at the timing described below. The "look-ahead performance random number" is a random number used to determine the look-ahead performance during a variable performance, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "chance up random number" is a random number used to determine the chance up performance during a variable performance, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "look-ahead performance random number" is acquired based on a pre-determination command being output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit. The acquired random value group is stored in the sub-RAM 94. The "chance up random number" is acquired based on a variation start command being output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit. The acquired random value group is stored in the sub-RAM 94.

Figure 8 is a diagram for explaining the judgment tables T1 to T4 and T10. Figure 8(A) shows a diagram for explaining the big win judgment table T1, Figure 8(B) shows a diagram for explaining the reach judgment table T2, Figure 8(C) shows a diagram for explaining the normal pattern win judgment table T3, Figure 8(D) shows a diagram for explaining the normal pattern change pattern judgment table T4, and Figure 8(E) shows a diagram for explaining the small win judgment table T10.

The jackpot determination table T1 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control main process (described later) to determine whether the acquired jackpot random number (any of 0 to 65535) corresponds to a "jackpot" or a "miss". In FIG. 8(A), it is shown that in the "normal probability state", if the jackpot random number is "0 to 164", it is determined to be a "jackpot" (approximate probability 1/397), and if the jackpot random number is "a number other than 0 to 164 (165 to 65535)", it is determined to be a "miss". In addition, in the "high probability state", if the jackpot random number is "0 to 649", it is determined to be a "jackpot" (approximate probability 1/101), and if the jackpot random number is "a number other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)", it is determined to be a "miss". The contents of the "normal probability state" and "high probability state" will be described later.

The reach judgment table T2 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control main process (described later) to determine whether the acquired reach random number (any of 0 to 127) corresponds to "reach" or "no reach". Note that this reach judgment table T2 is not referred to when the acquired jackpot random number corresponds to "jackpot". In FIG. 8 (B), in the "non-time-saving state", when the reach random number is "0 to 13", it is judged as "reach", and when the reach random number is "a number other than 0 to 13 (14 to 127)", it is judged as "no reach". Also, in the "time-saving state", when the reach random number is "0 to 5", it is judged as "reach", and when the reach random number is "a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)", it is judged as "no reach". The contents of the "time-saving state" and "non-time-saving state" will be described later. In the reach judgment table T2, the time-saving state is less likely to trigger a reach when missing than the non-time-saving state. This is because the time-saving state is more likely to select a miss without a reach that has a short fluctuation time, which speeds up the consumption of reserved special charts.

The normal symbol hit determination table T3 is a table that is referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine whether the acquired normal symbol random number value (any of 0 to 255) corresponds to a "hit" or a "miss." FIG. 8(C) shows that in the "non-time-saving state," if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 2," it is determined to be a "hit," and if the normal symbol random number value is "a number other than 0 to 2 (3 to 255)," it is determined to be a "miss." It also shows that in the "time-saving state," if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 254," it is determined to be a "hit," and if the normal symbol random number value is "a number other than 0 to 254 (255)," it is determined to be a "miss."

The normal symbol change pattern determination table T4 is a table that is referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine how many seconds the normal symbol change time is depending on the game state (non-time-saving state or time-saving state). Figure 8 (D) shows that in the "non-time-saving state", the normal symbol change time is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the "time-saving state", the normal symbol change time is determined to be "1 second".

The small win determination table T10 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control main process (described later) to determine whether the acquired small win random number (any of 0 to 127) corresponds to a "small win" or a "miss". Note that this small win determination table T10 is not referred to when the acquired big win random number corresponds to a "big win". In FIG. 8 (E), in all states (regardless of the game state), if the small win random number is "0 to 63", it is determined to be a "small win" (probability 1/2), and if the small win random number is "a number other than 0 to 63 (64 to 127)", it is determined to be a "miss". Note that the small win determination table T10 is a table that is referred to when the game ball enters the second start hole 21 (it is not referred to when the game ball enters the first start hole 20). Also, the small win determination table T10 is not referred to when it is determined to be a "big win".

Figure 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control main process (described later) to determine the "jackpot type" and the "type of special symbol" according to the acquired jackpot type random number (any of 0 to 127). In Figure 9, when the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is selected in the lottery, if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passing jackpot" and the special symbol 1 stopping symbol (special symbol stopping symbol) is determined to be "jackpot symbol 1". If the jackpot type random number is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passing jackpot" and the special symbol stopping symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 2". When the jackpot type random number value is "50-55", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 15R) V-scheduled jackpot" and the special symbol stopping pattern is determined to be "jackpot pattern 3". When the jackpot type random number value is "56-67", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V-scheduled jackpot" and the special symbol stopping pattern is determined to be "jackpot pattern 4". When the jackpot type random number value is "68-127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V-scheduled non-passing jackpot" and the special symbol stopping pattern is determined to be "jackpot pattern 5". On the other hand, when the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is selected, if the jackpot type random number is "0-40", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passing jackpot" and the special symbol 2 stopping symbol (special symbol stopping symbol) is determined to be "jackpot symbol 1". If the jackpot type random number is "41-82", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passing jackpot" and the special symbol 2 stopping symbol (special symbol stopping symbol) is determined to be "jackpot symbol 2". If the jackpot type random number is "83-127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and the special symbol stopping symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 5". In addition, by referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, the "special symbol stop pattern data" corresponding to the special symbol stop pattern, the "opening (OP) command", the "round designation command", and the "ending (ED) command" of the special game can also be specified. The specific contents of the "16RV scheduled passing jackpot", "16R (actually 15R) V scheduled passing jackpot", "16R (actually 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot", and "16R (actually 13R) V non-scheduled passing jackpot" will be described later.

Figure 10 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time-saving state. Figure 11 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the time-saving state. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 is a table that is referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the fluctuation pattern according to the acquired fluctuation pattern random number value (0 to 127). Figure 10 shows, for example, that in the non-time-saving state, when a ball enters the first starting hole 20, the jackpot determination table T1 determines it as a "miss", the reach determination table T2 determines it as a "reach", the number of reserved balls is "1 to 2", and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 60", the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P7". In addition, when the reserved number in the second starting hole 21 is consumed in the non-time-saving state (it is difficult to win in the second starting hole 21 in the non-time-saving state, so when the time-saving state (high probability high base state) ends and the normal state (non-time-saving state, low probability low base state) is entered, the reserved number in the second starting hole 21 is consumed), it is judged as a "jackpot" in the jackpot judgment table T1, it is judged as a "jackpot expected to pass 16RV" and "jackpot pattern 2 (21H)" in the jackpot type judgment table T5, and when the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 127", the fluctuation pattern is judged as "P22". In addition, when the reserved number in the second starting hole 21 is consumed in the non-time-saving state, it is judged as a "small jackpot" in the small jackpot judgment table T10, and when the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 127", the fluctuation pattern is judged as "P34".

11 shows, for example, that if a ball enters the first starting hole 20 in the time-saving state, the ball is judged as a "miss" in the jackpot judgment table T1, is judged as a "no reach" in the reach judgment table T2, the number of reserved balls is "3-4", and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0-127", the fluctuation pattern is judged as "P56". Also, if a ball enters the second starting hole 21 in the time-saving state, the ball is judged as a "jackpot" in the jackpot judgment table T1, is judged as a "16RV passing jackpot" and "jackpot pattern 2 (21H)" in the jackpot type judgment table T5, and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0-127", the fluctuation pattern is judged as "P62". It also shows that if a prize is won at the second starting hole 21 during the time-saving state, a "small win" is determined in the small win determination table T10, and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 127," the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P74."

As shown in Figs. 10 and 11, if the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. For example, in a non-time-saving state, when the reserve of the second starting hole 21 is consumed and it is determined to be a small win, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P34" and the fluctuation time is determined to be 15,000 msec. Also, in a time-saving state, when the second starting hole 21 is won and it is determined to be a small win, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P74" and the fluctuation time is determined to be 3,000 msec. Note that during the time-saving state (high probability high base state), it is also during the small win rush (RUSH) period described later until the next big win occurs. In other words, during the small win rush period, when the second starting hole 21 is won, the fluctuation time is 3,000 msec and the probability of a small win is 1/2, so small wins occur frequently in a short period of time. And during the small win rush period, you can aim for a big win while increasing the number of game balls you have. In addition, when a reach occurs, it is also determined whether the reach will be a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). A super reach is a reach performance that has a longer change time after the reach than a normal reach. Here, five types of super reaches (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) with different change times are set. In SP1 to SP3, the normal reach is followed by a development. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of a pseudo consecutive win. In particular, SP5 is a special reach change pattern ("P62") in which a pseudo big win suggestion performance is performed by winning the second starting hole 21 during a small win rush (RUSH) period that occurs in a time-saving state (high probability high base state) described later. SP5 may also occur during the consumption of reserved balls in the second starting hole 21 when the time-saving state (high probability, high base state) ends and the normal state (non-time-saving state, low probability, low base state) is entered, and in this case too, a pseudo jackpot suggestion effect may be performed (variation pattern "P22").

Figure 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chute opening pattern determination table T7 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control main process (described later) to determine the opening pattern of the electric chute 22 depending on the game state (non-time-saving state or time-saving state). In Figure 12 (A), it is shown that in the "non-time-saving state", the opening pattern of the electric chute 22 is determined to be "opening pattern 11", and in the "time-saving state", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 12". Figure 12 (B) shows the contents of opening pattern 11 and opening pattern 12. In opening pattern 11, the electric chute 22 is opened once and for an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In opening pattern 12, the electric chute 22 is opened three times, with an opening time of 2.0 seconds per time, and an interval (opening interval) of 1.0 seconds. However, if a predetermined number of game balls are won (a maximum of 10 balls), the electric chute 22 will close even if there is still time left to open it.

Figure 13 is a diagram for explaining the large prize opening pattern determination table T8. The large prize opening pattern determination table T8 is a table that is referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 according to the special symbol stop pattern data (Figure 9). In Figure 13 (A), it is shown that, as the large prize opening pattern in a large prize game, when the special chart stopping pattern data is "11H", "12H", "20H" or "21H", the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 21", when the special chart stopping pattern data is "14H", "15H" or "22H", the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 22", and when the special chart stopping pattern data is "13H", the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 23". Also, FIG. 13(A) shows that, as the large prize opening pattern in a small prize game, when the special symbol stopping pattern data is "20H", the opening pattern of the second large prize opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 25", and when the special symbol stopping pattern data is "21H", the opening pattern of the second large prize opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 26".

Figure 13 (B) shows the contents of opening pattern 21, opening pattern 22, and opening pattern 23 as the large prize opening opening pattern in the large prize game. In opening pattern 21, the first large prize opening 30 is opened once and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening) in the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, and the second large prize opening 35 is opened once and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening) in the 14th and 16th rounds. In opening pattern 22, the first large prize opening 30 is opened once and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening) in the 1st to 13th rounds, the second large prize opening 35 is opened once and the opening time is 0.1 seconds (short opening) in the 14th and 16th rounds, and the first large prize opening 30 is opened once and the opening time is 0.1 seconds (short opening) in the 15th round. In opening pattern 23, the first large prize opening 30 is opened once and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in rounds 1 to 13 and 15, the second large prize opening 35 is opened once and for an opening time of 0.1 seconds (short opening) in round 14, and the second large prize opening 35 is opened once and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in round 16. However, if a predetermined number of game balls have won (prescribed number of winnings, up to 9 balls), the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 are closed even if there is still opening time remaining.

In FIG. 13(C), the contents of opening pattern 25 and opening pattern 26 are shown as the large prize opening opening pattern in the small prize game. In opening pattern 25, the second large prize opening 35 is opened once and for an opening time of 1.0 seconds. In opening pattern 26, the second large prize opening 35 is opened five times and for an opening time of 0.3 seconds. In other words, in the small prize game, the first large prize opening 30 is not opened, and only the second large prize opening 35 is opened. Note that opening pattern 25 is performed when a "16RV passing planned large prize" occurs due to the large prize pattern 1 (20H) of special chart 2, during the small prize rush period after the large prize game ends, and while the reserve of the second start opening 21 is consumed after the small prize rush ends. The opening pattern 26 is performed when a "16RV passing planned jackpot" occurs due to the jackpot pattern 2 (21H) on the special chart 2, during the small jackpot rush period after the jackpot game ends, and while the reserve in the second starting port 21 is consumed after the small jackpot rush ends. In other words, the opening pattern 26 is the opening pattern for the small jackpot game that is performed after the jackpot game when the jackpot is reached via the variable pattern ("P62") of the dedicated reach (SP5) in which the pseudo jackpot suggestion performance described below is performed. In other words, the large prize opening pattern in the small jackpot game is different when the jackpot is reached via the pseudo jackpot suggestion performance and when the jackpot is reached without going through the pseudo jackpot suggestion performance.

Figure 14 is a diagram for explaining the V-opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V-opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is a table that is referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the opening pattern of the V-opening/closing member 71 according to the special symbol stop pattern data (Figure 9). In Figure 14 (A), when the special symbol stop pattern data is "11H", "12H", "20H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the V-opening/closing member 71 is determined to be "opening pattern 31", when the special symbol stop pattern data is "13H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 32", when the special symbol stop pattern data is "14H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 33", and when the special symbol stop pattern data is "15H" or "22H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 34". 14B shows the contents of the opening pattern 31, the opening pattern 32, the opening pattern 33, and the opening pattern 34. In the opening pattern 31, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30 in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th rounds, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds. In the 10th and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a long time of up to 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30 in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th rounds, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds. In the 8th and 10th races, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a long time of up to 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30 in the 2nd and 6th races, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a long time of up to 31.5 seconds. In the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th races, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30. In opening pattern 34, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30 in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 seconds.

4. Description of jackpots, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "jackpots", "small jackpots" and "losses" as the results of the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of a "jackpot", a "jackpot symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of a "small jackpot", a "small jackpot symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of a "loss", a "loss symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display 41. When a jackpot is won, a "jackpot game" is executed in which the jackpot winning holes (the first jackpot winning hole 30 and the second jackpot winning hole 35) are opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol (type of jackpot) that is displayed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit opening games), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the final round game ends. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game. The time (interval time) during which the large prize opening is closed between round games is included in the open round game before the closure. When a small prize is won, a "small prize game" is executed in which the large prize opening (second large prize opening 35) is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the large prize that triggered the small prize rush described below.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. 9. Here, the types of jackpots are roughly divided into two types: a "V-passing jackpot" and a "V-non-passing jackpot".
A "V-passing jackpot (probable jackpot)" is a jackpot that operates the opening/closing member 32, the opening/closing member 37, and the V-opening/closing member 71 in an opening pattern (V-passing opening pattern) that allows the game ball to pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game. In addition, a "V-passing jackpot (probable jackpot)" is a jackpot in which the game state is a high probability high base state from the end of the jackpot game to the start of the next jackpot game, and during that period, the second starting hole 21 is frequently won and small jackpots occur, resulting in a small jackpot rush period. Here, jackpots with special stop pattern data of 11H to 14H, 20H, and 21H correspond to a "V-passing jackpot (probable jackpot)". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in Figure 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in Figure 14 is (opening pattern 21: opening pattern 31), (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 33), or (opening pattern 23: opening pattern 32), it becomes possible for the game ball to pass into the V area 39 during the jackpot game.
The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot (normal jackpot)" is a jackpot that operates the opening/closing member 32, the opening/closing member 37, and the V opening/closing member 71 in an opening pattern (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) that makes it impossible for the game ball to pass through to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. In addition, the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot (normal jackpot)" is a jackpot in which the game state becomes a low probability low base state after the end of the jackpot game, during which it becomes difficult to win the second starting hole 21, and therefore the small winning rush period after the end of the jackpot game does not occur. Here, a jackpot with special chart stop pattern data of 15H and 22H corresponds to the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 34), the game ball cannot pass through to the V area 39 during the jackpot game.
As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening/closing members 32 and 37 serves as both a V-passage scheduled opening pattern and a V-non-passage scheduled opening pattern.

The "V passing scheduled jackpot" includes the "16RV passing scheduled jackpot", the "16R (actually 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot", and the "16R (actually 15R) V passing scheduled jackpot". The "16RV passing scheduled jackpot" has a total of 16Rs. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first large prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R. In 14R and 16R, the second large prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R (Figure 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening and closing member 71 is opened for a long time (Figure 14: opening pattern 31), and it is easy to pass through to the V area 39 in the first large prize opening 30.

In the "16R (actually 13R) V-pass scheduled jackpot", the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first large prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R, but in 15R, the first large prize opening 30 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per R, and in 14R and 16R, the second large prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per R (Figure 13: Opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 13R) V-pass scheduled jackpot", the opening time of the large prize opening is extremely short from 14R to 16R, making it a round in which no prize balls are expected to be won. In other words, the "16R (actually 13R) V-pass scheduled jackpot" is a jackpot of 13R in effect. In rounds 2 and 6, the V-shaped opening and closing member 71 is opened long (Figure 14: opening pattern 33), making it easy to pass through to the V-shaped area 39 inside the first large winning opening 30.

In the "16R (actually 15R) V-pass scheduled jackpot", the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first large prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R, and in 16R, the second large prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R, but in 14R, the second large prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per R (Figure 13: Opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 15R) V-pass scheduled jackpot", the opening time of the large prize opening is extremely short in 14R, making it a round in which no prize balls are expected to be won. In other words, the "16R (actually 15R) V-pass scheduled jackpot" is a jackpot of essentially 15R. In rounds 8 and 10, the V-shaped opening and closing member 71 is opened long (Figure 14: opening pattern 32), making it easy to pass through to the V-shaped area 39 inside the first large prize opening 30.

The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" of opening pattern 22, in which the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first large prize winning hole 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round, but in 15R, the first large prize winning hole 30 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per round, and in 14R and 16R, the second large prize winning hole 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per round (Figure 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", the opening time of the large prize winning hole is extremely short from 14R to 16R, making it a round in which no prize balls are expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a jackpot of essentially 13R. At 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened, but the opening is a short opening (Figure 14: opening pattern 34), making it almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V-shaped area 39 inside the first large winning opening 30.

As shown in FIG. 9, the distribution rate of the jackpot in the drawing for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is 68/128 (approximately 53%) for the V-passing jackpot (jackpot with small jackpot rush) and 60/128 (approximately 47%) for the V-non-passing jackpot. In contrast, the distribution rate of the jackpot in the drawing for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is 83/128 (approximately 64.8%) for the V-passing jackpot (jackpot with small jackpot rush) and 45/128 (approximately 35.2%) for the V-non-passing jackpot. In this way, in the gaming machine 1, the jackpot lottery (lottery for the second special symbol) held when the game ball enters the second start hole 21 is set to be more advantageous for the player than the jackpot lottery (lottery for the first special symbol) held when the game ball enters the first start hole 20.

5. Description of the gaming state The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described. The gaming control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability variation control" and "variation time reduction control" for the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display 42, respectively. Here, the state in which the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs probability variation control on the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 is called a "high probability state (high probability state, probability variation state, probability change state)," and the state in which the probability variation control is not performed is simply called a "normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state)." The gaming control microcomputer 81 realizes the high probability state by performing a jackpot determination using a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8(A)) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be a jackpot is greater in the high probability state than in the normal probability state, as the probability variation control of the special symbols. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher probability of jackpot than the normal probability state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control on the special pattern of the special pattern display device 41, the probability that the display result (stop pattern) of the variable display of the special pattern by the special pattern display device 41 will be a jackpot pattern is higher than when the probability fluctuation control is not being executed.

In addition, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the time-shortening of the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is called the "time-shortening state", and the state in which the time-shortening of the special symbol is not controlled is simply called the "non-time-shortening state". In the time-shortening state, the time-shortening of the special symbol (the time from the start of the display of the special symbol to the derivation of the display result) is shorter than in the non-time-shortening state. The game control microcomputer 81 judges the variation pattern using the variation pattern judgment table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) that is determined so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often than in the non-time-shortening state in the time-shortening state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the variation time-shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, a short variation time is more likely to be selected as the variation time of the variable display of the special symbol compared to when the variation time-shortening control is not executed. As a result, in the time-shortening state, the pace of consumption of the special symbol reservation is faster, and effective winning (winning that can be stored as the special symbol reservation) at the starting port is more likely to occur. This allows players to aim for a big win while playing smoothly. The game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them. However, in this example, an embodiment in which probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control are executed simultaneously is shown, as described below.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal pattern of the normal pattern display 42 in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening control for the special pattern of the special pattern display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal pattern in the time-shortening state, but does not execute them in the non-time-shortening state. The game control microcomputer 81 performs the hit judgment (judgment of the normal pattern) using the normal pattern hit judgment table T3 (FIG. 8(C)) in which the number of normal pattern random number values (hit random number values) judged as a hit is higher in the time-shortening state than in the non-time-shortening state, as the probability fluctuation control for the normal pattern. Therefore, in the time-shortening state, the hit probability is higher than in the normal pattern normal probability state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control on the normal pattern of the normal pattern display device 42, the probability that the display result (stop pattern) of the variable display of the normal pattern by the normal pattern display device 42 will be a winning pattern is higher than when the probability fluctuation control is not executed. In the time-saving state, the normal pattern fluctuation time is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. Here, the normal pattern fluctuation time is 30 seconds in the non-time-saving state, but is 1 second in the time-saving state (FIG. 8 (D)). Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chute 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the opening time extension control on the electric chute 22. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chute 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the opening number increase control on the electric chute 22. In a situation where the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and the opening time extension control and the opening number increase control for the electric chute 22, the electric chute 22 is opened more frequently and the game balls enter the second start hole 21 more frequently than when these controls are not executed. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of winning balls to the number of shot balls, becomes higher. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called a "high base state", and the state in which they are not executed is called a "low base state". In the high base state, it is possible to aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls in hand. The high base state is a state in which the so-called electric support control (control that supports the entry into the second start hole 21 by the electric chute 22) is executed. The high base state (electric support control state) does not have to execute all of the above controls. That is, by executing one or more of the following controls, it is sufficient that the electric chute 22 is more likely to open than when the control is not executed: probability fluctuation control for the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 42, fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 42, opening time extension control for the electric chute 22, and opening count increase control for the electric chute 22. Also, the high base state (electric support control state) may be controlled independently without being associated with the time-saving state.

In the gaming machine 1, the game state after a jackpot game due to winning a V-passing jackpot is a high probability state, a time-saving state, and a high base state if the jackpot game passes through the V region 39 during the jackpot game. This game state is particularly called a "high probability high base state" or a "high probability time-saving state". The high probability high base state ends when the variable display of the special pattern is executed 10,000 times. In other words, the high probability high base state ends when the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is executed. In addition, the game state after a jackpot game due to winning a V-non-passing jackpot is a normal probability state (non-high probability state, i.e., a low probability state), a non-time-saving state, and a low base state (non-electric support control state) if the jackpot game does not pass through the V region 39 (it almost never does). This game state is particularly called a "low probability low base state". The low probability low base state is sometimes called the "normal game state" or the "low probability non-time-saving state (simply called the non-time-saving state)." When playing the gaming machine 1 for the first time, the game state after powering on is this low probability low base state. In addition, although not implemented in this example, there is also a game state that is a normal probability state (non-high probability state, i.e., a low probability state), a time-saving state, and a high base state (electric support control state), and these game states are particularly called the "low probability high base state" and the "low probability time-saving state" (a state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state is called a "specific game state"). In addition, the state during which a special game (jackpot game) is being played is sometimes called the "special game state (jackpot game state)."

In a high base state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, it is more advantageous to advance the game by hitting the ball to the right game area 3B (Fig. 1). This is because the electric support control makes it easier to open the electric chute 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the second start hole 21 than the first start hole 20. For this reason, in a high base state, the ball is hit to the right to enter the second start hole 21 while passing through the gate 28, which is the trigger for the normal pattern lottery. This allows more start wins (entry into the second start hole 21) than hitting to the left, and small wins can be generated frequently. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the game is played by hitting to the right even during a jackpot game. On the other hand, in a low base state, it is more advantageous to advance the game by hitting the ball to the left game area 3A (Fig. 1) by hitting to the left. This is because in the low electric base state, electric support control is not being executed, so the electric chute 22 is less likely to open than in the high base state, making it more difficult to win in the second start hole 21; in other words, it is easier to win in the first start hole 20 than in the second start hole 21. For this reason, in the low base state, the ball is hit from the left in order to win in the first start hole 20. This allows more start wins (wins in the first start hole 20) to be obtained than by hitting from the right.

6. Operation of the game control microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (Fig. 3) will be described with reference to Figs. 15 to 34. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the win/lose determination means (Fig. 23) and the win/lose advance determination means (Figs. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
15 is a flow chart of the main control process. When the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the gaming control microcomputer 81 reads out a program for executing the main control process from the main ROM 83. In the main control process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first performs initial settings (step S001). In the initial settings, for example, the main CPU 82 is set, and various flags, statuses, counters, etc. are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The initial settings are performed only once after the power supply is turned on, and are not performed thereafter.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits interrupts from the interrupt process (step S002) and performs the normal and special symbol main random number update process (step S003). In this normal and special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 updates the various random number counter values (jackpot random number, jackpot type random number, reach random number, variable pattern random number, normal symbol random number, and small win random number) shown in FIG. 7(A) by adding 1. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" and may be changed randomly. Each random number may also be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit consisting of a counter IC or the like.

After the normal and special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 allows the interrupt process to be interrupted (step S004). While the interrupt is allowed, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 4 msec). That is, the main timer interrupt process is executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 4 msec). Then, from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process, the update process of various counter values by the normal and special symbol main random number update process is repeatedly executed. Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 when the interrupt is prohibited, the main timer interrupt process does not start immediately, but starts after the interrupt is allowed.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flow chart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7 (A). This random number update process is the same as the normal and special pattern main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the update process of various random number counter values is performed both during the execution period of the main timer interrupt process and during other periods (the period from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process).

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs input processing (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads the detection signals detected by the various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1, and sets payout data for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning hole in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. The various sensors are, for example, the first start hole sensor 20a, the second start hole sensor 21a, the first large winning hole sensor 30a, the second large winning hole sensor 35a, the normal winning hole sensor 27a, and the normal winning hole sensor 29a (Figure 3).

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the start hole sensor detection process (step S103), the normal operation process (step S104), the special operation process (step S105), the V-area sensor detection process (step S106), and the reserved ball number process (step S107) in that order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball number process, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the output process (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the commands and the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each of the above processes to the sub-control board 90. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 executes other processes (step S109). In the other processes, for example, the second special chart reserved display 43b is controlled to a display mode showing the number based on the reserved ball number of the special chart 2 described later, and the first special chart reserved display 43a is controlled to a display mode showing the number based on the reserved ball number of the special chart 1.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 17 is a flow chart of the start-hole sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether or not a game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This judgment is made based on whether or not a game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. If the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S202). The number of reserved balls for normal symbols is the number of reserved normal symbols, and more specifically, is the value of a counter that counts the number of reserved normal symbols provided in the main RAM 84. If the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. If the number of reserved normal symbol balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved normal symbol balls (step S203), and then a normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: value of label-TRND-H), and stores the acquired random number value in the first to fourth memory areas of the normal symbol reserved memory area 86 of the main RAM 84 according to the current number of reserved normal symbol balls.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not a game ball has entered the second start hole 21. This judgment is made based on whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second start hole sensor 21a. If a game ball has not entered the second start hole 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. If a game ball has entered (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S206). The number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is the number of reserved second special charts, and more specifically, is the value of a counter that counts the number of reserved second special charts provided in the main RAM 84. If the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is "4" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. If the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 is "3" or less (step S206: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 (step S207), and then a special chart 2 related random number acquisition process is performed (step S208). Here, the value of the big win random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-A), the value of the big win type random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-AS), the value of the reach random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-RC), the value of the variation pattern random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-T1), and the value of the small win random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-K) are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number group in the memory area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 among the first to fourth memory areas of the second special chart reservation memory area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number group in a buffer (pre-determination buffer) different from the second special chart reserved memory area 85b for the special chart 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 18) described later. After the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special chart 2 pre-determination process (step S209). The details of the special chart 2 pre-determination process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting hole 20. This judgment is made based on whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first starting hole sensor 20a. If a game ball has not entered the first starting hole 20 (step S210: NO), this process is terminated. If a game ball has entered the first starting hole 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S211). The number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is the number of reserved first special charts, and more specifically, is the value of a counter that counts the number of reserved first special charts provided in the main RAM 84. If the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is "4" (step S211: YES), this process is terminated. If the number of reserved balls for the special chart 1 is "3" or less (step S211: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for the special chart 1 (step S212), and then a random number acquisition process related to the special chart 1 is performed (step S213). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the variation pattern random number counter are acquired in accordance with the above-mentioned special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number group in a storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls for the special chart 1 among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special chart reservation storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 also temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number group in a buffer (pre-determination buffer) different from the first special chart reservation storage area 85a for the special chart 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 19) described later. After the special chart 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special chart 1 pre-determination process (step S214). The details of the special chart 1 pre-determination process will be described later.

[Special Drawing 2 Pre-Decision Processing]
FIG. 18 is a flow chart of the special chart 2 pre-judgment process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the probability variable flag is ON or not (step S301). If the probability variable flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process is terminated. That is, if the probability variable flag is OFF, the pre-judgment is not performed. On the other hand, if the probability variable flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot pre-judgment by referring to the high probability state table in the jackpot judgment table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires the jackpot random number value as the judgment value temporarily stored in the pre-judgment buffer by the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-determination of whether or not a jackpot has been generated by using the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) and the jackpot random number value to be referred to. Here, since the probability state is high (the probability variable flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-determination of whether or not a jackpot has been generated by referring to the table for the high probability state (the jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") in the jackpot determination table T1. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "649", the pre-determination is a "jackpot", and when it is any other value, the pre-determination is a "miss". In this embodiment, the pre-determination is performed by using the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) to be described later. However, in another embodiment, the pre-determination may be performed by using a jackpot determination table for pre-determination that is different from the jackpot determination table T1.

If the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "miss" (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "jackpot" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot type pre-determination (step S305). In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot type random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, regardless of whether the jackpot type random number value is "0" to "127", the pre-determination is "16RV passing scheduled jackpot". In this embodiment, the pre-determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later, but in other embodiments, the pre-determination may be performed using a jackpot type determination table for pre-determination that is different from the jackpot type determination table T5.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-determination of the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains the fluctuation pattern random number value and the reach random number value as the judgment value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). Next, since the time-saving state (time-saving flag is ON) is in effect here, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time-saving state (FIG. 11) and specifies the fluctuation pattern from the jackpot pre-determination result of step S304, the reach pre-determination result obtained from the reach random number value, and the fluctuation pattern random number value. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in FIG. 11, the fluctuation pattern selected may differ depending on the number of reserved balls. Here, it is assumed that all fluctuation patterns that may be selected depending on the number of reserved balls are selected. For example, if a reach or miss is determined in advance based on the jackpot advance determination result and the reach/no reach advance determination result, and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 selects two patterns: fluctuation pattern "P64" which is selected if the number of reserved balls is "1 to 2", and fluctuation pattern "P68" which is selected if the number of reserved balls is "3 to 4". In this embodiment, the advance determination is performed using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 used in the fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later, but in other embodiments, the advance determination may be performed using a fluctuation pattern determination table for advance determination that is different from the fluctuation pattern determination table T6.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-determination command includes the jackpot pre-determination result (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type pre-determination result) and the fluctuation pattern pre-determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special Figure 1 Pre-judgment Processing]
FIG. 19 is a flow chart of the special chart 1 pre-judgment process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the probability variable flag is ON or not (step S401). Contrary to the above-mentioned special chart 2 pre-judgment process, if the probability variable flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process is terminated. That is, if the probability variable flag is ON, pre-judgment is not performed. On the other hand, if the probability variable flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot pre-judgment by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot judgment table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a judgment value temporarily stored in the pre-judgment buffer by the special chart 1 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S213). Next, since the state is normal probability (the probability flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81 pre-determines whether or not there is a jackpot based on the table for normal probability (the jackpot determination value is "0" to "164") in the jackpot determination table T1. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "164", it is pre-determined as a "jackpot", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as a "miss". Note that the jackpot pre-determination may use a jackpot determination table for pre-determination that is different from the jackpot determination table T1. The process of steps S404 to S408 is the same as steps S304 to S308 of the special chart 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 18) described above, so the description will be omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flow chart of the normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the electric chute 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chute 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. If the electric chute 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the normal pattern is changing (step S502). If the normal pattern is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. If the normal pattern is not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the number of reserved balls of the normal pattern is "0" (step S503). If the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S503: YES), the process ends. If the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of reserved balls of normal symbols is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 with the number of reserved balls of normal symbols being "0", the number of reserved balls of normal symbols becomes "1" once in step S203 of the start hole sensor detection process (FIG. 17), and then the reserved balls are consumed in this step S504, and the reserved balls of normal symbols immediately become "0". This is the same for the number of reserved balls of special symbols. That is, in steps S207 and S212 of the start hole sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the reserved balls of special symbols become "1" once, and then the reserved balls are consumed in steps S1404 and S1410 of the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 22) described later, and the reserved balls of special symbols become "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a win judgment by referring to the normal symbol win judgment table T3 (FIG. 8(C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the normal symbol random number value (win random number value) stored as a judgment value in the first memory area (corresponding to the first normal symbol reserved) of the normal symbol reserved memory area 86. Then, it judges whether or not there is a win by using the normal symbol random number value, the game state (whether or not there is a time-saving state), and the normal symbol win judgment table T3. For example, in the non-time-saving state, if the normal symbol random number value is "0" to "2", it is judged as a "win", and if the normal symbol random number value is other than that, it is judged as a "lose" (see FIG. 8(C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern judgment table T4 (FIG. 8 (D)) to select a fluctuation pattern (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first judges the game state (whether or not it is in a time-saving state), and selects the normal symbol fluctuation time as a normal symbol fluctuation pattern using the game state judgment result and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern judgment table T4. Here, in the non-time-saving state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is judged to be "30 seconds", and in the time-saving state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is judged to be "1 second" (see FIG. 8 (D)). The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol fluctuation pattern to start displaying the normal symbol fluctuation (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed and ended. The normal symbol fluctuation time is the fluctuation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8 (D)). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the normal symbol fluctuation display continues. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the fluctuation display (step S509), and if the above-mentioned hit determination (step S505) is a "miss" (step S510: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned hit determination is a "win" (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chute opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chute 22 is selected by referring to the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7 (Figure 12 (A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not it is in a time-saving state), and selects the opening pattern of the electric chute 22 using the game state determination result and the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7. Here, when it is in a non-time-saving state, "opening pattern 11" is selected, and when it is in a time-saving state, "opening pattern 12" is selected. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the operation of the electric chute in accordance with the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In the above-mentioned step S501, if the electric chute 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the closing condition of the electric chute 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that either the number of winning balls in the electric chute 22 has reached a specified maximum number of winning balls (for example, 6 balls) or the operation time of the electric chute 22 has elapsed and it has become time to close the electric chute 22. The operation time of the electric chute 22 is the operation time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. If the closing condition of the electric chute 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the electric chute 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the electric chute 22 to stop its operation (step S521), and ends this process.

[Special Action Processing]
FIG. 21 is a flow chart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the process related to the special symbol display 41 and the big prize device (first big prize device 31 and second big prize device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is called "1", "2", "3", and "4" of the "special operation status". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, a big win determination, a small win determination, a change pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), a special symbol change process is executed (step S1304). In the special symbol change process, a change stop command is output after the change time has elapsed. When the "special operation status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), a special symbol determination process is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol determination process, an opening command is output when a jackpot occurs. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), a special electric device process is performed (step S1308). In the special electric device process, a jackpot game or a small jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is initially set to "1".

The special operation process may be configured to allow simultaneous variation in which the process related to the first special symbol display 41a and the process related to the second special symbol display 41b are independent of each other, and the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are executed in parallel. In this case, the process related to the first special symbol display 41a and the large prize device (the first large prize device 31 and the second large prize device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is called "1", "2", "3", and "4" of the "special symbol 1 operation status". In addition, the process related to the second special symbol display 41b and the large prize device is divided into four stages, and each stage is called "1", "2", "3", and "4" of the "special symbol 2 operation status". The initial setting of the "special symbol 1 operation status" and the "special symbol 2 operation status" is "1". The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether either the "special chart 1 operation status" or the "special chart 2 operation status" is "4". When either the "special chart 1 operation status" or the "special chart 2 operation status" is "4", a special electric device process is performed. In the special electric device process, a big win game or a small win game is executed. Specifically, when the special chart 1 operation status is "4", a big win game due to a big win of the special chart 1 is executed. When the special chart 2 operation status is "4", a big win game or a small win game due to a big win of the special chart 2 is executed. When neither the "special chart 1 operation status" nor the "special chart 2 operation status" is "4", the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the "special chart 1 operation status" is "1", "2", or "3". When the "special chart 1 operation status" is "1", a special chart 1 standby process is executed. In the special chart 1 standby process, the hit determination of the special chart 1 and the selection of the change pattern are performed. When the "special chart 1 operation status" is "2", the special chart 1 during change process is performed. In the special chart 1 during change process, the output of the change stop command is performed after the change time of the special chart 1 has elapsed. When the "special chart 1 operation status" is "3", the special chart 1 determination process is performed. In the special chart 1 determination process, the output of the opening command is performed when the special chart 1 lottery is a big hit or a small hit. After determining whether the "special chart 1 operation status" is "1", "2", or "3", the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the "special chart 2 operation status" is "1", "2", or "3". When the "special chart 2 operation status" is "1", the special chart 2 standby process is performed. In the special chart 2 standby process, the hit determination of the special chart 2 and the selection of the change pattern are performed. When the "special chart 2 operation status" is "2", special chart 2 during change processing is performed. In the special chart 2 during change processing, a change stop command is output after the change time of the special chart 2 has elapsed, and the like is executed. When the "special chart 2 operation status" is "3", special chart 2 determination processing is performed. In the special chart 2 determination processing, an opening command is output when a big win or small win occurs in the special chart 2 lottery. As described above, according to the special operation processing of this embodiment, the waiting process, during change processing, and determination processing of the special chart 1 and the waiting process, change processing, and determination processing of the special chart 2 are executed in parallel. On the other hand, the big win game and the small win game are executed in priority to the waiting process, change processing, and determination processing of the special chart 1 and the special chart 2.

[Special symbol standby process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol waiting process, the game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is "0" or not (step S1400). If the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is "0" (step S1400: YES), that is, if the second special symbol reserved memory area 85b does not store a random number group acquired due to winning the second starting hole 21, the process proceeds to step S1407. If the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is "1" or more (step S1400: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a small win determination process (step S1401). In the small win determination process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a small win determination by referring to the small win determination table T10 (FIG. 8). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads the small win random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first reserved second special symbol) of the second special symbol storage area 85b, and judges whether or not a small win has occurred using the read small win random number and the small win judgment table T10. Next, if the result of the small win judgment is a "small win", the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the small win flag, sets the special symbol stop symbol data corresponding to the small win symbol in the buffer of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 executes a big win judgment process (step S1402) and a variable pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later.

After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of the reserved information (various random number values) stored in the first to fourth memory areas of the second special chart reserved memory area 85b from the current position to the side to be read, and clears the reserved information stored in the location farthest from the side to be read in the second special chart reserved memory area 85b (step S1405). For example, if reserved information is stored in the first to third memory areas, the reserved information stored in the third memory area is cleared, and if reserved information is stored in the first to fourth memory areas, the reserved information stored in the fourth memory area is cleared. Through the above steps, the reserved second special charts are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the reserved image 9B (the leftmost reserved image 9B among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special symbol reserved storage area 85b is shifted to the reserved consumption image display area side and displayed as a reserved consumption image 9C. Also, the reserved images 9B (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special symbol reserved storage area 85b are shifted one to the left (FIG. 1). This allows the player to recognize that one second special symbol reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol 2 variation start process (step S1406). In the special symbol 2 variation start process, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the variation display of the second special symbol is started, and a variation time timer is set. A variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is set in the variation time timer. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2." The fluctuation start command (special chart 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special chart 2 fluctuation start process includes information about the special chart stop pattern data set in the small win determination process (step S1401), information about the special chart stop pattern data set in the big win determination process (step S1402), and information about the fluctuation pattern set in the fluctuation pattern selection process (step S1403) (including information about the fluctuation time).

In step S1401, if the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is "0" or not (step S1407). If the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, if the first special chart reserved memory area 85a does not store a random number group obtained due to winning the first starting hole 20, the process proceeds to step S1413. If the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a jackpot determination process (step S1408) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a from the current position to the side to be read, and clears the reserved information stored in the farthest location from the side to be read in the first special chart reserved storage area 85a (step S1411). Through the above steps, the first special chart reserved is consumed in the order in which it was reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the reserved image 9A at the right end of the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a is shifted to the reserved consumption image display area side and displayed as a reserved consumption image 9C. In addition, the reserved images 9A (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left of the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a are each shifted to the right by one (FIG. 1). This allows the player to recognize that one first special chart reserved has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol 1 variation start processing (step S1412). In the special symbol 1 variation start processing, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the variation display of the first special symbol is started, and the variation time timer is set. The variation time timer is set to a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection processing. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). Note that the variation start command (special symbol 1 variation start command) set in the special symbol 1 variation start processing includes information on the special symbol stop pattern data set in the big win determination processing (step S1408) and information on the variation pattern set in the variation pattern selection processing (step S1409) (including information on the variation time).

In step S1407, if the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is a waiting screen or not (step S1413). The waiting screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may judge, for example, by the ON/OFF of the demo screen display flag for waiting for customers. If it is a waiting screen (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not a waiting screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for a predetermined waiting time to elapse, sets a customer waiting waiting command for displaying a waiting scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S1414), and ends this process. As described above, according to the special symbol waiting process of this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0". That is, the consumption of the second reserved special chart is executed in priority to the consumption of the first reserved special chart. Also, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of this embodiment, the lottery based on the second reserved special chart makes it easier for the player to win a jackpot (a jackpot scheduled to pass V) that is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first reserved special chart.

[Jackpot detection process]
FIG. 23 is a flow chart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402, S1408). The jackpot determination process for special chart 2 (step S1402) and the jackpot determination process for special chart 1 (step S1408) are similar in process flow, so they will be described together. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the probability variable flag is ON or not (step S1501). If the probability variable flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot determination by referring to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value as the determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process for special chart 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the second special chart reserved) of the second special chart reserved storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process for special symbol 1, the jackpot random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first reserved first special symbol) of the first special symbol storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred by using the jackpot determination table T1 and the jackpot random number value to which it refers. Here, since the probability of a jackpot is high (the probability flag is ON), the jackpot determination is performed based on the table for the high probability state (the jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") in the jackpot determination table T1.

In step S1501, if the probability change flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value in the same manner as in step S1502. Next, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF) is being used here, it determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot determination value is "0" to "164") in the jackpot determination table T1.

If the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the type of jackpot (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process for special chart 2, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the second special chart reserved storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process for special chart 1, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the type of jackpot based on the read out jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After the jackpot type is determined, the special stop pattern data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the identified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process ends. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, if the result of the jackpot determination is "miss" (the result of the minor jackpot determination is also "miss"), the special stop pattern data (01H) corresponding to the miss pattern is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process ends.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flow charts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403, S1409). The variation pattern selection process for special chart 2 (step S1403) and the variation pattern selection process for special chart 1 (step S1409) have similar processing flows, so they will be described together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the game state is in a time-saving state or not (step S1600). The judgment of whether the game state is in a time-saving state or not is made by whether the time-saving flag is ON or not. If the game state is in a time-saving state (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. If the game state is not in a time-saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (step S1602). When the big win flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the small win flag is ON or not (step S1610). When the small win flag is OFF (step S1610: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the small win flag is ON (step S1610: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-time-saving state small win in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) and selects the variation pattern (step S1611). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the second special chart reserved) of the second special chart reserved storage area 85b. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random number value. Here, as a table for the small win in the non-time-saving state, the part corresponding to the small win (the part with the fluctuation pattern "P34") in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in Fig. 10 is referred to (the address is set). From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, "P34" is selected as the fluctuation pattern.

If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot type is a V-passing jackpot (step S1604). The jackpot type is determined based on the special stop pattern data set in the main RAM 84.

When the jackpot type is a V-passing jackpot (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern by referring to the table for non-time-saving state V-passing jackpots in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a fluctuation pattern random number value as a judgment value. For example, in the fluctuation pattern selection process for special chart 2, the fluctuation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second special chart reserved) of the second special chart reserved storage area 85b is read out. In the fluctuation pattern selection process for special chart 1, the fluctuation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the first special chart reserved) of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 and the fluctuation pattern random number value. Here, as a table for a non-time-saving state V-passing jackpot, an address is set that references the portion of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. 10 that corresponds to the V-passing jackpot (the portion with the fluctuation patterns "P1" to "P3" in special chart 1, and the portion with the fluctuation patterns "P21" and "P22" in special chart 2). From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P1" to "P3" is selected as the fluctuation pattern in special chart 1, and "P21" or "P22" is selected in special chart 2.

If the jackpot type is a V non-pass scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-time-saving state V non-pass scheduled jackpot in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (Fig. 10) to select the fluctuation pattern (step S1606). Here, as the table for the non-time-saving state V non-pass scheduled jackpot, an address is set that refers to the part of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in Fig. 10 that corresponds to the V non-pass scheduled jackpot (the part with the fluctuation pattern "P4" to "P6" in special chart 1, and the part with the fluctuation pattern "P23" in special chart 2). From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P4" to "P6" is selected as the fluctuation pattern in special chart 1, and "P23" is selected in special chart 2.

In step S1610, if the small win flag is OFF (step S1610: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the reach random number value is a reach establishment random number value or not (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads the reach random number value as a judgment value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special chart 2, the reach random number value stored in the first memory area (corresponding to the first of the second special chart reserved) of the second special chart reserved memory area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special chart 1, the reach random number value stored in the first memory area (corresponding to the first of the first special chart reserved) of the first special chart reserved memory area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not there is a reach using the reach judgment table T2 (FIG. 8 (B)) and the reach random number value. In this case, since the time-saving state is not in effect, the presence or absence of a reach is determined based on the table for the non-time-saving state (the portion of the reach determination value (reach establishment random number value) between "0" and "13") in the reach determination table T2.

If the reach random number is a reach establishment random number (step S1607: YES), that is, in the case of a reach with miss, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for reach with miss in the non-time-saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (Fig. 10) and selects the fluctuation pattern (step S1608). Here, as the table for reach with miss in the non-time-saving state, the part corresponding to reach with miss (the part with the fluctuation pattern "P7" to "P14" in the special chart 1, and the part with the fluctuation pattern "P24" to "P31" in the special chart 2) in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in Fig. 10 is referred to. In the special chart 1, one of the fluctuation patterns "P7" to "P14" is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 (1 to 4). In Special Chart 2, one of the patterns "P24" to "P31" is selected as the pattern from the read-out random number value for the pattern and the current number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 (1 to 4). Since the pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, a shortened pattern function is activated according to the number of reserved balls. In other words, in both Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", more patterns with shorter change times are selected than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". This makes it possible to speed up the consumption of reserved special charts when there are a large number of reserved balls.

If the reach random number value is not a reach establishment random number value (step S1607: NO), that is, in the case of a miss without a reach, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for a miss without a reach in the non-time-saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (Fig. 10) and selects a fluctuation pattern (step S1609). Here, as the table for a miss without a reach in the non-time-saving state, the part corresponding to a miss without a reach (the part with the fluctuation pattern "P15" to "P16" in the special chart 1, and the part with the fluctuation pattern "P32" to "P33" in the special chart 2) in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in Fig. 10 is referred to. In the special chart 1, either "P15" or "P16" is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 (1 to 4). In the special chart 2, either "P32" or "P33" is selected as the variation pattern based on the read variation pattern random number value and the current number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 (1 to 4). Here too, the variation pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, so the shortened variation function according to the number of reserved balls is activated.

If it is determined in step S1600 that the game state is in the time-saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (FIG. 25: step S1612). Thereafter, the processing of steps S1614 to S1621 is the same as the processing of steps S1604 to S1611 described above, except for the following points, so the explanation will be omitted. The difference between the processing of steps S1614 to S1621 and the processing of steps S1604 to S1611 is that the part of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 referenced in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, S1619, and S1621 is different from the already described steps S1605, S1606, S1608, S1609, and S1611. Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, S1609, and S1611, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time-saving state is referenced, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, S1619, and S1621, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time-saving state is referenced. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is a V-passing scheduled jackpot, the part of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 11 that corresponds to the V-passing scheduled jackpot (the part of the fluctuation pattern "P41" to "P43" in the special chart 1, and the part of the fluctuation pattern "P61" or "P62" in the special chart 2) is referenced. From the read-out fluctuation pattern random number value, in the special chart 1, one of "P41" to "P43" is selected as the fluctuation pattern, and in the special chart 2, "P61" or "P62" is selected. Also, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, in the case of the big win type being a V non-passing planned big win, the part corresponding to the V non-passing planned big win (the part of the fluctuation pattern "P44" to "P46" in the special chart 1, and the part of the fluctuation pattern "P63" in the special chart 2) is referenced in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 11. From the read-out fluctuation pattern random number value, in the special chart 1, one of "P44" to "P46" is selected as the fluctuation pattern, and in the special chart 2, "P63" is selected as the fluctuation pattern. Also, for example, in the case of step S1621, that is, in the case of a small win, in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 11, the part corresponding to the small win (the part of "P74") is referenced. From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, "P74" is selected as the fluctuation pattern.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above (steps S1605, S1606, S1608, S1609, S1611, S1615, S1616, S1618, S1619, S1621), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends this process. Information on the set variation pattern is included in a variation start command and is sent to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (Figure 16: step S108). This starts the variation display of the special symbol.

[Special pattern change processing]
FIG. 26 is a flow chart of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21: step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed and ended (step S1701). The variation time of the special symbol is a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 24, FIG. 25) described above. If the variation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process is terminated. That is, the variation display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the variation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a variation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes associated with the variation stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data, etc. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

[Special design confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flow chart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game state management process (step S1801). The contents of the game state management process will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether the big win flag is ON or not (step S1802). If the big win flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the small win flag is ON or not (step S1810). If the small win flag is OFF (step S1810: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808) and ends this process. As a result, the big win game and the small win game are not started, and the process moves to the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 22) again, and the big win judgment and the small win judgment for the next reservation are executed.

If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the large prize opening and the V-shaped opening member according to the type of the jackpot that has been won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the large prize opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the large prize opening from the special symbol stop pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. For example, when the special symbol stop pattern data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the large prize opening. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the V-shaped opening and closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), determines the opening pattern of the V-shaped opening and closing member 71 from the special symbol stop pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. For example, when the special symbol stop pattern data is "11H", "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V-shaped opening and closing member 71. Along with setting the opening pattern of the big prize opening and the V-shaped opening/closing member, the round counter value is set to the number of rounds according to the type of big win that was won. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) that were executed during the big win game. In this case, the round counter is set to "16" (Figure 13 (B)).

After the opening pattern is set, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the special bonus flag and time-saving flag, and the details of which will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start a jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and opening is started (step S1806). Thereafter, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the small win flag is ON (step S1810: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the large prize opening according to the type of the small win rush large prize that was won (step S1811). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the large prize opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the large prize opening from the special symbol stopping pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. For example, if the special symbol stopping pattern data is "20H", "opening pattern 25" is set as the opening pattern of the large prize opening. After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "4" (step S1807) and ends this process.

[Game Status Management Processing]
FIG. 28 is a flow chart of the game state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the probability variable flag is ON or not (step S2001). If the probability variable flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the probability variable flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variable counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variable counter counts the number of times the special pattern is changed during the high probability state. Here, the probability variable counter is set to "10000" when the state transitions to the high probability state. The game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the counter value becomes "0" as a result of decrementing the probability variable counter by 1 (step S2003). If the value of the probability change counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the value of the probability change counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the probability change flag is switched to OFF (step S2004). Note that if the probability change counter is set to "10000", the actual probability change counter value will never become "0".

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time-saving flag is ON or not. If the time-saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. If the time-saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time-saving counter counts the number of times the special pattern changes during the time-saving state. Here, the time-saving counter is set to "10000" upon transition to the time-saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the counter value has become "0" as a result of decrementing the time-saving counter by 1 (step S2007). If the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. If the time-saving counter value is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time-saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008). Note that if the time-saving counter is set to "10000", the actual value of the time-saving counter will never become "0".

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command contains information about the currently set game state (whether or not it is in a special state, the special state counter value, whether or not it is in a time-saving state, the time-saving counter value, etc.).

[Game Status Reset Processing]
FIG. 29 is a flow chart of the game state reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the probability variable flag is ON or not (step S2101). If the probability variable flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. If the probability variable flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability variable flag is switched OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the time-saving flag is ON or not. If the time-saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), this process is terminated. If the time-saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time-saving flag is switched OFF (step S2104). In other words, during the execution of the jackpot game, the state is a non-high probability state and a non-time-saving state. In the gaming machine 1, since the game machine 1 is always in a low base state when not in a time-saving state, the game machine 1 is in a low base state when a jackpot game is being played.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flow chart of the special electric device processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the big win end flag is ON or not (step S2200). The "big win end flag" is a flag indicating that the opening of all the big win devices (the first big win device 31 and the second big win device 36) based on the opening pattern in the big win game being executed has ended. If the big win end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. If the big win end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), the V opening and closing member operation process is performed to operate the V opening and closing member 71 (step S2201). The V-shaped opening/closing member 71 of this embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls enter the first large winning opening 30, and in the V-shaped opening/closing member operation process, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period of time when a predetermined number of game balls enter according to the V-shaped opening/closing member opening pattern T9. Details of the V-shaped opening/closing member operation process will be described later. After the V-shaped opening/closing member operation process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the large winning openings (the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35) are open or not (step S2202). If they are open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

If the large prize opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the conditions for opening the large prize opening are met (step S2203). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether a ball has entered the large prize opening opening start opening 17 as a condition for opening the large prize opening. If there is no ball entering the large prize opening opening start opening 17, it judges that the condition is not met. If a ball has entered the large prize opening opening start opening 17, the game control microcomputer 81 further judges whether it is time (timing) to open the large prize opening. The time to open the large prize opening includes, for example, when the opening time of the large prize opening has passed and it has reached the time to start opening in the first round of play, and when the interval time (closing time) until the large prize opening that was temporarily closed after opening has passed and it has reached the time to start opening again. If the above conditions are not met (step S2203: NO), processing proceeds to step S2220.

If the above conditions are met (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a large prize opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the large prize opening (first large prize opening 30 or second large prize opening 35) according to an opening pattern (FIG. 13) corresponding to the type of large prize. After the large prize opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information regarding the number of rounds of the large prize game being played, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In this embodiment, the large prize opening is not opened multiple times during one round of play. However, in another embodiment, when the large prize opening is opened multiple times during one round of play, the game control microcomputer 81 may determine whether the large prize opening is the first opening during one round, and set the round designation command only if it is the first opening. After setting the round designation command, this process ends.

In the above-mentioned step S2202, if the large prize opening is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the closing condition of the large prize opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that either the number of winnings in the large prize opening in that round of play has reached a specified maximum number of winnings (e.g., 9 winnings per round), or the time to close the large prize opening has arrived (i.e., a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened) is satisfied. If the closing condition of the large prize opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the large prize opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the large prize opening (step S2211).

If it is not the time (timing) to open the large prize opening in step S2203 described above, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the round of play has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) after the large prize opening is closed. As described above, this is because the time (interval time) for the large prize opening to be closed between rounds of play is included in the open round of play before the closure. The game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the round of play has ended based on whether a predetermined interval time has passed since the large prize opening was closed. If the round of play has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

If the round play has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the round counter by 1 (step S2221) and determines whether the round counter value is "0" or not (step S2226). If the round counter value is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of rounds has not yet been played, this process ends in order to start the next round play. On the other hand, if the round counter value is "0", a jackpot ending command is set (step S2227) as a jackpot ending process that ends the jackpot play, and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In this embodiment, the ending time (e.g., 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V region 39 in the "16R (actual 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" is the same length as the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V region 39 in the "16R (actual 13R) V-non-passing scheduled jackpot". This allows the player to recognize that the game ball did not pass through the V region 39 in the "16R (actual 13R) V-non-passing scheduled jackpot" even if the game ball passed through the V region 39 in the "16R (actual 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot". Note that the ending time when the game ball did not pass through the V region 39 in the "16R (actual 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" is also the same length. After the jackpot ending starts, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this process ends.

In the above-mentioned step S2200, if the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, so the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot ending time has elapsed (step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special operation status to "1" (step S2233). As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol waiting process (step S1302) is executed again. After that, the game state setting process (step S2234) described later is executed, and this process ends.

In addition, in the special electric device processing, in addition to the opening process of the large prize opening (first large prize opening 30 or second large prize opening 35) in the big prize game as described above, the opening process of the large prize opening (second large prize opening 35) in the small prize game is also performed. Although not shown, specifically, when the small prize flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the large prize opening (second large prize opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) according to the type of the big prize with small prize rush that was won, and then judges whether the closing condition of the large prize opening (FIG. 13) is satisfied, and if the closing condition of the large prize opening is satisfied, closes (blocks) the large prize opening (end of the small prize game). Then, the small prize flag is turned OFF, and the special operation status is set to "1".

[V opening/closing member operation process]
FIG. 31 is a flow chart of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the current round game (the relevant round) is the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71. The game control microcomputer 81 can judge that it is an opening round when the round counter value is "15", "13", "11", "9", "7", or "5". If it is not the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process is terminated. This is because there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 in the relevant round.

If it is the round in which the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the first winning flag is ON or not (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first ball has won in the first large winning port 30 in the round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. If the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), the process judges whether the first ball has won (step S2503). If the first ball has not won (step S2503: NO), the process ends. This is because there has been no winning in the first large winning port 30 in the round, and there is no need to operate the V-shaped opening/closing member 71.

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 and performs the V effective period setting process (step S2504). The reason for short-opening the V opening/closing member 71 is to execute a short opening (here, 0.1 seconds) when the first ball wins, regardless of whether the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)) is "short opening" or "long opening". In addition, in the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is very short, so that the first game ball that wins the first large winning hole 30 passes through the non-V area 70 without passing through the V area 39. In the V effective period setting process, the V effective period during which the V opening/closing member 71 is open and for several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is set to be the V effective period during which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 (here, 0.1 seconds) according to the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), and sets the V effective period during the opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and 1 second after closing. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the period other than the V effective period (including when a jackpot game is not being executed) as the V invalid period in which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is judged to be invalid. Here, "judging the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a to be valid" means that the V flag is turned ON based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (see the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 33) described later). Also, "judging the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a to be invalid" means that the V flag is not turned ON even if the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. The reason why the V effective period includes several seconds (ball brushing period) after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is that, since there is a physical distance between the V opening/closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a, the period until the game ball that entered the V area 39 side just before the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is taken into consideration. That is, here, the V flag is turned ON only when the V passage (the passage of the game ball into the V area 39) is detected during the V effective period, and the V flag is not turned ON when the V passage is detected outside the V effective period (V invalid period). When the V flag is ON, the probability variable flag is turned ON, that is, the game state after the big win game is set to a high probability state (see the game state setting process (FIG. 32) described later). By doing so, the V flag is not turned ON based on the V passage due to fraudulent acts and is not set to a high probability state. After the V opening/closing member 71 is short-circuited and the V valid period is set, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505) and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if the first ball has already won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the second winning flag is ON or not (step S2520). The "second winning flag" is a flag indicating that the second ball has won in the first large winning port 30 when the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 in the round is a long opening. If the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. If the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 in the round is a long opening or not (step S2521). If it is not a long opening (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is a short opening, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, if the opening is long (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball has been detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball has not been detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening/closing member 71 long and performs the V effective period setting process (step S2523). The reason for opening the V opening/closing member 71 long is to execute the long opening (here, maximum 31.5 seconds) when the second ball wins in the case of "long opening" in the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)). Note that here, the maximum play time for one round is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the large winning port 29.5 seconds + interval closing time 2 seconds), so generally, the time from the winning of the second ball to the end of the round is shorter than 31.5 seconds. As described later, the V opening/closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, so the opening time of the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is configured such that at least a portion of the second and subsequent game balls that enter the first large winning port 30 pass through the V area 39 because the opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is relatively long. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period while the V opening/closing member 71 is open, and sets the V invalid period together with the closing of the V opening/closing member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524) and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is open or not. If the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round of play has ended or not (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round of play has ended or not based on whether a predetermined interval time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the big prize opening was closed.

If the round of play has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), and performs V opening/closing member closing processing and V invalid period setting processing (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round of play, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening/closing member 71, and sets the V invalid period several seconds (here, 1 second) after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed, and ends this processing.

If the round of play has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 is met (step S2560). For example, the closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 may be that a predetermined period (e.g., 0.1 seconds) has elapsed since the V opening/closing member 71 was opened in the case of a short opening. If the closing condition is met (step S2560: YES), the V opening/closing member closing process and the V invalid period setting process are performed (step S2552), and the process ends. If the closing condition is not met (step S2560: NO), the V opening/closing member 71 is left open and the V valid period is continued, and the process ends.

If the game control microcomputer 81 determines in step S2540 that the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), it determines whether the round of play has ended (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572) and ends this process. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), it ends this process.

[Game Status Setting Process]
FIG. 32 is a flow chart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the V flag is ON or not (step S2301). If the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 proceeds to step S2309. On the other hand, if the V flag is ON in step S2301 (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns the probability variable flag ON (step S2304), sets the probability variable counter to "10000" (step S2305), and turns the V flag OFF (step S2306). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 turns the time reduction flag ON (step S2307), and sets the time reduction counter to "10000" (step S2308). As a result, the game state after the current big win becomes a "high probability state", a "time-saving state" and a "high base state" (i.e., high probability, high base). This high probability, high base state ends when either the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10,000 times or the next big win is won.
In the high probability state, the probability of a big win is about 1/101, and in reality, a big win will occur before 10,000 big win lotteries are performed in the high probability high base state. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, if a big win with special pattern 2 (via the second start port) in the time-saving state and a big win scheduled to pass through V (special pattern stop pattern data 20H, 21H) passes through V during the big win game, the game state after the big win will be a high probability high base state until the next big win, and it is almost guaranteed that there will be a small win rush.

In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 and ends this process. The game state designation command contains information about the currently set game state.

[V-area sensor detection process]
FIG. 33 is a flow chart of the V-area sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether or not a game ball has been detected by the V-area sensor 39a (step S2601). If the game ball has not been detected by the V-area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the game ball has been detected (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not the V-effective period is in progress (step S2602). The V-effective period is a period set by the V-effective period setting process (steps S2504, S2523) of the V-opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V-effective period is set during the second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth, and twelfth rounds, during which the V-opening/closing member 71 is opened or closed for several seconds (ball brushing period). If the V valid period is not in progress (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the V valid period is in progress (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V pass command (step S2604), and ends this process.

[Reserved ball count processing]
34 is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing (FIG. 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads the reserved ball number of special pattern 1, the reserved ball number of special pattern 2, and the reserved ball number of normal pattern stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the reserved ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The reserved ball number command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the reserved ball number, and includes information on the reserved ball number of special pattern 1, the reserved ball number of special pattern 2, and the reserved ball number of normal pattern. After setting the reserved ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

7. Operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 The operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to Figures 35 to 45. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the description of the operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94.

[Sub-control main processing]
35 is a flow chart showing the sub-control main process. When the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the performance control microcomputer 91 reads out a program for executing the sub-control main process from the sub ROM 93. In the sub-control main process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first performs a CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, the sub-CPU 92 is set, and various flags, statuses, counters, etc. are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power supply is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization process, the performance control microcomputer 91 prohibits interrupts from the interrupt process (step S4015) and performs a random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the performance control microcomputer 91 updates the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7(B) by adding 1. When each random number counter value reaches a set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is incremented again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" and may be changed randomly. In addition to incrementing the random number value by 1, it may also be configured to increment by 2 or more. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the performance control microcomputer 91 allows the interrupt process to be interrupted (step S4025). While the interrupt is allowed, the sub-side timer interrupt process (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the sub-CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. In other words, the sub-side timer interrupt process is executed at each predetermined cycle. Then, the random number update process is executed repeatedly between the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process and the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flow chart of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The performance control microcomputer 91 first performs a received command analysis process (step S4300). The received command analysis process will be described later in detail. After the received command analysis process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a variable performance process (step S4305). The variable performance process is a process for setting a pre-variation end command at a specific timing during the variable performance to execute a specific display performance on the display screen 7a, and the details will be described later. After the variable performance process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch process, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the performance button detection switch 63a. After the switch process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the performance control microcomputer 91 transmits various commands set in the performance command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 in the received command analysis process, etc., to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received various commands executes a display performance according to the received command using the main display device 7. In addition, the voice control board 106 that has received various commands executes a sound performance that outputs sound from the speaker 67 according to the received command. The lamp control board 107 that has received various commands executes a lamp performance that controls the light emission of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received command. After the command transmission process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320) and ends this process. In the other processes, for example, a random number update process is performed.

[Received command analysis process]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The performance control microcomputer 91 first judges whether or not a pre-judgment command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), a pre-reading performance determination process is performed (step S4420). The "pre-reading performance determination process" is a process that determines whether or not to execute a pre-reading performance, and if so, the pre-reading performance pattern. Details of the pre-reading performance determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the above-mentioned pre-reading performance determination process is skipped. The pre-reading performance is a performance that suggests that the reserved information newly stored in the special chart reserved memory area 85 is highly likely to contain a jackpot, and is performed during a variable performance.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it has been received (step S4445: YES), a reserved display process is performed (step S4450). In the reserved display process, the values of the first special reserved performance counter, the second special reserved performance counter, and the normal reserved performance counter provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94 are updated based on the information on the reserved ball number of the special pattern 1, the reserved ball number of the special pattern 2, and the reserved ball number of the normal pattern included in the reserved ball number command. This allows the information on the number of reserved balls to be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub-control board 90 side. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 updates the reserved images 9A and 9B displayed on the display screen 7a based on the values of the first special reserved performance counter, the second special reserved performance counter, and the normal reserved performance counter. On the other hand, if the reserved ball count command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the reserved ball display process described above is skipped.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If a fluctuation start command has been received (step S4455: YES), a fluctuation performance start process is performed (step S4460). The "fluctuation performance start process" is a process for selecting the fluctuation performance pattern (contents) to be executed during the special pattern fluctuation. The details of the fluctuation performance start process will be described later. On the other hand, if a fluctuation start command has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation performance start process is skipped.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not a change stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If a change stop command has been received (step S4465: YES), a change performance end process is performed (step S4470). The "change performance end process" is a process for stopping the change performance executed during the change of the special pattern. In the change performance end process, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a counter based on the analysis result of the change stop command, and sets a change performance end command for ending the change performance. As a result, the decorative pattern corresponding to the special pattern 1 or special pattern 2 that is changing is stopped and displayed. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a pre-determination information shift process (FIG. 39) described later. Note that if the change stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the change performance end process described above is skipped.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If an opening command has been received (step S4475: YES), an opening performance pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an opening performance pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (jackpot game). In the opening performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command and sets information about the special symbol stop pattern data set at the time of the jackpot winning determination, which is included in the opening command, in the sub-RAM 94. Then, the performance pattern of the opening performance that is preset in accordance with the winning type indicated by the special symbol stop pattern data is selected, and an opening performance start command for starting the selected opening performance is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100 in the command sending process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads out a predetermined opening effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Note that if an opening command has not been received in step S4475 (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If a round designation command has been received (step S4485: YES), a round designation pattern determination process is performed (step S4490). The "round designation pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an open game designation pattern (content) to be executed during the opening of the big prize opening or during the interval between openings in a special game (big prize game). In the round designation pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information on the special stop pattern data and information on the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 94. Then, a designation pattern of the round designation that is preset in accordance with the winning type and the number of rounds indicated by the special stop pattern data is selected, and a round designation start command for starting the selected round designation is set in the designation command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads out a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. Note that if a round designation command has not been received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If an ending command has been received (step S4495: YES), an ending performance pattern determination process is performed (step S4500). The "ending performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an ending performance pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big win game or small win game). In the ending performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command and sets information regarding the special chart stop pattern data included in the ending command in the sub-RAM 94. Then, the microcomputer 91 selects an ending performance pattern according to the type of win indicated by the special chart stop pattern data, and sets an ending performance start command to start the selected ending performance in the output buffer of the sub-RAM 94. When the ending performance start command set in the performance command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads out a specific ending performance image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If no ending command has been received (step S4495: NO), the above-mentioned ending performance pattern determination process is skipped.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, when the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a game state designation command, it stores information about the game state included in the game state designation command (whether or not it is in a high probability state, whether or not it is in a time-saving state, the values of the probability change counter and the time-saving counter, etc.) in the sub-RAM 94. Also, when the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a V-pass command, it stores information about the V-pass in the sub-RAM 94. Also, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than those mentioned above (a customer waiting standby command, a RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing.

[Pre-reading performance decision processing]
38 is a flowchart of the pre-reading performance determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). The performance control microcomputer 91 first performs a pre-judgment information rewrite process (step S4601). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 stores the jackpot pre-judgment result (jackpot judgment information), the jackpot type pre-judgment result (jackpot type information), and the fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result (fluctuation pattern information) contained in the pre-judgment command received from the main control board 80 in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c.

Figure 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the pre-judgment information storage area 94c. In addition to the jackpot judgment information, jackpot type information, and fluctuation pattern information described above, the pre-judgment information storage area 94c stores pre-reading performance pattern information. The pre-reading performance pattern information is information indicating the contents of the pre-reading performance executed during the fluctuation performance, and is selected in step S4604 described later. Figure 39 (A) shows a state in which the jackpot judgment information "miss" and the fluctuation pattern information "P72" and "P73" are stored in the first to third storage areas as pre-judgment results corresponding to the first to third reserved special charts 2, respectively, and the pre-judgment results corresponding to the fluctuations are stored in the corresponding areas. Figure 39 (B) shows a state in which the special chart 2 wins from the state of Figure 39 (A), and the pre-judgment information included in the pre-judgment command received from the main control board 80 is stored in the fourth storage area corresponding to the fourth reserved special chart 2. Here, the jackpot determination information "jackpot", the jackpot type information "21H", and the variation pattern information "P61" are stored as the pre-determination information. In addition, "Pattern A" is set as the pre-reading performance pattern information in the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth reserved special chart 2 pieces and the area corresponding to the variation. FIG. 39(C) shows the state in which the variation has ended from the state in FIG. 39(B) and the pre-determination information shift process has been executed. Specifically, the pre-determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the area, the pre-determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas, and the pre-determination information in the fourth storage area is cleared. The pre-determination information shift process is executed in the variation performance end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, the performance control microcomputer 91 then determines whether or not pre-reading performance pattern information is stored in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not pre-reading performance pattern information is stored in the relevant area or any of the first to fourth storage areas of the pre-judgment information storage area 94c. If pre-reading performance pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process is terminated. That is, if pre-reading performance pattern information is stored in the relevant area or any of the first to fourth storage areas of the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, new pre-reading performance pattern information is not selected and stored. On the other hand, if pre-reading performance pattern information is not stored in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is a "jackpot" or a "miss with reach" (step S4603). Whether or not the result is a "jackpot" or a "miss with reach" can be determined, for example, by the result of the preliminary determination of the variation pattern (variation pattern information). When the result of the preliminary determination included in the received preliminary determination command is "miss without reach" (step S4603: NO), the microcomputer 91 for controlling the performance ends this process. This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead performance. On the other hand, when the result of the preliminary determination included in the received preliminary determination command is "jackpot" or "miss with reach" (step S4603: YES), a look-ahead performance execution determination is performed to determine whether or not to perform a look-ahead performance, and a look-ahead performance pattern selection is performed (step S4604). Specifically, the microcomputer 91 for controlling the performance acquires the value of the counter of the look-ahead performance random number, and determines whether or not to perform a look-ahead performance and the look-ahead performance pattern selection table T51 stored in the sub-ROM 93 by referring to the acquired random number value and the look-ahead performance pattern selection table T51 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

Figure 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead performance pattern determination table T51. In Figure 40, if the pre-determination result is "big win" and the look-ahead performance random number value is "0-55", the look-ahead performance is "none", if the look-ahead performance random number value is "56-67", "pattern A" is selected as the look-ahead performance, and if the look-ahead performance random number value is "68-127", "pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead performance. Also, if the pre-determination result is "reach with miss" and the look-ahead performance random number value is "0-107", the look-ahead performance is "none", if the look-ahead performance random number value is "108-114", "pattern A" is selected as the look-ahead performance, and if the look-ahead performance random number value is "115-127", "pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead performance. Note that the type, content, and range of the random number value to be selected of the look-ahead performance pattern can be set arbitrarily.

Returning to FIG. 38, if it is determined in step S4604 that a look-ahead performance is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected look-ahead performance pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the look-ahead performance pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c, the look-ahead performance pattern is stored not only in the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command among the first to fourth storage areas, but also in the storage area before the corresponding storage area and in the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), not only is "Pattern A" set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command, but "Pattern A" is also set in the first to third storage areas and the area. As a result, the look-ahead performance pattern A is also executed in the variable performance executed before the variable performance corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed (the variable performance corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas). Note that whether or not the look-ahead performance is executed in the variable performance corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable performance. That is, in the variable performance, if the timing for executing the look-ahead performance has already passed, the look-ahead performance will not be executed, but if it is before the timing for executing the look-ahead performance, it will be executed at that timing. This will be described later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead performance will not be executed (step S4605: NO), the processing ends.

[Variable performance start processing]
41 is a flow chart of the variable performance start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variable start command (step S5000). Here, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets information on the special symbol stop pattern data included in the variable start command and information on the variable pattern in the sub-RAM 94. The set information includes game status information indicating the current game status, and pattern information indicating the pattern as the judgment result of the hit judgment process of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. The game status information and pattern information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the performance control microcomputer 91.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a core performance pattern determination process (step S5010). The core performance pattern determination process is a process for determining the basic configuration of the variable performance (for example, the display and switching of background images on the main display device 7, the display and movement of predetermined characters, the output of melodies and sound effects using the speaker 67, the lighting control of lamps, etc.). The variable performance is completed by superimposing additional performances such as chance-up performances and pre-reading performances on this core performance. The performance control microcomputer 91 determines the core performance pattern by referring to a core performance pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

Figure 42 is a diagram for explaining the basic performance pattern determination table T52. In Figure 42, multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform normal reach performance, multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform SP1 performance, multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform SP2 performance, multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform SP3 performance, multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform SP4 performance, multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform SP5 performance (dedicated reach performance patterns in which pseudo big win suggestion performances are performed, which will be described later), multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform reach-free miss performances, and multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform small win performances are set. The type of basic performance pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, if the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P1", a basic performance pattern that performs SP1 performance is selected. Also, if the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P72", a basic performance pattern that performs reach-free miss performances is selected. Also, if the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P74", the core performance pattern that produces a small win performance is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the core performance pattern, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs chance-up performance pattern determination processing (step S5015). The chance-up performance pattern determination processing is processing for determining additional performance to be superimposed on the variable performance. The performance control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the chance-up random number counter, and determines the chance-up performance pattern by referring to the acquired random number value and the chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

Figure 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up performance pattern determination table T53. Here, only the portion of the chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 that determines the variation performance pattern of special chart 1 in the non-time-saving state is shown. In other words, Figure 43 shows the chance-up performance pattern that is executed when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1" to "P16". Note that the chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 may or may not include a portion that determines the chance-up performance pattern that is executed when the variation pattern is "P21" to "P34", "P41" to "P56", or "P61" to "P74".

In FIG. 43, the chance-up effect patterns are set as "2-NO", "2-SP1", "2-SP2", "2-SP3", "3-NO", "3-SP1", "3-SP2", "3-SP3", "4-NO", "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3", and "ANO". These chance-up effect patterns correspond to the various chance-up effects described below.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 may further refer to the random number value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54 to determine a combination of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to be displayed. This determines what kind of effect will be performed as the variable effect.

The performance control microcomputer 91 sets a variable performance start command in the performance command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 so that a variable performance based on the variable performance pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5015 above is realized (step S5020). When the variable performance start command set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 is sent to the image control board 100 in the command sending process (Figure 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads the variable performance image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the variable performance timer (step S5030) and ends this process. The variable performance timer is set to a variable time (Figure 42) that corresponds to the variable pattern included in the variable start command. For example, when the variable pattern is "P1", the variable performance timer is set to "40 seconds".

[Processing during variable performance]
FIG. 44 is a flow chart of the process during the variable performance (FIG. 36: step S4305). The performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not the variable performance is in progress (step S4701). Whether or not the variable performance is in progress can be judged, for example, by whether or not the variable performance timer is set to zero. If the variable performance is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the variable performance is in progress (step SS4701: YES), the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not it is time to set the pre-variation end command in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command that the performance control microcomputer 91 notifies the image control board 100 and the like that it is a specific timing during the variable performance, and when the image control board 100 receives the pre-variation end command, it switches the performance content or displays a specific image according to the information contained in the pre-variation end command.

If it is not the time to set the pre-change end command (step S4702: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is the time to set the pre-change end command (step S4702: YES), a determination is made as to whether or not there is pre-reading performance pattern information in the area of the advance judgment information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is pre-reading performance pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a pre-change end command including the pre-reading performance pattern information is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no pre-reading performance pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-change end command not including the pre-reading performance pattern information is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, if there is pre-reading performance pattern information in the area, a pre-change end command including the pre-reading performance pattern information is sent to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the change performance. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a look-ahead performance in which a look-ahead performance image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the other hand, even if there is no look-ahead performance pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command is sent to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variation. Here, if a preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a preview fade performance in which the preview image fades.

8. Operation of the image control microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided in the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described based on FIG. 45. The buffers and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the image control microcomputer 101 are provided in the RAM 104. FIG. 45 is a flow chart of the display control process. When the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a program from the ROM 103, and after the CPU initialization process, the display control process is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 judges whether or not a variable performance start command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5001). If it has been received (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the variable performance display (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received variable performance start command, reads out from the ROM 103 a predetermined variable performance image designated in the variable performance start command, and displays it on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the other hand, if the command has not been received (step S5001: NO), the above-mentioned process is skipped.

Next, the image control microcomputer 101 judges whether or not a pre-change end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5003). If it has been received (step 5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the look-ahead performance display (step S5004). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the pre-change end command, and if the pre-change end command contains look-ahead performance pattern information, it reads out a predetermined look-ahead performance image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Even if the pre-change end command does not contain look-ahead performance pattern information, if a preview image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a preview fade performance is performed in which the preview image is faded. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5003: NO), the above-mentioned process is skipped.

Then, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a variable performance end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5005). If it has been received (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads out from the ROM 103 an image that displays the variable performance as stopped, and displays the variable performance stopped on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 (step S5006). On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5005: NO), the above-mentioned process is skipped.

Then, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S5007). In other processing, for example, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives an opening performance start command, it reads out from the ROM 103 a predetermined opening performance image specified in the opening performance start command, and displays it on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Also, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives a round performance start command, it reads out from the ROM 103 a predetermined round performance image specified in the round performance start command, and displays it on the display screen 7a. Also, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives an ending performance start command, it reads out from the ROM 103 a predetermined ending performance image specified in the ending performance start command, and displays it on the display screen 7a, and then ends this processing.

9. Operation of the board movable body and the sub display device 10 The operation of the board movable body (the first movable role 14 and the second movable role 15) and the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) will be described using Figures 46 to 59. The performance control microcomputer 91 performs drive control to operate the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, the left sub display device 10L, and the right sub display device 10R during the game performance (display performance) or in the initial operation when the power is turned on. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs display performance to display a specific image on the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 during the game performance (display performance) or in the initial operation when the power is turned on.

The operation of the left sub display device 10L will be described using Figures 46 to 48. Figure 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the upward movement of the left sub display device 10L. Figure 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the right rotation of the left sub display device 10L. Figure 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the left sub display device 10L. The left sub display device 10L has a rectangular display screen and is configured to be able to move up and down and rotate left and right. The left sub display device 10L can stop at the retreat position (home position) shown in Figure 1 (first mode). At this time, the left sub display device 10L is located in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a, and a part of the lower left is difficult to see from the player. The left sub display device 10L moves upward (advances) from the retreat position in Figure 1 and moves to the relay position shown in Figure 46, and from that position, rotates right as shown in Figure 47, moves to the advance position (deployed position) shown in Figure 48, and can stop there (second mode). In this second mode, the left sub-display device 10L stops in front of the main display device 7, covering the center of the display screen 7a. The left sub-display device 10L is configured so that the orientation of the display screen changes by 90 degrees between the retracted position in FIG. 1 and the advanced position in FIG. 48. The left sub-display device 10L can move (retract) from the advanced position in FIG. 48 via the states in FIG. 47 and FIG. 46 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, where it can come to a stop.

The operation of the right sub-display device 10R will be described using Figures 49 to 51. Figure 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the upward movement of the right sub-display device 10R. Figure 50 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the left rotation of the right sub-display device 10R. Figure 51 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the right sub-display device 10R. The right sub-display device 10R, like the left sub-display device 10L, has a rectangular display screen and is configured to be able to move up and down and rotate left and right so that the movement mode (movement trajectory) is line symmetrical with the left sub-display device 10L. The right sub-display device 10R can stop at the retreat position (home position) shown in Figure 1 (first mode). At this time, the right sub-display device 10R is located in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, and part of the lower right is difficult to see from the player. The right sub-display device 10R moves upward (advanced) from the retracted position in FIG. 1 to the intermediate position (intermediate position) shown in FIG. 49, rotates left from that position as shown in FIG. 50, moves to the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 51, and can stop there (second mode). In this second mode, the right sub-display device 10R stops in front of the main display device 7 so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the advanced position of the right sub-display device 10R and the advanced position of the left sub-display device 10L are the same position. However, these advanced positions may be different. For example, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R may be adjacent to each other near the center of the display screen 7a when they are in their respective advanced positions. The right sub-display device 10R is configured so that the orientation of the display screen changes by 90 degrees between the retracted position in FIG. 1 and the advanced position in FIG. 51. The right sub-display device 10R can move (retract) from the advanced position in FIG. 51 through the states in FIG. 50 and FIG. 49 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, where it can come to a stop.

As shown in FIG. 52, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R can move upward in parallel (to the intermediate position). They can also stop at this intermediate position.

The operation of the first movable part 14 will be described using Figures 53 to 55. Figure 53 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movement of the first movable part 14 in the advancing direction (advancing movement). Figure 54 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the first movable part 14. Figure 55 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the rotational operation of the first movable part 14. As shown in Figure 53, the first movable part 14 includes a left movable part 14L and a right movable part 14R. The left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R are each configured to be movable in the left and right directions, and half of the decorative part (left decorative part and right decorative part) with a smiley face drawn on the tip side is attached. As shown in Figure 1, the first movable part 14 can be stopped at a retreat position (home position) where the left movable part 14L is stored to the left of the display screen 7a and the right movable part 14R is stored to the right of the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R are each partially visible. As shown in FIG. 53, the first movable part 14 moves from the state shown in FIG. 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a (in the direction approaching each other), and the left decorative part and the right decorative part are combined in the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 54 to form one decorative member (rotating body) (second mode). In this second mode, the rotating body formed by combining the left decorative part and the right decorative part stops in front of the main display device 7 so as to cover the center of the display screen 7a. Also, as shown in FIG. 55, this rotating body can rotate right and left (right rotation in the figure) in front of the display screen 7a, and can stop at any tilted angle. The first movable part 14 can move (retract) from the advanced position shown in Figures 54 and 55 through the state shown in Figure 53 to the retracted position shown in Figure 1, where it can come to a stop.

The operation of the second movable part 15 will be described using Figures 56 and 57. Figure 56 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the second movable part 15. Figure 57 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the rotational operation of the second movable part 15. The second movable part 15 has a rectangular decorative part with "OARO" written on it, and is configured to be able to move up and down and rotate left and right. As shown in Figure 1, the second movable part 15 can stop at a retreat position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, a part of the second movable part 15 becomes difficult to see. The second movable part 15 can move downward from the state of Figure 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a and stop at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in Figure 56 (second mode). In this second mode, the decorative part stops so as to cover the area slightly above the center of the display screen 7a on the front of the main display device 7. Also, as shown in FIG. 57, this decorative part can rotate right and left (right rotation in the figure) in front of the display screen 7a, and can stop at any tilted angle. The second movable part 15 can move upward (retract) from the advanced position in FIG. 56 and FIG. 57 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, where it can stop.

Using Figures 58 and 59, the combination performance of the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 will be explained. Figure 58 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a first combination performance by the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15. Figure 59 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second combination performance by the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15. As shown in Figure 58, the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 can execute the first combination performance by both being in the second state. That is, by both the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 moving to the advanced position, the second movable part 15 covers a part of the upper part of the first movable part 14. In other words, the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 can be stopped in a partially overlapping and combined state. In addition, as shown in FIG. 59, the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 can perform a second combination performance in which the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 tilt at the same angle with the second movable part 15 covering a part of the upper side of the first movable part 14. This second combination performance can be formed by the two movable parts rotating (tilting) together after the first combination performance, or by moving to the advance position in a tilted state and overlapping each other to perform the second combination performance directly without going through the first combination performance.

10. Examples of performance, effect, modification, and mode of this embodiment Below, each example of performance (display performance example, role-moving performance example) of this embodiment will be described. In addition, effect examples, modification, and mode examples for the performance examples will also be described. As described above, the performance described below is a performance realized by the performance control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101) based on various information (jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81. Note that the following display performance examples are executed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In addition, although the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display performance examples, it is actually displayed unless otherwise noted.

The sub-display device linked effects A to D are explained below with reference to Figures 60 to 63. These sub-display device linked effects can be executed during the decorative pattern variable effect (for example, during a pseudo consecutive effect). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the sub-display device linked effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays an image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and on the display screen of the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R). In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the sub-display device linked effect, it changes the position and inclination of the left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R.

[Sub-display linked performance A]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the sub display device interlocking performance A. In the sub display device interlocking performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 60(A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retreat position (home position). A specific image TG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The specific image TG1 represents the appearance of a specific object. Here, the specific image TG1 is a smiling face image. Note that the specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes all manners in which the number of specific objects can be specified when there are multiple specific objects.

Next, as shown in Figures 60(B) to 60(C), the specific image TG1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 moves in a lower left direction, moving from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. At this time, as shown in Figure 60(B), the specific image TG1 is temporarily displayed straddling the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. Here, the sub-display device 10 covers part of the main display device 7, and an image of the part of the main display device 7 that is covered by the sub-display device 10 is displayed on the sub-display device 10. After that, as shown in Figure 60(C), the entire specific image TG1 is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 60(D), the specific image TG1 that was displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R disappears from the right sub-display device 10R, and a new specific image TG2 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The specific image TG2 is an image that represents the appearance of a specific object, and in this case, like the specific image TG1, it is a smiling face image. The specific image TG2 is a larger image than the specific image TG1. Here, the specific image TG2 is displayed in the upper area of the right sub-display device 10R on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Note that the specific image TG2 may be a specific image TG1 that has been enlarged and moved while maintaining its display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(E), the sub-display devices 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) move from the retreat position (home position) to the upper relay position (relay position) and stop (stop) at the relay position. The specific image TG2 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is partially covered by the sub-display device 10 (right sub-display device 10R) at the relay position. In other words, the sub-display device 10 stops (stops) at a position that covers a part of the part of the main display device 7 where the specific image TG2 is displayed. At this time, the part of the specific image TG2 covered by the sub-display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10 (right sub-display device 10R). In other words, the sub-display device 10 displays an image corresponding to the part of the specific image TG2 displayed on the main display device 7 that is covered by the sub-display device 10. In other words, the specific image TG2 is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub-display device 10, and the part displayed on the sub-display device 10 gradually increases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(F), a reduction effect is executed in which the specific image TG2 is reduced. Here, the specific image TG2 is reduced and moved downward while remaining displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub-display device 10, and as shown in FIG. 60(G), the entire specific image TG2 is displayed on the sub-display device 10 (right sub-display device 10R).

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(H), the sub-display devices 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) move from the relay position (relay position) to a lower retreat position (home position) and come to a standstill (stop) at the retreat position. At this time, the specific image TG2 is displayed on the main display device 7 and the sub-display device 10 so that the relative position with respect to the main display device 7 does not change. That is, when the sub-display device 10 is moving downward, the specific image TG2 moves upward on the sub-display device 10 (right sub-display device 10R). After that, the portion of the specific image TG2 that protrudes from the top of the sub-display device 10 (right sub-display device 10R) is sequentially displayed on the main display device 7. That is, while the specific image TG2 is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub-display device 10, the portion displayed on the main display device 7 gradually increases. As a result, the specific image TG2 is switched from being entirely displayed on the sub-display device 10 (right sub-display device 10R) to being entirely displayed on the main display device 7, with almost no change in its relative position to the main display device 7, as shown in Figures 60(G) to 60(I). After that, as shown in Figure 60(J), with the specific image TG2 being displayed on the main display device 7, a new specific image TG3 is displayed on the sub-display device 10 (right sub-display device 10R). The specific image TG3 is an image that represents the appearance of a specific object, and in this case, like the specific image TG1, it is a smiling face image.

[Sub-display linked performance B]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the sub display device linkage performance B. FIG. 61(A) to FIG. 61(C) of the sub display device linkage performance B are the same as FIG. 60(A) to FIG. 60(C) of the sub display device linkage performance A. That is, in the sub display device linkage performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 61(A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retreat position (home position). A specific image TG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The specific image TG1 represents the appearance of a specific object. Here, the specific image TG1 is a smiling face image. Note that the specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. That is, the specific object here includes any manner in which the number of specific objects can be specified when there are multiple specific objects.

Next, as shown in Figures 61(B) to 61(C), the specific image TG1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 moves in a lower left direction, moving from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. At this time, as shown in Figure 61(B), the specific image TG1 is temporarily displayed straddling the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. Here, the sub-display device 10 covers part of the main display device 7, and an image of the part of the main display device 7 that is covered by the sub-display device 10 is displayed on the sub-display device 10. After that, as shown in Figure 61(C), the entire specific image TG1 is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (D), the specific image TG1 that was displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R disappears from the right sub-display device 10R, and a new specific image TG2 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The specific image TG2 is an image that represents the appearance of a specific object, and in this case, like the specific image TG1, it is a smiling face image. The specific image TG2 is an image that is larger than the specific image TG1. Here, the specific image TG2 is displayed in an area near the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Note that the specific image TG2 may be a specific image TG1 that has been enlarged and moved while maintaining its display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(E) to FIG. 61(F), the right sub-display device 10R moves upward from the retreat position (home position) and rotates left at the relay position (relay position) to move to the advanced position (deployed position) and stops there. A part of the specific image TG2 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is covered when the right sub-display device 10R moves to the advanced position. In other words, the sub-display device 10 (right sub-display device 10R) stops at a position that covers a part of the part of the main display device 7 where the specific image TG2 is displayed. At this time, a part of the specific image TG2 covered by the sub-display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10 (right sub-display device 10R). In other words, the sub-display device 10 displays an image corresponding to the part of the specific image TG2 displayed on the main display device 7 that is covered by the sub-display device 10. In other words, the specific image TG2 is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub-display device 10, and the part displayed on the sub-display device 10 gradually increases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(G), a reduction effect is executed in which the specific image TG2 is reduced. Here, the specific image TG2 is reduced while remaining displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub-display device 10, and the entire specific image TG2 is displayed on the sub-display device 10 (right sub-display device 10R).

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(H), the right sub-display device 10R moves from the advanced position (deployed position) to the retreated position (home position) by rotating to the right and moving downward, and stops (stops) at the retreated position. At this time, the specific image TG2 is displayed on the main display device 7 and the sub-display device 10 so that the relative position to the main display device 7 does not change. That is, when the right sub-display device 10R rotates to the right, the specific image TG2 moves toward the left side on the right sub-display device 10R. After that, the part of the specific image TG2 that protrudes from the left side of the right sub-display device 10R is displayed on the main display device 7 in sequence. That is, the part of the specific image TG2 displayed on the main display device 7 gradually increases while the specific image TG2 is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub-display device 10. As a result, the specific image TG2 is switched from a state in which it is entirely displayed on the right sub-display device 10R to a state in which it is entirely displayed on the main display device 7, with almost no change in the relative position to the main display device 7, as shown in FIG. 61(G) to FIG. 61(I). After that, as shown in FIG. 61(J), specific image TG3 is newly displayed on the sub-display device 10 (right sub-display device 10R) while specific image TG2 is displayed on the main display device 7. Specific image TG3 is an image that represents the appearance of a specific target, and in this case, like specific image TG1, it is an image of a smiling face.

[Sub-display linked performance C]
Fig. 62 is a diagram for explaining the sub display device linked performance C. In the sub display device linked performance C, first, as shown in Fig. 62 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retreat position (home position). The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, the decorative patterns form a reach, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as a temporary stop with the same pattern (number) (here, the temporary stop is "5"), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a variable pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(B) to FIG. 62(C), the decorative pattern 8Z1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The decorative pattern 8Z1 is an image of a pattern (number) that will be a big win when it stops as a middle decorative pattern in a reach performance, and is the same pattern (number) as the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. Here, it is "5". This decorative pattern 8Z1 also represents a number as a specific target, so it corresponds to a specific image. The decorative pattern 8Z1 moves in the lower left direction and moves from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. At this time, as shown in FIG. 62(B), the decorative pattern 8Z1 is temporarily displayed across the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. Here, the sub-display device 10 covers a part of the main display device 7, and the image of the part of the main display device 7 that is covered by the sub-display device 10 is displayed on the sub-display device 10. After that, as shown in FIG. 62(C), the entire decorative pattern 8Z1 is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62(D), the decorative pattern 8Z1 that was displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R disappears from the right sub-display device 10R and is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The decorative pattern 8Z1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is larger than when it was displayed on the right sub-display device 10R. Here, the decorative pattern 8Z1 is displayed in an area near the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Note that the decorative pattern 8Z1 may be enlarged and moved while remaining displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(E) to FIG. 62(F), the left sub-display device 10L moves upward from the retreat position (home position) and rotates right at the relay position (relay position) to move to the advance position (deployed position) and stops there. The decorative pattern 8Z1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is partially covered when the left sub-display device 10L moves to the advance position. In other words, the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L) stops at a position that covers a part of the part of the main display device 7 where the decorative pattern 8Z1 is displayed. At this time, a part of the decorative pattern 8Z1 covered by the sub-display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L). In other words, the sub-display device 10 displays an image corresponding to the part of the decorative pattern 8Z1 displayed on the main display device 7 that is covered by the sub-display device 10. In other words, the decorative pattern 8Z1 is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub-display device 10, and the portion displayed on the sub-display device 10 gradually increases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(G), a reduction effect is executed in which the decorative pattern 8Z1 is reduced. Here, the decorative pattern 8Z1 is reduced while remaining displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, and the entire decorative pattern 8Z1 is displayed on the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L). At this time, an effect image EF, which is an illuminating image, is displayed around the decorative pattern 8Z1. The effect image EF is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. This effect image EF suggests that the "5" of the decorative pattern 8Z1 has been confirmed as the middle decorative pattern 8C. In other words, it suggests that a jackpot has been confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(H), the left sub-display device 10L moves from the advanced position (deployed position) to the retreated position (home position) by rotating left and moving downward, and stops (stops) at the retreated position. At this time, the decorative pattern 8Z1 is displayed on the main display device 7 and the sub-display device 10 so that the relative position with respect to the main display device 7 does not change. That is, when the left sub-display device 10L rotates left, the decorative pattern 8Z1 moves toward the right side on the left sub-display device 10L. After that, the decorative pattern 8Z1 is displayed on the main display device 7 in the portion that protrudes from the right side of the left sub-display device 10L. That is, the decorative pattern 8Z1 is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub-display device 10, and the portion displayed on the main display device 7 gradually increases. As a result, the decorative pattern 8Z1 is switched from a state in which it is entirely displayed on the left sub-display device 10L to a state in which it is entirely displayed on the main display device 7, with almost no change in the relative position with respect to the main display device 7, as shown in FIG. 62(G) to FIG. 62(I). After that, as shown in FIG. 62(J), while the main display device 7 displays (stops) the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R as "5, 5, 5," the sub-display device 10 (right sub-display device 10R and left sub-display device 10L) displays (stops) the left decorative pattern 8ZL, the middle decorative pattern 8ZC, and the right decorative pattern 8ZR. The decorative pattern 8ZL, the middle decorative pattern 8ZC, and the right decorative pattern 8ZR are images corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R displayed on the main display device 7, and are displayed (stops) at almost the same time.

[Sub-display linked performance D]
Fig. 63 is a diagram for explaining the sub display device linked performance D. In the sub display device linked performance D, first, as shown in Fig. 63 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retreat position (home position). The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, the decorative patterns form a reach, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as a temporary stop with the same pattern (number) (here, the temporary stop is "5"), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a variable pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(B), multiple decorative symbols 8Z1 are displayed across both the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the sub display device 10. The decorative symbol 8Z1 is an image of a symbol (number) that will result in a big win when it stops as a middle decorative symbol in a reach performance, and is the same symbol (number) as the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. Here, it is "5". This decorative symbol 8Z1 also represents a number as a specific target, so it corresponds to a specific image. The multiple decorative symbols 8Z1 are displayed in a circular arrangement, and each moves along a circular track. Here, they move clockwise. Some of the multiple decorative symbols 8Z1 arranged in a circular arrangement are displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10, and the other parts are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The decorative symbol 8Z1 located at the bottom right moves in the lower left direction and moves from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. At this time, as shown in FIG. 63(B), the decorative pattern 8Z1 is temporarily displayed across the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. Here, the sub-display device 10 covers a part of the main display device 7, and the image of the part of the main display device 7 covered by the sub-display device 10 is displayed on the sub-display device 10. Similarly, the decorative pattern 8Z1 located at the bottom moves leftward and moves from the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R to the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The decorative pattern 8Z1 located at the bottom left moves up and leftward and moves from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. After that, the display of the multiple decorative patterns 8Z1 disappears, and the entire decorative pattern 8Z2 is newly displayed near the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, as shown in FIG. 63(C).

After that, as shown in FIG. 63(D), the decorative pattern 8Z1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is enlarged while maintaining its display. The decorative pattern 8Z2 may disappear once, and then the enlarged decorative pattern 8Z2 may be displayed again. The decorative pattern 8Z2 may also be one of the multiple decorative patterns 8Z1 that has moved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(E) to FIG. 63(F), the left sub-display device 10L moves upward from the retreat position (home position) and rotates right at the relay position (relay position) to move to the advance position (deployed position) and stops there. The decorative pattern 8Z2 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is partially covered when the left sub-display device 10L moves to the advance position. In other words, the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L) stops at a position that covers a part of the part of the main display device 7 where the decorative pattern 8Z2 is displayed. At this time, a part of the decorative pattern 8Z2 covered by the sub-display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L). In other words, the sub-display device 10 displays an image corresponding to the part of the decorative pattern 8Z2 displayed on the main display device 7 that is covered by the sub-display device 10. In other words, the decorative pattern 8Z2 is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub-display device 10, and the portion displayed on the sub-display device 10 gradually increases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(G), a reduction effect is executed in which the decorative pattern 8Z2 is reduced. Here, the decorative pattern 8Z2 is reduced while being displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, and the entire decorative pattern 8Z2 is displayed on the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L). At this time, an effect image EF, which is a light-emitting image, is displayed around the decorative pattern 8Z2. The effect image EF is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. This effect image EF suggests that the "5" of the decorative pattern 8Z2 has been determined as the middle decorative pattern 8C. In other words, it suggests that a big win has been determined. In addition, a plurality of decorative patterns 8Z1 are displayed in a circular arrangement on the main display device 7. Each of the plurality of decorative patterns 8Z1 moves along a circular orbit. Here, they move clockwise. Some of the plurality of decorative patterns 8Z1 arranged in a circular arrangement are displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, and the other part is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The multiple decorative patterns 8Z1 are displayed surrounding the decorative pattern 8Z2 displayed on the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(H), the left sub-display device 10L moves from the advanced position (deployed position) to the retreated position (home position) by rotating left and moving downward, and stops (stops) at the retreated position. At this time, the decorative pattern 8Z2 is displayed on the main display device 7 and the sub-display device 10 so that the relative position with respect to the main display device 7 does not change. That is, when the left sub-display device 10L rotates left, the decorative pattern 8Z2 moves toward the right side on the left sub-display device 10L. After that, the decorative pattern 8Z2 is displayed on the main display device 7 in the portion that protrudes from the right side of the left sub-display device 10L. That is, the decorative pattern 8Z2 is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub-display device 10, and the portion displayed on the main display device 7 gradually increases. As a result, the decorative pattern 8Z2 is switched from a state in which it is entirely displayed on the left sub-display device 10L to a state in which it is entirely displayed on the main display device 7, with almost no change in the relative position with respect to the main display device 7, as shown in FIG. 63(G) to FIG. 63(I). After that, as shown in FIG. 63(J), while the main display device 7 displays (stops) the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R as "5, 5, 5," the sub-display device 10 (right sub-display device 10R and left sub-display device 10L) displays (stops) the left decorative pattern 8ZL, the middle decorative pattern 8ZC, and the right decorative pattern 8ZR. The decorative pattern 8ZL, the middle decorative pattern 8ZC, and the right decorative pattern 8ZR are images corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R displayed on the main display device 7, and are displayed (stops) at almost the same time.

[Example of effect]
Below, examples of effects of the sub-display device linking are shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 60(D) to Fig. 60(E), a first effect is executed in which a specific image TG2 is displayed on the main display device 7, and after the first effect, the sub display device 10 moves from a first position and stops (stops) at a second position that covers a part of the main display device 7 where the specific image TG2 is displayed, and an image corresponding to the part of the specific image TG2 displayed on the main display device 7 that is covered by the sub display device 10 is displayed on the sub display device 10. This configuration can visually entertain the player and increase the interest. The same is true for Fig. 61(D) to Fig. 61(F), Fig. 62(D) to Fig. 62(F), and Fig. 63(D) to Fig. 63(F).
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 60(E) to Fig. 60(G), after the second effect, a third effect is executed in which the specific image TG2 displayed across the sub-display device 10 and the main display device 7 is reduced, and after the third effect, a fourth effect is executed in which the reduced specific image TG2 is displayed in its entirety on the sub-display device 10. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and increases the interest. The same is true for Fig. 61(F) to Fig. 61(G), Fig. 62(F) to Fig. 62(G), and Fig. 63(F) to Fig. 63(G).
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 60(G) to 60(I), after the fourth effect, the sub display device 10 moves from the second position to the first position, and the fifth effect is executed in which the entire specific image TG2 is displayed in a reduced size on the main display device 7. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and the interest can be increased. The same is true for Figures 61(G) to 61(I), 62(G) to 62(I), and 63(G) to 63(I).
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 60(B) to 60(C), when the sub-display device 10 is stopped at the first position before the first effect, a sixth effect can be executed in which a specific image TG1 is displayed on the sub-display device 10. This configuration can provide visual entertainment to the player, and can increase the player's interest. The same is true for Figures 61(B) to 61(C), 62(B) to 62(C), and 63(B).
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61(D) to FIG. 61(F),
The orientation of the sub-display device 10 is different when it is stopped at the first position and when it is stopped at the second position. This configuration allows the player to visually enjoy the game and increases the interest. The same is true for Figures 62(D) to 62(F) and 63(D) to 63(F).
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 62 and 63, the specific images are decorative patterns, so that the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be increased.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the pending icon linked presentation are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the sub-display linked performance A in Fig. 60, both the left sub-display 10L and the right sub-display 10R move upward among the sub-displays 10. However, it is also possible to have a configuration in which only the right sub-display 10R moves upward and the left sub-display 10L does not move upward.

[Modification 2]
In the sub display device linkage performance B of Fig. 61, the right sub display device 10R moves. However, the left sub display device 10L may move. In the sub display device linkage performance C of Fig. 62 and the sub display device linkage performance D of Fig. 63, the left sub display device 10L moves. However, the right sub display device 10R may move.

[Modification 3]
The contents of the sub-display linked effects A to D in Fig. 60 to Fig. 63 may be appropriately combined. For example, in the sub-display linked effect A in Fig. 60, the decorative pattern in Fig. 62 or Fig. 63 may be used as the specific image.

[Modification 5]
The sub display device linked performances of Figures 60 to 63 may not include some of the performances described above, or other performances may be added. For example, the sub display device linked performances of Figures 60 to 61 may be executed during the change of the decorative pattern, and the change display of the decorative pattern may be displayed.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect A1-1]
A first display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A gaming machine including a second display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
The first display means is configured to be movable,
A first effect in which a specific image representing a specific target is displayed on the second display means;
a second performance in which, after the first performance, the first display means moves from a first position and stops at a second position covering a part of a portion of the second display means where the specific image is displayed, and an image corresponding to the portion of the specific image displayed on the second display means that is covered by the first display means is displayed on the first display means;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A1-1,
a third effect in which the specific image displayed across the first display means and the second display means is displayed in a reduced size after the second effect;
A fourth effect in which the entirety of the reduced specific image is displayed on the first display means after the third effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-2,
After the fourth performance, the first display means is moved from the second position to the first position, and a fifth performance is executed in which the entirety of the specific image reduced in size is displayed on the second display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A1-1 to A1-3,
A sixth performance is executed in which the specific image is displayed on the first display means when the first display means is stopped at the first position before the first performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A1-1 to A1-4,
an orientation of the first display means is different when the first display means is stopped at the first position and when the first display means is stopped at the second position;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A1-1 to A1-5,
The specific image is a decorative pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative symbol change stop effects A to D are explained below with reference to Figures 64 to 67. These decorative symbol change stop effects can be executed during the decorative symbol change effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the decorative symbol change stop effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a, the left sub-display device 10L, the right sub-display device 10R, the illumination panel 18, etc. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is located closer to the player than the display screen 7a and the sub-display device 10.

[Decorative pattern change stop effect A]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern change stop performance A. In the decorative pattern change stop performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 64 (A), a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(B), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed stationary with the same symbol (symbol 7 in the figure), and a reach display is performed in which the decorative symbol 8C changes at high speed. This reach display is displayed across the display screen 7a, the left sub-display device 10L, and the right sub-display device 10R. The reach display represents the so-called reach state. In this reach effect, a specified character performs various effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(C), a miss display effect 1 is performed. In this miss display effect 1, the decorative pattern 8C stops at 6 in the reach display, and a miss pattern is displayed. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, if the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop at a repeat number, it becomes a jackpot pattern, and if they stop at a number other than a repeat number, it becomes a miss pattern. This miss pattern is displayed across the display screen 7a, the left sub-display device 10L, and the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(D), a losing display effect 2 is performed. In this losing display effect 2, the losing symbol is moved to and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a losing symbol ZA1 is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. This losing symbol ZA1 is "7 6 7", the same as the losing symbols displayed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Decorative pattern change stop effect B]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern change stop performance B. In the decorative pattern change stop performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(B), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed stationary with the same symbol (symbol 7 in the figure), and a reach display is performed in which the decorative symbol 8C changes at high speed. This reach display is displayed across the display screen 7a, the left sub-display device 10L, and the right sub-display device 10R. The reach display represents the so-called reach state. In this reach effect, a specified character performs various effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(C), a left sub-display device movement performance is performed. In this left sub-display device movement performance, the left sub-display device 10L moves from the home position to the expanded position, and moves to approximately the center of the display screen 7a, and the decorative pattern 8C displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. At this time, the hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub-display device 10L moves to the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(D), loss display performance 1 is performed. In this loss display performance 1, the decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a stop at 6 in the reach display, and a loss pattern is displayed. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a stop on the left sub-display device 10L. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, if the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop as a double number, it becomes a jackpot pattern, and if they stop as a number other than a double number, it becomes a loss pattern. This loss pattern is displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(E), failure display performance 2 is performed. In this failure display performance 2, the left sub-display device 10L returns from the expanded position to the home position, and the decorative pattern 8C that was displayed in the decorative pattern 8C is displayed on the display screen 7a. In other words, all of the failure patterns are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the failure pattern ZA1 is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. This failure pattern ZA1 is "7 6 7", the same as the failure patterns displayed in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Decorative pattern change stop effect C]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern change stop performance C. In the decorative pattern change stop performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 66 (A), a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(B), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed stationary with the same symbol (symbol 7 in the figure), and a reach display is performed in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed. This reach display is displayed across the display screen 7a, the left sub-display device 10L, and the right sub-display device 10R. The reach display represents the so-called reach state. In this reach effect, a specified character performs various effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(C), a left sub-display device movement effect is performed. In this left sub-display device movement effect, the left sub-display device 10L moves from the home position to the expanded position, and moves to approximately the center of the display screen 7a, and the decorative pattern 8C displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. At this time, the hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub-display device 10L moves to the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(D), jackpot display presentation 1 is performed. In this jackpot display presentation 1, the decorative symbol 8C stops at the number 7 in the reach display, and a jackpot symbol is displayed. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, if the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop at a duplicate number, it becomes a jackpot symbol, and if they stop at a number other than a duplicate number, it becomes a losing symbol. This jackpot symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(E), jackpot display effect 2 is performed. In this jackpot display effect 2, the left sub-display device 10L returns from the deployed position to the home position, and the decorative pattern 8C that was displayed in the decorative pattern 8C is displayed on the display screen 7a. In other words, all of the jackpot patterns are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the jackpot pattern ZA2 is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. This jackpot pattern ZA2 is "7 7 7", the same as the jackpot pattern displayed by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Decorative pattern change stop performance D]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern change stop performance D. In the decorative pattern change stop performance D, first, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(B), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed with the same symbol (symbol 7 in the figure), and other multiple decorative symbols are also displayed with the same symbol (symbol 7 in the figure), and a reach display in which the decorative symbol 8C changes at high speed is performed. In this case, the decorative symbol representing symbol 7 is arranged in a circle and moves counterclockwise. As shown in the figure, a reach display is formed on multiple reach lines LN by multiple decorative symbols representing symbol 7. In addition, this reach display is displayed across the display screen 7a, the left sub-display device 10L, and the right sub-display device 10R. In this reach effect, a predetermined character performs various effects. The reach line LN is a line on which the decorative symbols temporarily stop to perform a reach display, and in the event of a jackpot, a jackpot symbol is placed on the reach line LN.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(C), a left sub-display device movement effect is performed. In this left sub-display device movement effect, the left sub-display device 10L moves from the home position to the expanded position, and moves to approximately the center of the display screen 7a, and the rapidly changing decorative pattern 8C displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. At this time, the multiple decorative patterns showing 7 patterns including decorative patterns 8L and 8R are moving counterclockwise. In addition, the hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub-display device 10L moves to the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(D), jackpot display presentation 1 is performed. In this jackpot display presentation 1, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed as a 7 in the reach display, and the jackpot symbols are displayed on multiple reach lines LN. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed as a jackpot symbol on the left sub-display device 10L. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop as a duplicate, it becomes a jackpot symbol, and when they stop as a non-duplicate number, it becomes a losing symbol. This jackpot symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in Fig. 67(E), the big win display performance 2 is performed. In this big win display performance 2, the left sub-display device 10L returns from the deployed position to the home position, and the decorative symbol 8C displayed on the decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the display screen 7a. That is, all of the big win symbols formed on the multiple reach lines LN are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the big win symbol ZA2 is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. This big win symbol ZA2 is "7 7 7", the same as the big win symbol displayed on the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.
The decorative symbol variation stop effect is performed in the same variation. However, the present invention is not limited to this and may be performed in a plurality of variations.

[Modification]
In the decorative symbol variation stop performance, after a losing symbol or a big win symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a, a losing symbol ZA1 or a big win symbol ZA2 is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. In this case, after a losing symbol or a big win symbol is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L or the right sub-display device 10R, a losing symbol ZA1 or a symbol ZA2 may be displayed on the display screen 7a.
In the decorative symbol variation stop performance, after the left sub-display device 10L moves in front of the display screen 7a, the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L display the losing symbol ZA1 or the big win symbol. In this case, the display screen 7a may move toward the left sub-display device 10L, and the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L may display the losing symbol ZA1 or the big win symbol. Also, both the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L may move, and the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L may display the losing symbol ZA1 or the big win symbol.
In the decorative symbol change stop performances C and D, during the left sub display device movement performance, a button image representing the performance button 63 may be displayed on the left sub display device 10L (e.g., on the decorative symbol 8C) to prompt the player to press the performance button 63, and a jackpot symbol may be displayed when the performance button 63 is pressed. Also, the performance button may be displayed on the jackpot symbol, and a predetermined performance (e.g., a re-lottery performance that changes the jackpot symbol) may be performed by pressing the performance button 63.
In the decorative symbol variation stop performances A to C, when a losing symbol or a big win symbol is displayed during a reach performance, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R may be moved. For example, the moving decorative symbols may be rotated around the decorative symbol 8C. In this case, when the moving decorative symbols overlap with the losing symbol ZA1 or the big win symbol ZA2, they may pass behind the losing symbol ZA1 or the big win symbol ZA2.
In addition, in the decorative symbol variation stop performance D, when a losing symbol or a big win symbol is displayed during a reach performance, the decorative symbols on the multiple reach lines LN may be moved. For example, the moving decorative symbols may be rotated around the decorative symbol 8C. In this case, when the moving decorative symbols overlap with the big win symbol ZA2, they may pass behind the big win symbol ZA2.

[Example of effect]
An example of the effect of the decorative pattern change stop performance is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the decorative symbol variation stop performance, after the decorative symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a, a losing symbol or a big win symbol (a predetermined stop mode of the decorative symbol) is displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L (right sub-display device 10R). According to this configuration, the interest of the display performance of the decorative symbol can be improved by using two display devices, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the decorative symbol variation stop effect, the decorative symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L (right sub-display device 10R) display a losing symbol or a big win symbol (a predetermined stop mode of the decorative symbol) as a series of effects can be experienced, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the decorative symbol variation stop performances C and D, after the big win symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a, the big win symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L (right sub-display device 10R). With this configuration, the two display devices can be used to improve the interest of the big win symbol display performance, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the decorative symbol variation stop performances B to D, when a big win symbol is formed, at least a part of the symbols forming the big win symbol displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L is displayed in a moving manner. With this configuration, the entertainment value of the big win symbol display performance can be improved by using two display devices, and as a result, the entertainment value of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the decorative symbol variation stop effect, before the big win symbol or the losing symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, during the reach effect), the same decorative symbol (symbol 7) displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L is displayed in a moving manner. With this configuration, the two display devices can be used to improve the interest of the big win symbol display effect, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect ZA-1]
A gaming machine including a first display means and a second display means different from the first display means,
The first display means and the second display means are each capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects;
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display performance may be performed as one of the plurality of display performances,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a decorative pattern on the first display means,
The second display effect is an effect in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a predetermined stopped state on the first display means and the second display means,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Z-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZA-1,
In the combination performance, the second display performance is performed after the first display performance in the same variation.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Za-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect ZA-1 or ZA-2,
The predetermined stop mode of the decorative pattern in the second display performance is a mode representing a jackpot pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Za-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZA-3,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display performance is a performance in which a pattern that is the same as a pattern that forms the big win pattern in the second display performance is displayed in a moving manner on the first display means and the second display means,
The combination effect may include the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect,
In the combination performance, the second display performance is performed after the first display performance, and the third display performance is performed after the second display performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Za-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects ZA-1 to ZA-4,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect in which the same decorative pattern is displayed in a moving manner on the first display means and the second display means,
The combination effect may include the first display effect, the second display effect, and the fourth display effect,
In the combination performance, the fourth display performance is performed, the first display performance is performed after the fourth display performance, and the second display performance is performed after the first display performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the above embodiment, the following may be done.
When a first jackpot symbol is displayed on both the first display means and the second display means, a second jackpot symbol is displayed on either the first display means or the second display means.
After either the first display means or the second display means moves (to the front of the other display means), the first display means and the second display means display a jackpot symbol.
When the moved display means returns to the home position, the second big win symbol is displayed.
The first display means or the second display means forms a plurality of jackpot lines, each of which displays a jackpot symbol.
After a button image is displayed on either the first display means or the second display means, a big win symbol is displayed on the first display means and the second display means by pushing the button.
A plurality of decorative symbols move between the first display means and the second display means. At this time, the plurality of decorative symbols move behind the second big win symbol.
○A button image representing the performance button 63 is displayed on the decorative pattern 8C.

The special variation effects A to D are explained below using Figures 68 to 71. These special variation effects can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command to execute a special variation effect is included, it reads corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays an image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the sub-display device 10. In addition, in the special variation effect, the effect control microcomputer 91 drives the sub-display device 10 via the lamp control board 107.

[Special Variation A]
Figure 68 is a diagram to explain special variation performance A.
First, as shown in FIG. 68(A), the change start performance is executed. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retreat position (home position). On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, a reserved image 9A is displayed. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth memory areas of the first special pattern reserved memory area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third memory areas are displayed. On the other hand, on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the reserved image 9C is displayed. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current change.

Next, as shown in Fig. 68(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in Fig. 68(C), a zone entry effect is executed. In the zone entry effect, a message image "entering hot zone" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The hot zone is an effect that is performed for a predetermined period during the fluctuation.

Next, as shown in Fig. 68(D), a linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L moves linearly from the retreat position to the relay position as shown by the arrow YG1. At this time, the part of the image displayed on the display screen 7a that is covered by the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.
Next, as shown in Fig. 68(E), a rotational movement effect is executed. This rotational movement effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L rotates and moves from the relay position to the advance position as shown by the arrow YG2. At this time, the part of the image displayed on the display screen 7a that is covered by the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in Fig. 68(F), a movement completion effect is executed. This movement completion effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L finishes its movement and stops at the advanced position.
Next, as shown in Fig. 68(G), a middle symbol variation performance is executed. This middle symbol variation performance is a performance in which the middle symbol 8C, which is one row of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display device 7a, is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L shows the state in which the middle symbol 8C, "3", is varying downward as shown by the arrow YG3.
Next, as shown in Fig. 68(H), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. This middle symbol stop effect is an effect in which the middle symbol 8C, which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display device 7a, is stopped and displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, the state in which the middle symbol 8C, "5", is stopped on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is shown.

[Special Variation Performance B]
Figure 69 is a diagram to explain special variation effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 69(A), the change start performance is executed. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retreat position (home position). On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, a reserved image 9A is displayed. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth memory areas of the first special pattern reserved memory area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third memory areas are displayed. On the other hand, on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the reserved image 9C is displayed. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current change.

Next, as shown in Fig. 69(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in Fig. 69(C), a zone entry effect is executed. In the zone entry effect, a message image "entering hot zone" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The hot zone is an effect that is performed for a predetermined period during the fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (D), a linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L moves linearly from the evacuation position to the relay position, as shown by the arrow YG1. At this time, the part of the image displayed on the display screen 7a that is covered by the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(E), a rotational movement effect is executed. This rotational movement effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L rotates and moves from the relay position to the advance position, as shown by the arrow YG2. At this time, the part of the image displayed on the display screen 7a that is covered by the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in Fig. 68(F), a movement completion effect is executed. This movement completion effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L finishes its movement and stops at the advanced position.
Next, as shown in Fig. 68 (G), a middle symbol variation performance is executed. This middle symbol variation performance is a performance in which the middle symbol 8C, which is one row of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display device 7a, is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, in particular, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the middle symbol 8C is displayed enlarged compared to the performance symbols 8L and 8R on the display screen 7a. The display screen of the left sub-display device 10L shows the state in which the middle symbol 8C, "3", is varying downward as shown by the arrow YG3.

Next, as shown in Figure 68 (H), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. This middle symbol stop effect is an effect in which the middle symbol 8C, which is one of the symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display device 7a, is stopped and displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. In particular, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the middle symbol 8C is displayed enlarged compared to the symbols 8L and 8R on the display screen 7a. Here, the middle symbol 8C, "5", is shown stopped on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

[Special Variation Effects C]
Figure 70 is a diagram to explain special variation presentation C.
First, as shown in FIG. 70(A), the change start performance is executed. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retreat position (home position). On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, a reserved image 9A is displayed. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth memory areas of the first special pattern reserved memory area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third memory areas are displayed. On the other hand, on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the reserved image 9C is displayed. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current change.

Next, as shown in Fig. 70(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in Fig. 70(C), a zone entry effect is executed. In the zone entry effect, a message image "entering hot zone" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The hot zone is an effect that is performed for a predetermined period during the fluctuation.

Next, as shown in Figures 70 (D) to (H), a middle symbol variation effect is executed. This middle symbol variation effect is an effect in which the middle symbol 8C, which is one of the symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display device 7a, is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L that has moved to the advance position.

First, as shown in FIG. 70(D), the middle performance symbol 8C "3" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 while moving downward as shown by the arrow YG1. Next, as shown in FIG. 70(E), the middle performance symbol 8C "3" is displayed across the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the left sub display device 10L while moving downward as shown by the arrow YG2. Next, as shown in FIG. 70(F), the middle performance symbol 8C "3" is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L while moving downward as shown by the arrow YG3. Next, as shown in FIG. 70(G), the middle performance symbol 8C "3" is displayed across the display screen of the left sub display device 10L and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 while moving downward as shown by the arrow YG4.
Next, as shown in Figure 70 (H), the middle performance pattern 8C, "3", is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display screen 7 while moving downward as shown by YG5.

[Special Variation Effects D]
Figure 71 is a diagram to explain special variation performance D.
First, as shown in FIG. 71(A), the change start performance is executed. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retreat position (home position). On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, a reserved image 9A is displayed. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth memory areas of the first special pattern reserved memory area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third memory areas are displayed. On the other hand, on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the reserved image 9C is displayed. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current change.

Next, as shown in Fig. 71 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in Fig. 71(C) and (D), a middle symbol variation performance is executed. This middle symbol variation performance is a performance in which the middle symbol 8C, which is one row of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, the middle symbol 8C, "3", is shown fluctuating downward on the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow YG1. Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 71(D), the middle symbol 8C, "3", moves downward as shown by the arrow YG2. At this time, the left sub-display device 10L is in the retreat position, and the middle symbol 8C is not displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, the confirmed stop effect (miss) of Figure 71 (E) is executed. This confirmed stop effect (miss) is an effect in which the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped on the display screen 7a. Here, an example is shown in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both "5", and the center effect pattern 8C is "4".

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the special effect variations.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display of the middle performance symbol 8C among the display of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 can be displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L (FIG. 68(G), FIG. 69(G), FIG. 70(D)-(H)). With this configuration, the display of the middle performance symbol 8C can be made to feel special, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left sub-display device 10L moves to overlap the middle performance symbol 8C displayed on the display screen 7a (Fig. 68(D)(E)(F), Fig. 69(D)(E)(F)), and the middle performance symbol 8C is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L (Fig. 68(G), Fig. 69(G), Fig. 70(D)-(H)). With this configuration, the middle performance symbol 8C can be displayed with a special feeling, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one of the three rows of performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the performance symbol 8C, is displayed variably on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. This configuration allows the player to feel a sense of specialness in the variable display of the performance symbols in a specific row, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the middle symbol variation performance, the middle performance symbol 8C is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. After being displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the middle performance symbol 8C is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. According to this configuration, the variation display of the middle performance symbol 8C can be made to feel special, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the execution of the zone entry performance is triggered (FIG. 68(C), FIG. 69(C), FIG. 70(C)), and the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L performs a variable display of the center performance pattern 8C. With this configuration, the zone performance can be made more flexible, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the middle performance symbol 8C displayed on the left sub-display device 10L can be displayed larger than the performance symbols 8L and 8R on the display device 7a (FIG. 69 (G) (H)). With this configuration, the variable display of the middle performance symbol 8C can be made to feel even more special, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below are some variations on the special variation effects.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the left sub-display device 10L is used for the performance, but it is also possible to use the right sub-display device 10R in addition to or instead of the left sub-display device 10L for a performance that displays the middle performance pattern 8C.
[Modification 2]
In the above, the middle performance pattern 8C, which is one row of the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, but it is also possible to display two or more rows of the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.
[Modification 3]
In the above, when a zone entry performance is executed (Figures 68 (C), 69 (C), and 70 (C)), the left sub-display device 10L is used to display the changing middle performance pattern 8C. However, when a zone entry performance is executed, the system may be configured to branch into a case where the left sub-display device 10L is used to display the changing middle performance pattern 8C, and a case where the left sub-display device 10L is not used to display the changing middle performance pattern 8C (Figure 71).

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A3-1]
A first display device capable of displaying a variation of a performance pattern;
A gaming machine including a second display device separate from the first display device,
A gaming machine characterized in that the display of changes in the performance symbols in a specified column among the display changes in the performance symbols displayed on the display screen of the first display device can be displayed on the display screen of the second display device.

[Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A3-1,
The second display device moves to overlap the performance symbols in the predetermined row of the first display device, and displays a varying display of the performance symbols in the predetermined row.

[Aspect A3-3]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A3-1 or A3-2,
The predetermined row of performance symbols is any one of a plurality of rows of performance symbols.

[Aspect A3-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A3-1 to A3-3,
A gaming machine characterized in that the performance pattern of the specified row is displayed on one of the display screens of the first display device and the second display device during its change, and then is displayed on the other display screen across the display screens of the first display device and the second display device.

[Aspect A3-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A3-1 to A3-4,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a specific performance is executed, a varying display of the performance symbols in the predetermined row is performed on the display screen of the second display device.

[Aspect A3-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A3-1 to A3-5,
A gaming machine characterized in that the performance symbols displayed on the display screen of the second display device are larger than the performance symbols displayed on the display screen of the first display device.

[Aspect A3-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-5,
A gaming machine characterized in that even when the specific performance is executed, the display of the changing performance symbols in the specified row may not be performed on the display screen of the second display device.

Below, character display effects A to D are explained using Figures 72 to 75. These character display effects can be executed during the decorative pattern variation effect, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a character display effect, it reads corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays images on the display screen 7a, left sub-display device 10L, right sub-display device 10R, illumination panel 18, etc. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is located closer to the player than the display screen 7a and the sub-display device 10.

[Character display effect A]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining character display effect A.
In the character display performance A, first, as shown in Fig. 72 (A), a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(B), character display presentation 1 is performed. In this character display presentation 1, character CRA is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. This character CRA represents an ally character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(C), character display presentation 2 is performed. In this character display presentation 2, the character CRA is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L and then moves to the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in Fig. 72(D), character display presentation 3 is performed. In this character display presentation 3, the character CRA is displayed again near the center of the display screen 7a.
After this, the reach performance is carried out.

[Character display effect B]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining character display presentation B.
In the character display performance B, first, as shown in Fig. 73 (A), a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(B), character display presentation 1 is performed. In this character display presentation 1, character CRA is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. This character CRA represents an ally character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(C), character display performance 2 is performed. In this character display performance 2, the left sub-display device 10L moves to an expanded position near the center of the display screen 7a (where character CRA was displayed in character display performance 1), and the character CRA that was displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. Note that the hold icon 9A that was displayed on the left sub-display device 10L has moved to the right sub-display device 10R.

73(D), character display effect 3 is performed. In this character display effect 3, the left sub-display device 10L moves from the deployed position to the home position, and the character CRA is again displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.
After this, the reach performance is carried out.

[Character display effect C]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining character display presentation C.
In the character display performance C, first, as shown in Fig. 74 (A), a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(B), character display presentation 1 is performed. In this character display presentation 1, character CRA is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. This character CRA represents an ally character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(C), character display performance 2 is performed. In this character display performance 2, the left sub-display device 10L moves to an expanded position near the center of the display screen 7a (where the character CRA was displayed in character display performance 1), and the character CRA that was displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. In addition, in character display performance 2, a character focus image ZB1 is displayed on the illumination panel 18. This character focus image ZB1 is displayed on a part other than the part corresponding to the left sub-display device 10L, and is an image for emphasizing the character CRA, for example, an image that shows multiple speed lines from the part corresponding to the left sub-display device 10L, or a predetermined emblem. Note that the character focus image ZB1 may be displayed on the illumination panel 18 in a part other than the character CRA of the left sub-display device 10L. In addition, the hold icon 9A that was displayed on the left sub-display device 10L has moved to the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in Fig. 74 (D), character display performance 3 is performed. In this character display performance 3, the left sub-display device 10L moves from the deployed position to the home position, the character CRA is displayed again near the center of the display screen 7a, and the character focus image ZB1 of the illumination panel 18 is erased and that portion becomes transparent. The reserved icon 9A returns to be displayed on the left sub-display device 10L again.
After this, the reach performance is carried out.

[Character display effect D]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining character display presentation D.
In the character display performance D, first, as shown in Fig. 75 (A), a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a changing manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(B), character display presentation 1 is performed. In this character display presentation 1, character CRA is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. This character CRA represents an ally character.

Next, as shown in Figures 75 (C) and (D), character display performance 2 and character display performance 3 are performed. That is, in character display performances 2 and 3, the left sub-display device 10L is driven toward the expanded position (near the center of the display screen 7a where the character CRA is displayed), and when it reaches the position of the character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a, it gradually hides the character CRA on the display screen 7a, and displays an image corresponding to the hidden part of the character CRA on the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(E), character display performance 4 is performed. In this character display performance 4, the left sub-display device 10L moves to an expanded position near the center of the display screen 7a (where the character CRA was displayed in character display performance 1), and the character CRA that was displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. In addition, in character display performance 2, a character focus image ZB1 is displayed on the illumination panel 18. This character focus image ZB1 is displayed on a part other than the part corresponding to the left sub-display device 10L, and is an image for emphasizing the character CRA, for example, an image that shows multiple speed lines from the part corresponding to the left sub-display device 10L, or a predetermined emblem. Note that the character focus image ZB1 may be displayed on the illumination panel 18 in a part other than the character CRA of the left sub-display device 10L. In addition, the hold icon 9A that was displayed on the left sub-display device 10L has moved to the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in Fig. 75(F), character display performance 5 is performed. In this character display performance 5, the left sub-display device 10L moves from the deployed position to the home position, the character CRA is displayed again near the center of the display screen 7a, and the character focus image ZB1 of the illumination panel 18 is erased and that portion becomes transparent. The reserved icon 9A returns to be displayed on the left sub-display device 10L again.
After this, the reach performance is carried out.

[Modification]
In the above character display effects C and D, when the left sub-display device 10L moves to the position of the character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a, the character CRA is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L in sequence from the area in front of the character CRA. In contrast, when the left sub-display device 10L hides all the characters CRA displayed on the display screen 7a, the character CRA may be displayed on the left sub-display device 10L.

The above character display effects are performed with the same variations. However, this is not limited to this and may be performed with different variations.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of character display effects.
[Effect 1]
In the character display presentation, after the character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a, the character CRA is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L (right sub-display device 10R). With this configuration, the interest of the character display presentation can be improved by using two display devices, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the character display presentation, the character CRA is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a, and when the left sub-display device 10L is in a position in front of the center of the display screen 7a, the character CRA is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L at a position corresponding to the character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a. With this configuration, the character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed as if it has moved to the left sub-display device 10L, which is located in front of the display screen 7a, so that a three-dimensional display presentation can be performed. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the character display presentation, the left sub-display device 10L moves from the home position to a deployed position in front of the center of the display screen 7a, and when the left sub-display device 10L is in the deployed position, the character CRA is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L at a position corresponding to the character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a. With this configuration, as the left sub-display device 10L moves, the character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed as if it had moved to the left sub-display device 10L located in front of the display screen 7a, making it possible to perform a display presentation with a sense of dynamism and three-dimensionality. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the character display presentation, when the left sub-display device 10L moves to the deployed position, the left sub-display device 10L rotates about a predetermined axis (rotates to the right) (see FIG. 47). This configuration makes it possible to provide a more dynamic and three-dimensional display presentation. As a result, the entertainment value of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the above character display effects C and D, the character CRA moves from the display screen 7a to the left sub-display device 10L and is displayed. In this case, a character focus image ZB1, which is an image different from the character CRA, is displayed in a portion of the illumination panel 18 different from the portion corresponding to the left sub-display device 10L (the portion corresponding to the character CRA displayed on the left sub-display device 10L). This configuration makes it possible to enhance the presence of the character CRA and to perform a display effect with a more dynamic and three-dimensional feel. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect ZB-1]
A gaming machine including a first display means and a second display means different from the first display means,
The first display means and the second display means are each capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects;
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display performance may be performed as one of the plurality of display performances,
the first display effect is an effect of displaying a predetermined image on the first display means,
the second display effect is an effect of displaying the predetermined image on the second display means,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZB-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZB-1,
In the combination performance, in the first display performance, the predetermined image is displayed at a first position of the first display means, and in the second display performance, the predetermined image is displayed at a third position on the second display means corresponding to the first position of the first display means while the second display means is in a second position which is a position before the first position of the first display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZB-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZB-2,
In the combination performance, in the second display performance, the second display means moves from a state in which it is in a fourth position to the second position, and while the second display means is in the second position, the second display means displays the predetermined image at the third position.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZB-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZB-3,
In the combination presentation, when the second display means moves to the second position in the second display presentation, the second display means rotates about a predetermined axis.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZB-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZB-3 or ZB-4,
a third display means different from the first display means and the second display means;
the third display means is disposed in front of the first display means and the second display means,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display performance includes, when the predetermined image is displayed at the third position of the second display means in the second display performance, displaying an image different from the predetermined image in a portion of the third display means different from a portion corresponding to the predetermined image displayed on the second display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the above embodiment, the following may be done.
When the second display means moves to the position of the predetermined image on the first display means, the predetermined image is displayed in sequence from the area in front of the predetermined image.
The predetermined images are displayed in sequence on the second display means, and eventually, all the predetermined images are displayed.

The selection effects A to D are explained below with reference to Figures 76 to 79. These selection effects can be executed during the display of the decorative pattern variation. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command contains an instruction to execute the selection effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays an image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and on the display screen of the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R). In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command contains an instruction to execute the selection effect, it changes the position and inclination of the left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R.

[Selection A]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the selection performance A. In the selection performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 76(A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retreat position (home position). The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, the decorative patterns form a reach, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as the same pattern (number) in a temporary stop state (here, the temporary stop state is "5"), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable state. Here, a selection performance is executed in which one pattern is selected from among a plurality of candidates for the pattern (number) that is finally selected as the middle decorative pattern 8C. That is, the selection performance is a performance in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images with different contents, and in this embodiment, a performance in which one pattern is selected from three types of patterns "3", "4", and "5" is illustrated. The selection effect includes a selection start suggestion effect that suggests that the selection effect will start, and a selection decision effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images. In this embodiment, Fig. 76(A) to Fig. 76(F) suggest that the selection effect will start in which one of the three types of patterns "3", "4", and "5" is selected, and corresponds to the selection effect start effect. Fig. 76(H) notifies that the pattern "4" has been selected from the three types of patterns "3", "4", and "5", and corresponds to the selection decision effect. Fig. 76(I) to Fig. 76(J) notify that the pattern "5" has been selected from the three types of patterns "3", "4", and "5", and also corresponds to the selection decision effect.

In FIG. 76(A), a first central decorative pattern 8C1 representing "3" is temporarily stopped at the position where the central decorative pattern is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 76(B) to FIG. 76(C), a second central decorative pattern 8C2 representing "4" moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a and overlaps with the first central decorative pattern 8C1 and is temporarily stopped. The second central decorative pattern 8C2 displayed here is larger than the first central decorative pattern 8C1, and the second central decorative pattern 8C2 overlaps in front of the first central decorative pattern 8C1, making the first central decorative pattern 8C1 difficult to see.

Next, as shown in Fig. 76(D) to Fig. 76(E), the third decorative pattern 8C3 representing "5" moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a and overlaps with the second decorative pattern 8C2. The third decorative pattern 8C1 displayed here is larger than the first decorative pattern 8C1, and the third decorative pattern 8C3 overlaps in front of the second decorative pattern 8C2, making the second decorative pattern 8C2 difficult to see. After that, the first decorative pattern 8C1 representing "3" larger than the third decorative pattern 8C3 moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a and covers the third decorative pattern 8C3. Next, the second decorative pattern 8C2 larger than the first decorative pattern 8C1 moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a and covers the first decorative pattern 8C1. In this way, the effect of successively larger central decorative symbols covering the central decorative symbol currently temporarily displayed is repeated, and the speed of the effect increases, resulting in a high-speed effect display in which the replacement of the central decorative symbols is difficult to see, as shown in FIG. 76(F). In the effects of FIG. 76(A) to FIG. 76(F), three types of symbols "3", "4", and "5" are displayed one by one in sequence, and the player can be notified that a selection effect will begin in which one of these symbols will be selected. In other words, these effects correspond to selection effect start effects.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76(G), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear, and the button image BTN, the timer bar TBI, and the operation prompting image RND are displayed on the display screen 7a. The button image BTN is an image showing the appearance of the effect button 63. The timer bar TBI shows the effective operation period of the effect button 63. The operation prompting image RND is an image including the word "press" and an arrow pointing downward, and is an image for encouraging the player to operate the effect button 63. When the player operates the effect button 63, a selection decision effect is executed in which one of the three patterns "3", "4", and "5" is selected and decided. Here, the selection decision is notified to the player of the selected and decided pattern by the selected pattern stopping (provisionally stopping or confirmed stopping) at the display position of the middle decorative pattern.

In FIG. 76(H), the second central decorative pattern 8C2 representing "4" stops, notifying that the pattern "4" has been selected from the three patterns "3", "4", and "5". In FIG. 76(J), the third central decorative pattern 8C3 representing "5" stops, notifying that the pattern "5" has been selected from the three patterns "3", "4", and "5". As shown in FIG. 76(H), the second central decorative pattern 8C2 representing "4" is displayed (stopped) at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 where the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 76(J), the third central decorative pattern 8C3 representing "5" is displayed (stopped) on the right sub-display device 10R in the advanced position (deployed position) that covers a predetermined position on the display screen 7a. Specifically, when the third middle decorative pattern 8C3 representing "5" stops, as shown in FIG. 76(I), the third middle decorative pattern 8C3 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the right sub-display device 10R moves upward from the retreat position (home position) and rotates left at the relay position (relay position) to move to the advance position (deployed position), where it stops (stops). The advance position (deployed position) is a position that covers the above-mentioned predetermined position of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The third middle decorative pattern 8C3 that is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is partially covered when the right sub-display device 10R moves to the advance position. In other words, the right sub-display device 10R stops (stops) at a position that covers a part of the part of the main display device 7 where the third middle decorative pattern 8C3 is displayed. At this time, a part of the third middle decorative pattern 8C3 covered by the sub-display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. In other words, the right sub-display device 10R displays an image corresponding to the portion of the third intermediate decorative pattern 8C3 displayed on the main display device 7 that is covered by the right sub-display device 10R. In other words, the third intermediate decorative pattern 8C3 is displayed across the main display device 7 and the right sub-display device 10R, and the portion displayed on the sub-display device 10 gradually increases. The second intermediate decorative pattern 8C2 and the third intermediate decorative pattern 8C3 are displayed in approximately the same position relative to the main display device 7.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76(J), the third middle decorative pattern 8C3 is displayed in its entirety on the right sub-display device 10R in the advance position (deployed position). In FIG. 76(I), the third middle decorative pattern 8C3 may not be displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, but may be displayed on the right sub-display device 10R only when the right sub-display device 10R is located in the advance position (deployed position). In this way, by changing the display device depending on the type (number) of the image (pattern) finally selected as the middle decorative pattern 8C, a special feeling can be created when a specific image is selected, and interest can be increased. Here, when the third middle decorative pattern 8C3 representing the "5" that is a jackpot is selected, it is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R, giving the player a special feeling.

[Selection B]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the selection performance B. In the selection performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 77(A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retreat position (home position). This selection performance B is executed during the variation performance. Here, during the variation performance of the decorative pattern, a selection performance is executed in which one image is selected from among a plurality of images showing the big win lottery result for the variation. That is, the selection performance is a performance in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images with different contents, and in this embodiment, an example is shown in which one image is selected from three types of images, "miss", "big win", and "reach". Here, after the selection performance, the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped or stopped so as to result in a result corresponding to the selected image. That is, when the "miss" image is selected in the selection performance, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the form of a miss (for example, "456"). When the "big win" image is selected in the selection performance, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the form of a big win (for example, "777"). When the image of "reach" is selected in the selection effect, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are displayed stopped in the reach mode (for example, "5↓5"). In other words, after the selection effect, the effect corresponding to the image selected in the selection effect (jackpot display, miss display, reach display) is executed.

The selection effect includes a selection start suggestion effect that suggests that a selection effect will start, and a selection decision effect in which one image is selected from multiple types of images. In this embodiment, Fig. 77(A) to Fig. 77(F) suggest that a selection effect will start in which one image is selected from three types of images, "Miss", "Big Win", and "Reach", and correspond to a selection effect start effect. Fig. 77(H) notifies that "Miss" has been selected from the three types of images, "Miss", "Big Win", and "Reach", and corresponds to a selection decision effect. Fig. 77(I) to Fig. 77(J) notify that "Big Win" has been selected from the three types of images, "Miss", "Big Win", and "Reach", and also corresponds to a selection decision effect.

In Figure 77 (A), a first image SG1 representing a "miss" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in Figures 77 (B) to 77 (C), a second image SG2 representing a "jackpot" moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a and is displayed frozen, overlapping the first image SG1. The second image SG2 displayed here is an image of the same size and shape as the first image SG1, and by overlapping the second image SG2 in front of the first image SG1, the first image SG1 becomes difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(D) to FIG. 77(E), the third image SG3 representing "reach" moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a and overlaps with the second image SG2. The third image SG3 displayed here is an image of the same size and shape as the second image SG2, and the third image SG3 overlaps in front of the second image SG2, making the second image SG2 difficult to see. After that, the first image SG1, which has the same size and shape as the third image SG3, moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a and covers the third image SG3. Next, the second image SG2 moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a and covers the first image SG1. In this way, the performance in which the first to third images cover the image currently temporarily displayed is repeated and the performance speed increases, and as shown in FIG. 77(F), a high-speed performance display SG is performed in which the image replacement is difficult to see. In the effects of Figures 77(A) to 77(F), three types of images, "Miss," "Big Win," and "Reach," are displayed one by one in sequence, and the player is notified that a selection effect will begin in which one of these images will be selected. In other words, these effects correspond to selection effect start effects.

After that, as shown in FIG. 77(G), the high-speed performance display SG disappears, and the button image BTN, timer bar TBI, and operation prompting image RND are displayed on the display screen 7a. The button image BTN is an image that shows the appearance of the performance button 63. The timer bar TBI shows the effective operation period of the performance button 63. The operation prompting image RND is an image that includes the word "press" and an arrow pointing downward, and is an image that encourages the player to operate the performance button 63. When the player operates the performance button 63, a selection decision performance is executed in which one image is selected from three types of images, "miss," "jackpot," and "reach." Here, the selection decision notifies the player of the selected image by displaying only the selected image at a stopped position.

In FIG. 77(H), the first image SG1 representing "miss" stops, notifying that "miss" has been selected from the three types of images "miss", "jackpot", and "reach". In FIG. 77(J), the second image SG2 representing "jackpot" stops, notifying that "jackpot" has been selected from the three types of images "miss", "jackpot", and "reach". As shown in FIG. 77(H), the first image SG1 representing "miss" is displayed (stopped) at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 77(J), the second image SG2 representing "jackpot" is displayed (stopped) on the right sub-display device 10R at a relay position (relay position) that covers a predetermined position on the display screen 7a. Specifically, when the second image SG2 representing the "big win" stops, as shown in FIG. 77(I), the second image SG2 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R) move from the retreat position (home position) to an upper relay position (relay position) and stop (stop) at the relay position. The relay position (relay position) is a position that covers the above-mentioned predetermined position of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The second image SG2 that is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is partially covered by the sub-display device 10 (the right sub-display device 10R) at the relay position. In other words, the sub-display device 10 stops (stops) at a position that covers a part of the part of the main display device 7 where the second image SG2 is displayed. At this time, the part of the second image SG2 covered by the sub-display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10 (the right sub-display device 10R). In other words, the sub-display device 10 displays an image that corresponds to the portion of the second image SG2 displayed on the main display device 7 that is covered by the sub-display device 10. In other words, the second image SG2 is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub-display device 10, and the portion of the second image SG2 displayed on the sub-display device 10 gradually increases. The first image SG1 and the second image SG2 are displayed at approximately the same position relative to the main display device 7.

After that, as shown in FIG. 77(J), the second image SG2 is displayed in its entirety on the right sub-display device 10R at the relay position. Note that in FIG. 77(I), the second image SG2 may not be displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, but may be displayed on the right sub-display device 10R only when the right sub-display device 10R is located at the relay position. In this way, by changing the display device depending on the type of image that is ultimately selected as the jackpot lottery result, it is possible to create a sense of exclusivity when a specific image is selected, and to increase interest. Here, when the second image SG2 representing a "jackpot" is selected, it is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R, giving the player a sense of exclusivity.

[Selection Feature C]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the selection effect C. In the selection effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 78(A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retreat position (home position). This selection effect C is executed during a jackpot game. Here, during a jackpot game, a selection effect is executed in which one image is selected from a plurality of images showing the game state after the jackpot game. That is, the selection effect is an effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images with different contents, and in this embodiment, an effect in which one image is selected from two types of images, "probability change" and "time reduction", is illustrated. Here, after the selection effect, when the jackpot game ends, the game state corresponds to the selected image. That is, if the image of "probability change" is selected in the selection effect, the game state becomes a probability change state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot game. If the image of "time reduction" is selected in the selection effect, the game state becomes a time reduction state (low probability high base state) after the jackpot game. In other words, after the selection effect, when the big win game ends, an effect (probability bonus effect, time-saving effect) corresponding to the image selected in the selection effect is executed.

The selection effect includes a selection start suggestion effect that suggests that a selection effect will start, and a selection decision effect in which one image is selected from multiple types of images. In this embodiment, Fig. 78(A) to Fig. 78(F) suggest that a selection effect will start in which one image is selected from two types of images, "high probability" and "time-saving", and correspond to a selection effect start effect. Fig. 78(H) notifies that "time-saving" has been selected from the two types of images, "high probability" and "time-saving", and corresponds to a selection decision effect. Fig. 78(I) to Fig. 78(J) notify that "high probability" has been selected from the two types of images, "high probability" and "time-saving", and also correspond to a selection decision effect.

In FIG. 78(A), a first image SG1 representing a "probable win" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 78(B) to FIG. 78(C), a second image SG2 representing a "time-saving" moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a and is displayed stopped and overlapping the first image SG1. The second image SG2 displayed here is larger than the first image SG1, and the second image SG2 overlaps in front of the first image SG1, making it difficult to see the first image SG1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(D) to FIG. 78(E), the first image SG1 representing a "probable win" moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a and overlaps with the second image SG2. The first image SG1 displayed here is larger than the second image SG2, and the first image SG1 overlaps in front of the second image SG2, making the second image SG2 difficult to see. After that, the second image SG2, which is larger than the first image SG1, moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a and covers the first image SG1. Next, the first image SG1 moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a and covers the second image SG2. In this way, the performance in which the first and second images cover the image currently displayed in a temporary stop is repeated and the performance speed increases, and as shown in FIG. 78(F), a high-speed performance display SG is performed in which the image replacement is difficult to see. In the effects of Figures 78(A) to 78(F), two types of images, "Probable Change" and "Time Reduction", are displayed one by one in sequence, and the player is notified that a selection effect will begin in which one of these images will be selected. In other words, these effects correspond to selection effect start effects.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78(G), the high-speed effect display SG disappears, and the button image BTN, timer bar TBI, and operation prompting image RND are displayed on the display screen 7a. The button image BTN is an image that shows the appearance of the effect button 63. The timer bar TBI shows the effective operation period of the effect button 63. The operation prompting image RND is an image that includes the word "press" and an arrow pointing downward, and is an image that encourages the player to operate the effect button 63. When the player operates the effect button 63, a selection decision effect is executed in which one image is selected from two types of images, "Probable Change" and "Time Reduction". Here, the selection decision notifies the player of the selected image by displaying only the selected image in a stopped state at the display position.

In FIG. 78(H), the second image SG2 representing "time-saving" stops, notifying that "time-saving" has been selected from the two types of images, "probable chance" and "time-saving". In FIG. 78(J), the first image SG1 representing "probable chance" stops, notifying that "probable chance" has been selected from the two types of images, "probable chance" and "time-saving". As shown in FIG. 78(H), the second image SG2 representing "time-saving" is displayed (stopped) at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Meanwhile, as shown in FIG. 78(J), the first image SG1 representing "probable chance" is displayed (stopped) on the right sub-display device 10R in the advanced position (deployed position). Specifically, when the first image SG1 representing a "probable win" stops, as shown in FIG. 78 (I), while the first image SG1 is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the right sub-display device 10R moves upward from the retreat position (home position) and rotates left at the relay position (relay position) to move to the advance position (deployed position) and come to a standstill (stop) there. The advance position (deployed position) is a position that covers the above-mentioned specified position of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78(J), the first image SG1 is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R in the advance position (deployment position). Around the first image SG1, an effect image EF, which is a light-emitting image, is displayed. The effect image EF is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub-display device 10. This effect image EF notifies that the "probable change" of the first image SG1 has been confirmed. Note that in FIG. 78(I), the first image SG1 may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In this way, by changing the display device depending on the type of image finally selected as the game state after the big win game, a special feeling can be created when a specific image is selected, and interest can be improved. Here, when the first image SG1 representing the "probable change" is selected, it is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R, so that a special feeling can be given to the player. The second image SG2 and the first image SG1 are displayed at approximately the same position relative to the main display device 7.

[Selection Producer D]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the selection performance D. In the selection performance D, first, as shown in FIG. 79(A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retreat position (home position). This selection performance D is executed during the variation performance of the probability change state (high probability high base state). Here, during the variation performance of the probability change state, a selection performance is executed in which one image is selected from among a plurality of images showing the lottery result for the variation. That is, the selection performance is a performance in which one image is selected from among a plurality of types of images with different contents, and in this embodiment, an example is shown in which one image is selected from three types of images, "fall", "continue", and "big win". Here, after the selection performance, the game state corresponds to the selected image. That is, if the image of "fall" is selected in the selection performance, the game state is then normal (low probability low base state). If the image of "continue" is selected in the selection performance, the probability change state (high probability high base state) continues as it is. When the image of "Big Win" is selected in the selection effect, a big win game is executed. In other words, after the selection effect, the effect corresponding to the image selected in the selection effect (normal state effect, time-saving state effect, big win game effect) is executed.

The selection effect includes a selection start suggestion effect that suggests that a selection effect will start, and a selection decision effect in which one image is selected from multiple types of images. In this embodiment, Fig. 79(A) to Fig. 79(F) suggest that a selection effect will start in which one image is selected from three types of images, "fall", "continue", and "jackpot", and correspond to a selection effect start effect. Fig. 79(H) notifies that "fall" has been selected from the three types of images, "fall", "continue", and "jackpot", and corresponds to a selection decision effect. Fig. 79(I) to Fig. 79(J) notify that "jackpot" has been selected from the three types of images, "fall", "continue", and "jackpot", and also correspond to a selection decision effect.

In FIG. 79(A), the left pattern LS, the right pattern RS, and the first middle pattern CS1 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The left pattern LS and the right pattern RS are images that indicate "fall" and are displayed temporarily stopped. The first middle pattern CS1 is an image that indicates "fall" and is displayed temporarily stopped between the left pattern LS and the right pattern RS. Next, as shown in FIG. 79(B) to FIG. 79(C), the second middle pattern CS2 that indicates "continue" moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a and is displayed stopped and overlapping the first middle pattern CS1. The second middle pattern CS2 displayed here is larger than the first middle pattern CS1, and the second middle pattern CS2 overlaps in front of the first middle pattern CS1, making the first middle pattern CS1 difficult to see.

Next, as shown in Figures 79(D) to 79(E), the third middle pattern CS3, which represents a "jackpot", moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a and overlaps with the second middle pattern CS2. The third middle pattern CS3 displayed here is larger than the second middle pattern CS2, and the third middle pattern CS3 overlaps in front of the second middle pattern CS2, making the second middle pattern CS2 difficult to see. After that, the first middle pattern CS1, which is larger than the third middle pattern CS3, moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a and covers the third middle pattern CS3. Next, the second middle pattern CS2 moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a and covers the first middle pattern CS1. In this way, the first to third middle symbols are repeatedly displayed covering the middle symbol that is currently temporarily stopped, and the speed of the display speed increases, resulting in a high-speed display CS in which the replacement of the middle symbols is difficult to see, as shown in FIG. 79(F). In the display in FIG. 79(A) to FIG. 79(F), three types of images, "Fall", "Continue", and "Big Hit", are displayed one by one in sequence, and the player is notified that a selection display in which one image is selected from these will begin. In other words, these displays correspond to selection display start displays.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79(G), the high-speed performance display CS disappears, and the button image BTN, timer bar TBI, and operation prompting image RND are displayed on the display screen 7a. The button image BTN is an image that shows the appearance of the performance button 63. The timer bar TBI shows the effective operation period of the performance button 63. The operation prompting image RND is an image that includes the word "press" and an arrow pointing downward, and is an image that encourages the player to operate the performance button 63. When the player operates the performance button 63, a selection decision performance is executed in which one image is selected from three types of images: "fall," "continue," and "jackpot." Here, the selection decision notifies the player of the selected image by displaying only the selected image at a stopped position.

In FIG. 79(H), the first middle pattern CS1 representing "fall" stops, notifying that "fall" has been selected from the three types of images "fall", "continue", and "jackpot". In FIG. 79(J), the third middle pattern CS3 representing "jackpot" stops, notifying that "jackpot" has been selected from the three types of images "fall", "continue", and "jackpot". As shown in FIG. 79(H), the first middle pattern CS1 representing "fall" is displayed (stopped) at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Meanwhile, as shown in FIG. 79(J), the third middle pattern CS3 representing "jackpot" is displayed (stopped) on the right sub-display device 10R in the advanced position (deployed position). Specifically, when the third middle pattern CS3, which represents a "jackpot", stops, as shown in FIG. 79(I), while the third middle pattern CS3 is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the right sub-display device 10R moves upward from the retreat position (home position) and rotates left at the relay position (relay position) to move to the advance position (deployed position) and come to rest (stop) there. The advance position (deployed position) is a position that covers the above-mentioned specified position of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79(J), the third middle symbol CS3 is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R in the advance position (deployment position). Around the third middle symbol CS3, an effect image EF, which is a light-emitting image, is displayed. The effect image EF is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub-display device 10. This effect image EF notifies that the "big win" of the third middle symbol CS3 has been confirmed. Note that in FIG. 79(I), the third middle symbol CS3 may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In this way, by changing the display device depending on the type of image finally selected during the variable performance of the high probability state (high base state), a special feeling can be created when a specific image is selected, and interest can be improved. Here, when the third middle symbol CS3 representing the "big win" is selected, it is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R, so that a special feeling can be given to the player. The first middle symbol CS1 and the third middle symbol CS3 are displayed at approximately the same position relative to the main display device 7.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the selection effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 76 to 79, a selection effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images with different contents can be executed using the sub display device 10 and the main display device 7. In the selection effect of Figure 76, when the third middle decorative symbol 8C3, which is one of the plurality of types of images, is selected, the selected third middle decorative symbol 8C3 is displayed on the sub display device 10, and when the second middle decorative symbol 8C2, which is one of the plurality of types of images, is selected, the selected second middle decorative symbol 8C2 is displayed on the main display device 7. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained and improves the interest. The same is true for Figures 77 (H) to (J), 78 (H) to (J), and 79 (H) to (J).
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 76 to 79, the sub-display device 10 is configured to be movable, and when the third middle decorative symbol 8C3 is selected in the selection performance of Figure 76, the sub-display device 10 moves from the first position to the second position, and the third middle decorative symbol 8C3 is displayed at the second position (Figure 76 (J)). With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be increased. The same is true for Figures 77 (J), 78 (J), and 79 (J).
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 76, when the second middle decorative symbol 8C2 is selected in the selection performance, the second middle decorative symbol 8C2 is displayed at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and when the third middle decorative symbol 8C3 is selected, the sub-display device 10 stops at an advanced position that covers a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the third middle decorative symbol 8C3 is displayed (Fig. 76(J)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be increased. The same is true for Fig. 77(J), Fig. 78(J), and Fig. 79(J).
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 76(A) to 76(F), 77(A) to 77(F), 78(A) to 78(F), and 79(A) to 79(F), the selection effect includes a selection start suggestion effect that suggests that a selection effect will start, and a selection decision effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images after the selection start suggestion effect, and in the selection start suggestion effect, each of the plurality of types of images is displayed one by one in sequence on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. This configuration provides visual entertainment to the player, and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 76(A) to 76(F), 77(A) to 77(F), 78(A) to 78(F), and 79(A) to 79(F), in the selection start suggestion performance, when a plurality of types of images are displayed one by one in sequence on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the first image is displayed, a second image larger than the first image is displayed in a position covering the first image. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is provided with a performance button 63 that can be operated by the player, and as shown in Figures 76(G) to 76(J), 77(G) to 77(J), 78(G) to 78(J), and 79(G) to 79(J), when the performance button 63 is operated after the selection start performance, a selection decision performance is executed. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 77 to 79, the multiple types of images are each associated with one of the multiple types of effects executed after the selection effect, and after the selection effect, the effect corresponding to the image selected in the selection effect is executed. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and increases the player's interest.

[Modification]
The following are variations on the selection presentation.
[Modification 1]
In the selection performance A in Fig. 76, the selection performance C in Fig. 78, and the selection performance D in Fig. 79, the right sub-display device 10R moves. However, the left sub-display device 10L may move.

[Modification 2]
In the selection performance B of Fig. 77, both the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R move upward among the sub-display devices 10. However, it is also possible to configure the display device such that only the right sub-display device 10R moves upward and the left sub-display device 10L does not move upward.

[Modification 3]
The contents of the selection effects A to D in Figures 76 to 79 may be appropriately combined. For example, in the selection effect C in Figure 78, a left pattern LS and a right pattern RS may be displayed on both sides of the first image SG1 and the second image SG2, as in the selection effect D in Figure 79.

[Modification 5]
Each of the selection effects A to D in Fig. 76 to Fig. 79 may not include some of the effects described above, or other effects may be added. For example, in the selection effect D in Fig. 79, when the second middle symbol CS2 is selected, the second middle symbol CS2 may be displayed on the right sub-display device 10R at the advance position, or on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Also, there may be cases where the second middle symbol CS2 is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R at the advance position, and cases where it is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, randomly.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect A5-1]
A first display means capable of displaying an image;
A gaming machine including a second display means capable of displaying an image,
A selection effect is executed in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images having different contents by using the first display means and the second display means,
In the selection performance,
when a first image that is one of the plurality of types of images is selected, the selected first image is displayed on the first display means;
when a second image which is one of the plurality of types of images is selected, the selected second image is displayed on the second display means;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-1,
The first display means is configured to be movable,
In the selection performance,
When the first image is selected, the first display means moves from a first position to a second position, and the first image is displayed at the second position.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-2,
In the selection performance,
When the second image is selected, the second image is displayed at a predetermined position on the second display means;
When the first image is selected, the first display means stops at a second position covering the predetermined position of the second display means, and the first image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A5-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A5-1 to A5-3,
The selection performance is
A selection start suggestion effect that suggests that the selection effect will start;
A selection determination effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images after the selection start suggestion effect,
In the selection start suggestion performance, the plurality of types of images are displayed one by one in sequence on the second display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-4,
In the selection start suggestion performance,
when the plurality of types of images are displayed one by one in sequence on the second display means, after a first image is displayed, a second image larger than the first image is displayed in a position covering the first image;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A5-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-4 or A5-5 further comprises:
The game machine is provided with an operating means operable by a player,
After the selection start effect, when the operation means is operated, the selection determination effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A5-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A5-1 to A5-6,
The plurality of types of images are each associated with one of a plurality of types of effects to be executed after the selection effect,
After the selection effect, a performance corresponding to the image selected in the selection effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The multiple image pseudo consecutive effects A to D are explained below using Figures 80 to 83. These multiple image pseudo consecutive effects can be executed during the decorative pattern variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a character display effect, it reads corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays images on the display screen 7a, left sub-display device 10L, right sub-display device 10R, illumination panel 18, etc. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is located closer to the player than the display screen 7a and the sub-display device 10.

[Multiple image pseudo consecutive performance A]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the multiple image pseudo consecutive performance A. In the multiple image pseudo consecutive performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 80 (A), a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(B), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped to suggest a pseudo consecutive effect. In this case, decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at the "7" symbol, decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at the "8" symbol, and decorative symbol 8C is fluctuating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(C), a pseudo consecutive performance is performed. In this pseudo consecutive performance, a pseudo consecutive image ZC1 is displayed across the display screen 7a, the left sub-display device 10L, and the right sub-display device 10R. This pseudo consecutive image ZC1 shows the word "NEXT," and is an image that suggests a pseudo consecutive performance. Also, in the pseudo consecutive performance, a character CRA is displayed across the right sub-display device 10R and the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(D), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed temporarily stopped at the same symbol (symbol 7), and a reach display is performed to indicate a reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C changes. In the reach effect, a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by the character CRA.

[Multiple image pseudo consecutive performance B]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the multiple image pseudo consecutive performance B. In the multiple image pseudo consecutive performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 81 (A), a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(B), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped to suggest a pseudo consecutive effect. In this case, decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at the "7" symbol, decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at the "8" symbol, and decorative symbol 8C is fluctuating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(C), a pseudo consecutive performance is performed. In this pseudo consecutive performance, a pseudo consecutive image ZC1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, a pseudo consecutive image ZC2 is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L, and a pseudo consecutive image ZC3 is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R. This pseudo consecutive image ZC1 shows the word "NEXT", and is an image suggesting a pseudo consecutive performance. Furthermore, the pseudo consecutive images ZC2 and ZC3 also show the word "NEXT", and are also images suggesting a pseudo consecutive performance. Furthermore, in the pseudo consecutive performance, the character CRA is displayed across the right sub-display device 10R and the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(D), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed temporarily stopped at the same symbol (symbol 7), and a reach display is performed to indicate a reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C changes. In the reach effect, a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by the character CRA.

[Multiple image pseudo consecutive performance C]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the multiple image pseudo consecutive performance C. In the multiple image pseudo consecutive performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 82 (A), a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(B), a decorative pattern temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern temporary stop effect, decorative patterns 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped to suggest a pseudo consecutive effect. In this case, decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the "7" symbol, decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the "8" symbol, and decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(C), a pseudo consecutive performance is performed. In this pseudo consecutive performance, a pseudo consecutive image ZC1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, a pseudo consecutive image ZC2 is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L, a pseudo consecutive image ZC3 is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R, and a pseudo consecutive image ZC4 is displayed on the illumination panel 18. This pseudo consecutive image ZC1 shows the word "NEXT" and is an image suggesting a pseudo consecutive performance. In addition, the pseudo consecutive images ZC2 and ZC3 also show the word "NEXT" and are images suggesting a pseudo consecutive performance. Furthermore, the pseudo consecutive image ZC4 is an image of a star pattern, and is displayed in an area (part) of the illumination panel 18 other than the area (part) corresponding to the pseudo consecutive image ZC1 displayed on the display screen 7a, the pseudo consecutive image ZC2 displayed on the left sub-display device 10L, and the pseudo consecutive image ZC3 displayed on the right sub-display device 10R. In this case, the areas of the illumination panel 18 that correspond to the pseudo consecutive images ZC1, ZC2, and ZC3 are transparent areas. Also, in the pseudo consecutive performance, the character CRA is displayed across the right sub-display device 10R and the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(D), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed temporarily stopped at the same symbol (symbol 7), and a reach display is performed to indicate a reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C changes. In the reach effect, a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by the character CRA.

[Multiple image pseudo consecutive performance D]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the multiple image pseudo consecutive performance D. In the multiple image pseudo consecutive performance D, first, as shown in FIG. 83 (A), a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(B), a decorative pattern temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern temporary stop effect, decorative patterns 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped to suggest a pseudo consecutive effect. In this case, decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the "7" symbol, decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the "8" symbol, and decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating.

Next, as shown in Figure 83 (C), a pseudo consecutive performance is performed. In this pseudo consecutive performance, a pseudo consecutive image ZC1 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a (near the deployed position of the left sub-display device 10L), a pseudo consecutive image ZC2 is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L, a pseudo consecutive image ZC3 is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R, and a pseudo consecutive image ZC4 is displayed on the illumination panel 18. This pseudo consecutive image ZC1 shows the word "NEXT" and is an image suggesting a pseudo consecutive performance. Furthermore, the pseudo consecutive images ZC2 and ZC3 also show the word "NEXT" and are images suggesting a pseudo consecutive performance. Furthermore, the pseudo consecutive image ZC4 is an image with a star pattern, and is displayed in an area of the illumination panel 18 other than the area (portion) corresponding to the pseudo consecutive image ZC1 displayed on the display screen 7a, the pseudo consecutive image ZC2 displayed on the left sub-display device 10L, and the pseudo consecutive image ZC3 displayed on the right sub-display device 10R. In this case, the areas of the illumination panel 18 corresponding to the pseudo consecutive images ZC1, ZC2, and ZC3 are transparent areas. Also, in the pseudo consecutive performance, the character CRA is displayed across the right sub-display device 10R and the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (D), a button display effect is performed. In this button display effect, a button image ZC5 is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to overlap with the pseudo consecutive image ZC1. This button image ZC5 is an image representing the effect button 63, and is an image for encouraging the player to press the effect button 63. Also, in this button display effect, the area of the illumination panel 18 corresponding to the button image ZC5 on the display screen 7a is a transparent area. In other words, the pseudo consecutive image ZC4 is displayed in an area of the illumination panel 18 other than the areas corresponding to the pseudo consecutive images ZC1, ZC2, ZC3, and ZC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(E), a sub display device movement presentation is performed. In this sub display device movement presentation, when the presentation button 63 is pressed (button push) by the player who has seen the button image ZC5, the left sub display device 10L rotates from the home position to the deployed position, and a part of the pseudo consecutive image ZC1 is displayed on the left sub display device 10L. That is, the pseudo consecutive image ZC1 is displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub display device 10L. In this case, the pseudo consecutive image ZC2 displayed on the left sub display device 10L is erased. Also, in the illumination panel 18, the area corresponding to the left sub display device 10L is a transparent area. In other words, in the illumination panel 18, the pseudo consecutive image ZC4 is displayed in an area other than the areas corresponding to the pseudo consecutive images ZC1, ZC2, ZC3, and the left sub display device 10L. That is, in this sub-display device movement presentation, the button image ZC5 is displayed on the pseudo consecutive image ZC2, and when the presentation button 63 is pressed, the left sub-display device 10L moves and the pseudo consecutive image ZC1 is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L, thereby performing a pseudo consecutive presentation or a presentation suggesting that the pseudo consecutive presentation will continue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(F), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed temporarily stopped at the same symbol (symbol 7), and a reach display is performed to indicate a reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C changes. In the reach effect, a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by the character CRA.

The above multiple image pseudo consecutive effects are performed with the same variation. However, they may be performed with different variations.

[Modification]
In the above-mentioned multiple image pseudo-consecutive performance, the pseudo-consecutive images ZC1, ZC2, ZC3, and ZC4 are images that make up the pseudo-consecutive performance, but they may also include a suggestion that the pseudo-consecutive performance will continue or that a pseudo-consecutive performance will be performed.

[Example of effect]
An example of the effect of the multiple image pseudo consecutive presentation is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the multiple image pseudo consecutive performance, the pseudo consecutive performance is performed using the display screen 7a and the sub-display device 10. According to this configuration, a dynamic pseudo consecutive performance can be performed using two display devices, which can increase the interest of the game.
In the above-mentioned multiple image pseudo-consecutive image D, when the left sub-display device 10L moves to the deployed position in the sub-display device movement performance, a pseudo-consecutive image ZC1 is displayed, but a pseudo-consecutive image other than the pseudo-consecutive image ZC1 (for example, a pseudo-consecutive image ZC2 or a new pseudo-consecutive image) may also be displayed.
In the above-mentioned multiple image pseudo-consecutive performance D, in the button display performance, the button image ZC5 is displayed on the display screen 7a, but it may also be displayed at a predetermined position on the sub-display device 10 or the illumination panel 18 (for example, on the pseudo-consecutive image).

[Effect 2]
In the multiple image pseudo consecutive performance, a pseudo consecutive image ZC1 capable of constituting a pseudo consecutive performance is displayed on the display screen 7a, and pseudo consecutive images ZC2, ZC3, and ZC4 capable of constituting a pseudo consecutive performance are displayed on the sub-display device 10 or the illumination panel 18. With this configuration, a pseudo consecutive image can be displayed on each of two or more display devices to create a dynamic pseudo consecutive performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the above-mentioned pseudo consecutive image performance, the sub display device 10 or the illumination panel 18 on which the pseudo consecutive images ZC2, ZC3, and ZC4 that can constitute the pseudo consecutive performance are displayed is disposed in front of the display screen 7a on which the pseudo consecutive image ZC1 that can constitute the pseudo consecutive performance is displayed. With this configuration, the two pseudo consecutive images can be displayed three-dimensionally, and a three-dimensional and dynamic pseudo consecutive performance can be performed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
The multiple image pseudo consecutive effects are performed in the same movement. According to this configuration, the effect of displaying two pseudo consecutive images can be a continuous display effect, so that a three-dimensional and dynamic pseudo consecutive effect can be created, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the multiple image pseudo consecutive performance, when the pseudo consecutive image ZC1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, a transparent area is provided in an area of the illumination panel 18 different from the area where the pseudo consecutive image ZC4 is displayed, and the pseudo consecutive image ZC1 is configured to be visible through the transparent area of the illumination panel 18. With this configuration, the pseudo consecutive image ZC1 can be seen through the transparent area of the illumination panel 18, creating an exciting feeling of the pseudo consecutive performance. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect ZC-1]
A gaming machine including a first display means and a second display means different from the first display means,
The first display means and the second display means are each capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects;
A predetermined effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
As the predetermined effect, a pseudo consecutive effect is performed using the first display means and the second display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZC-2]
A gaming machine according to the invention,
The predetermined display performance includes a first pseudo consecutive image that can constitute the pseudo consecutive performance being displayed on the first display means, and a second pseudo consecutive image that can constitute the pseudo consecutive performance being displayed on the second display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZC-3]
A gaming machine according to the ZC-2 specification,
The second display means is disposed in front of the first display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZC-4]
A gaming machine according to the ZC-3,
The predetermined display performance is performed in the same variation.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZC-5]
A gaming machine according to the ZC-4 specification,
In the predetermined display performance, when the first pseudo-series image is displayed on the first display means, the second display means is provided with a transparent area that transmits light to an area different from an area where the second pseudo-series image is displayed, and the first pseudo-series image is visible through the transparent area of the second display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the above embodiment, the following may be done.
An operation unit image (button image) is displayed on the first pseudo-consecutive image, and by pushing the button, a performance suggesting continuation of the pseudo-consecutive or a pseudo-consecutive performance is performed.
By pushing the button, the third display means moves in front of the first pseudo-repeated image on the first display means, and the first pseudo-repeated image is displayed on the third display means.
When the third display means moves, the second pseudo-series image disappears.

Image display effects A to D are explained below using Figures 84 to 87. These image display effects can be executed during the decorative pattern variation effect, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute an image display effect, it reads corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays an image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the sub-display device 10. In the image display effect, the effect control microcomputer 91 drives the sub-display device 10 via the lamp control board 107.

[Image display effect A]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining image display performance A.
First, as shown in FIG. 84(A), the change start performance is executed. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retreat position (home position). On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, a reserved image 9A is displayed. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth memory areas of the first special pattern reserved memory area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third memory areas are displayed. On the other hand, on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the reserved image 9C is displayed. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current change.

Next, as shown in Fig. 84(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in Fig. 84(C), a continuation preview performance is executed. In the continuation preview performance, a performance preview image PNG1 saying "Continue" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In the performance preview image PNG1, the word "Continue" is arranged horizontally. The performance suggested by "Continue" is a pseudo consecutive performance. "NEXT" may be used instead of "Continue".

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (D), a linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L moves linearly from the evacuation position to the relay position, as shown by the arrow YG1. At this time, the reserved image 9A that was displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(E), a rotational movement effect is executed. This rotational movement effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L rotates and moves from the relay position to the advance position, as shown by the arrow YG2. Here too, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (F), an image display effect is executed. This image display effect is an effect in which a performance preview image PNG2, similar to the performance preview image PNG1 in the continuation preview effect, is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L that has moved to the advance position. In the performance preview image PNG2, the word "Continue" is arranged vertically. The hold image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in Figure 84 (G), a re-change performance is executed. This re-change performance is a performance in which the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed again for a pseudo consecutive win. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are shown changing and being displayed. Here, the left sub-display device 10L returns to the retreat position (home position). A reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Meanwhile, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current change.

[Image display effect B]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining image display effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 85(A), the change start performance is executed. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retreat position (home position). On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, a reserved image 9A is displayed. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth memory areas of the first special pattern reserved memory area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third memory areas are displayed. On the other hand, on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the reserved image 9C is displayed. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current change.

Next, as shown in Fig. 85(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in Fig. 85(C), a continuation preview performance is executed. In the continuation preview performance, a performance preview image PNG1 saying "Continue" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In the performance preview image PNG1, the word "Continue" is arranged horizontally. The performance suggested by "Continue" is a pseudo consecutive performance. "NEXT" may be used instead of "Continue".

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (D), a linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L moves linearly from the evacuation position to the relay position, as indicated by the arrow YG1. At this time, the reserved image 9A that was displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In addition, the image of the part of the image on the display device 7a that is covered by the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(E), a rotational movement effect is executed. This rotational movement effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L rotates and moves from the relay position to the advance position, as shown by the arrow YG2. Here too, the pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Furthermore, the image of the part of the image on the display device 7a that is covered by the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in Figure 85 (F), an image display effect is executed. This image display effect is an effect in which a performance preview image PNG2, similar to the performance preview image PNG1 in the continuation preview effect, is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L that has moved to the advance position. In the performance preview image PNG2, the word "Continue" is arranged vertically. The hold image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in Figure 85 (G), a re-change performance is executed. This re-change performance is a performance in which the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed again for a pseudo consecutive win. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are shown changing and being displayed. Here, the left sub-display device 10L returns to the retreat position (home position). A reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Meanwhile, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current change.

[Image display effect C]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining image display performance C.
First, as shown in FIG. 86(A), the change start performance is executed. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retreat position (home position). On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, a reserved image 9A is displayed. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth memory areas of the first special pattern reserved memory area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third memory areas are displayed. On the other hand, on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the reserved image 9C is displayed. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current change.

Next, as shown in Fig. 86(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in Fig. 86(C), a chance effect is executed. In the chance effect, a message image MG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, the message image MG1 is "Super Hot", and the characters "Super Hot" are arranged horizontally.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (D), a linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L moves linearly from the evacuation position to the relay position, as indicated by the arrow YG1. At this time, the reserved image 9A that was displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In addition, the image of the part of the image on the display device 7a that is covered by the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (E), a rotational movement effect is executed. This rotational movement effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L rotates and moves from the relay position to the advance position, as shown by the arrow YG2. Here too, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Furthermore, the image of the part of the image on the display device 7a that is covered by the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (F), an image display effect is executed. This image display effect is an effect in which a message image MG2 similar to the message image MG1 in the chance effect is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L that has moved to the advance position. In the message image MG2, the words "Super Hot" are arranged vertically. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (G), a battle performance is executed. In this battle performance, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. If the ally character CRA wins, a big win occurs. Note that the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L displays a reserved image 9A, and the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R displays the reserved image 9C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (H), a confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. This confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped on the display screen 7a. Here, an example is shown in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "5". Note that the display of the reserved image 9C on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R disappears when the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped.

[Image display performance D]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining image display performance D.
First, as shown in FIG. 87(A), the change start performance is executed. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retreat position (home position). On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, a reserved image 9A is displayed. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth memory areas of the first special pattern reserved memory area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third memory areas are displayed. On the other hand, on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the reserved image 9C is displayed. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current change.

Next, as shown in Fig. 87(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in Fig. 87(C), a chance effect is executed. In the chance effect, a message image MG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, the message image MG is "Super Hot", and the characters "Super Hot" are arranged horizontally.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(D), a battle performance is executed. This battle performance is a performance in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins, a big win occurs.

Next, as shown in Figure 87 (E), a confirmed stop effect (miss) is executed. This confirmed stop effect (miss) is an effect in which the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped on the display screen 7a. Here, an example is shown in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both "5", and the center effect pattern 8C is "4". Note that the display of the reserved image 9C on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R disappears with the confirmed stop of the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

In FIG. 86, a message image MG2 similar to the message image MG1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. On the other hand, in FIG. 87, the message image MG is displayed only on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and is not displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, image display effect C shown in FIG. 86 has a higher expectation of a jackpot than image display effect D shown in FIG. 87.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of image display.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the performance preview image PNG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a performance preview image PNG2 similar to the performance preview image PNG1 is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L (FIGS. 84(C)(F), 85(C)(F)). Also, after the message image MG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a message image MG2 similar to the message image MG1 is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L (FIGS. 86(C)(F)). With this configuration, the performance preview image and the message image can be made to stand out, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left sub-display device 10L is moved (FIGS. 84(D)(E), 85(D)(E), 86(D)(E)), and a performance preview image PNG2 and a message image MG2 are displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. According to this configuration, since the left sub-display device 10L is moved, the performance preview image and the message image can be made to stand out, and the excitement of the game can be increased.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left sub-display device 10L moves from the retreated position to the advanced position so as to cover the performance preview image PNG1 and the message image MG1 displayed on the display screen 7a. With this configuration, the performance preview image and the message image can be made to stand out, thereby improving the entertainment value of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the effect preview image PNG2 and the message image MG2 are displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the left sub-display device 10L is returned to the retreat position. With this configuration, the effect preview image and the message image can be made to stand out, and the entertainment value of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, while the left sub-display 10L is moving, the image of the part of the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 that is covered by the left sub-display 10L can be displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display 10L (FIGS. 85(D)(E), 86(D)(E)). According to this configuration, the display on the display screen 7a is not obstructed by the movement of the left sub-display 10L, which can improve the entertainment value of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when a message image MG2 similar to the message image MG1 displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L (FIG. 86), the expectation of a big win is higher than when the message image MG is displayed only on the display screen 7a (FIG. 87). With this configuration, the expectation of the display on the left sub-display device 10L is higher, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect preview images PNG1 and PNG2 that preview the effects to be executed later are displayed. According to this configuration, the effects to be executed later can be impressed, and the interest of the game can be increased.

[Modification]
The following are modified examples of image display presentation.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the left sub-display device 10L is used for the presentation. However, a presentation preview image or a message image may be displayed using the right sub-display device 10R in addition to or instead of the left sub-display device 10L.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the message image "Super Hot" was used as an example, but the message image is not limited to this. For example, various images are applicable, such as the number of acquired game balls, instructions during the game such as "Hit to the right", "Congratulations" when a jackpot is won, and a title display indicating the type of jackpot.

[Modification 3]
In the above, when the left sub-display device 10L is moved, the reserved image 9A that was displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In contrast to this, when the left sub-display device 10L is moved, the reserved image 9A may be displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A7-1]
A first display device capable of displaying an image and performing a performance;
A gaming machine including a second display device different from the first display device,
A gaming machine comprising a performance control means capable of displaying a predetermined image on the display screen of the first display device, and then displaying an image similar to the predetermined image on the display screen of the second display device.

[Aspect A7-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A7-1,
The performance control means displays the predetermined image on the display screen of the first display device, and then moves the second display device to display an image similar to the predetermined image on the display screen of the second display device.

[Aspect A7-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-2,
The performance control means moves the second display device from an origin position so as to cover the predetermined image.

[Aspect A7-4]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A7-3,
The performance control means displays an image similar to the predetermined image on the display screen of the second display device, and then returns the second display device to the origin position.

[Aspect A7-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A7-2 to A7-4,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the presentation control means is capable of displaying, on the display screen of the second display device, an image of a portion of the display screen of the first display device that is covered by the second display device while the second display device is moving.

[Aspect A7-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A7-1 to A7-5,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the presentation control means displays a predetermined image on the display screen of the first display device and then displays an image similar to the predetermined image on the display screen of the second display device, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when the predetermined image is displayed only on the display screen of the first display device.

[Aspect A7-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A7-1 to A7-6,
The predetermined image is a preview image that predicts a performance to be executed later.

[Aspect A7-8]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A7-1 to A7-7,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the presentation control means is capable of displaying a pending image corresponding to a pending memory on the display screen of the second display device, and when the pending image is not displayed on the second display device, displays information related to the pending image on the first display device.

The sub-display effects A to D are explained below with reference to Figures 88 to 91. These sub-display effects can be executed during the decorative pattern variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command to execute a sub-display effect is included, it reads corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays an image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the sub-display device 10. In addition, in the sub-display effect, the effect control microcomputer 91 drives the sub-display device 10 via the lamp control board 107.

[Sub-display effect A]
Figure 88 is a diagram for explaining sub-display effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 88(A), the change start performance is executed. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retreat position (home position). On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, a reserved image 9A is displayed. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth memory areas of the first special pattern reserved memory area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third memory areas are displayed. On the other hand, on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the reserved image 9C is displayed. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current change.

Next, as shown in Fig. 88(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in Fig. 88(C), a reach development effect is executed. In the reach development effect, a message image MSG "Development" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (D), a linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L moves linearly from the evacuation position to the relay position, as shown by the arrow YG1. At this time, the image of the part of the image on the display device 7a that is covered by the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(E), a rotational movement effect is executed. This rotational movement effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L rotates and moves from the relay position to the advance position, as shown by the arrow YG2. Here too, the image of the part of the image on the display device 7a that is covered by the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in Fig. 88 (F), a message addition effect is executed. This message addition effect is an effect in which a message image is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L that has moved to the advancement position. Here, a message image saying "It's hot" is displayed. The message image saying "It's hot" is displayed superimposed on the battle image.
88(D), (E), and (F), a battle presentation is executed in parallel with the presentation described above. The battle presentation is a presentation in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins in the battle presentation, the expectation of a big win increases.

Next, as shown in Figure 88 (G), a middle symbol change effect is executed. This middle symbol change effect is an effect in which the middle symbol 8C, which is one of the symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display device 7a, is displayed in a changing manner on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L shows the middle symbol 8C, "3," changing downward as indicated by the arrow YG3.

Next, as shown in Figure 88 (H), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. This middle symbol stop effect is an effect in which middle symbol 8C, which is one of the symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on display device 7a, is displayed stopped on the display screen of left sub-display device 10L. Here, the middle symbol 8C, "5", is shown stopped on the display screen of left sub-display device 10L.

[Sub display effect B]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining sub-display effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 89(A), the change start performance is executed. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retreat position (home position). On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, a reserved image 9A is displayed. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth memory areas of the first special pattern reserved memory area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third memory areas are displayed. On the other hand, on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the reserved image 9C is displayed. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current change.

Next, as shown in Fig. 89(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in Fig. 89(C), a reach development effect is executed. In the reach development effect, a message image MSG saying "Development" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (D), a battle presentation is executed. In this battle presentation, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins, the expectation of a big win increases. In this battle presentation, the image of the part of the image displayed on the display screen 7a that is covered by the sub-display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10. Here, the feet of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (E), a message addition effect is executed. This message addition effect is an effect in which a message image is displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10. Here, a message image of "Intense" is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, and a message image of "Hot" is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in Figure 89 (F), a middle symbol change effect is executed. This middle symbol change effect is an effect in which the middle symbol 8C, which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display device 7a, is displayed variably on the display screen of the sub-display device 10. Here, the left portion of the middle symbol 8C, "3", is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, and the right portion of the middle symbol 8C, "3", is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, moving downward as indicated by the arrow YG1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (G), a confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. This confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is an effect in which the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped in a jackpot arrangement on the display device 7a. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R all stop at "5." The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Furthermore, with the confirmed stop of the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the display of the reserved image 9C disappears.

[Sub-display effect C]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining sub-display effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 90(A), the change start performance is executed. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retreat position (home position). On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, a reserved image 9A is displayed. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth memory areas of the first special pattern reserved memory area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third memory areas are displayed. On the other hand, on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the reserved image 9C is displayed. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current change.

Next, as shown in Fig. 90(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in Fig. 90(C), a linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L moves linearly from the retreat position to the relay position as shown by the arrow YG1. At this time, the image of the part of the image of the display device 7a that is covered by the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(D), a rotational movement effect is executed. This rotational movement effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L rotates and moves from the relay position to the advance position, as shown by the arrow YG2. Note that the image of the part of the image of the display device 7a that is covered by the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in Figure 90 (E), a special symbol stop effect is executed. This special symbol stop effect is an effect in which a middle symbol 8C is stopped and displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L that has moved to the advance position, and this middle symbol 8C is a special symbol. Here, the middle symbol 8C called "Development" is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (F), a battle presentation is executed. This battle presentation is one in which friendly character CRA and enemy character CRB fight. If friendly character CRA wins, the expectation of a big win increases. Note that in this battle presentation, the image of the part of the image displayed on display screen 7a that is covered by sub-display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of sub-display device 10. Here, the feet of friendly character CRA and enemy character CRB are displayed on the display screen of sub-display device 10.

Next, as shown in Figure 90 (G), a message addition effect is executed. This message addition effect is an effect in which a message image is displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10. Here, a message image of "Intense" is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, and a message image of "Hot" is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The message image is displayed superimposed on the image of the battle effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (H), a confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. This confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is an effect in which the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped in a jackpot arrangement on the display device 7a. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R all stop at "5." The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Also, with the confirmed stop of the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the display of the reserved image 9C disappears.

[Sub-display effect D]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining sub-display effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 91(A), the change start performance is executed. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retreat position (home position). On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, a reserved image 9A is displayed. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth memory areas of the first special pattern reserved memory area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third memory areas are displayed. On the other hand, on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the reserved image 9C is displayed. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current change.

Next, as shown in Fig. 91 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in Fig. 91 (C), a reach development effect is executed. In the reach development effect, a message image MSG saying "Development" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (D), a linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L moves linearly from the evacuation position to the relay position, as indicated by the arrow YG1. At this time, the reserved image 9A that was displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In addition, the image of the part of the image on the display device 7a that is covered by the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (E), a rotational movement effect is executed. This rotational movement effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L rotates and moves from the relay position to the advance position, as shown by the arrow YG2. Here too, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Furthermore, the image of the part of the image on the display device 7a that is covered by the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in Fig. 91 (F), a message addition effect is executed. This message addition effect is an effect in which a message image is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L that has moved to the advancement position. Here, a message image saying "It's hot" is displayed. The message image "It's hot" is displayed superimposed on the battle image.
In addition, in Fig. 91 (D), (E), and (F), a battle performance is executed in parallel with the performance described above. The battle performance is a performance in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins in the battle performance, the expectation of a big win increases. In addition, during the battle performance, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 91 (G), a middle symbol change effect is executed. This middle symbol change effect is an effect in which the middle symbol 8C, which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display device 7a, is displayed changingly on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L shows the middle symbol 8C, "3," changing downward as indicated by the arrow YG3. The pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (H), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. This middle symbol stop effect is an effect in which the middle symbol 8C, which is one of the symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display device 7a, is displayed stopped on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, the middle symbol 8C, "5," is shown stopped on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the sub-display effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display screen of the sub-display device 10 is used to display a part of the image displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 (Fig. 88(D)(E)(F), Fig. 89(D)(E), Fig. 90(C)(D)(F)(G), Fig. 91(D)(E)(F)). In addition, the display screen of the sub-display device 10 is used to display the reserved image 9A (Fig. 88(A)(B)(C), Fig. 89(A)(B)(C)(G), Fig. 90(A)(B)(H), Fig. 91(A)(B)(C)). Furthermore, the display screen of the sub-display device 10 is used to display the medium performance pattern 8C (Fig. 88(G)(H), Fig. 89(F), Fig. 90(E), Fig. 91(G)(H)). According to this configuration, the various performances on the sub-display device 10 can be used to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the image of the part of the image displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 that is covered by the sub-display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10 (FIG. 88(F), FIG. 89(D)(E), FIG. 90(F)(G), FIG. 91(F)). With this configuration, the presentation on the display screen 7a can be further enhanced, and the entertainment value of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, while the left sub-display device 10L is being moved, the part of the image displayed on the display screen 7a that is covered by the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L (FIGS. 88(D)(E), 90(C)(D), 91(D)(E)). With this configuration, the presentation on the display screen 7a can be further enhanced, and the entertainment value of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a message image can be displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10 together with a part of the image on the display screen 7a (FIGS. 88(F), 89(E), 90(G), and 91(F)). This configuration can further enhance the presentation on the display screen 7a, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is used to display the stop of the center performance symbol 8C (FIG. 88(H), FIG. 90(E), FIG. 91(H)). With this configuration, it is possible to create anticipation for the stop performance of the center performance symbol 8C, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display screen of the sub-display device 10 is used to display the variation of the middle performance symbol 8C (Fig. 88(G), Fig. 89(F), Fig. 91(G)). With this configuration, it is possible to create anticipation for the subsequent stopping performance of the middle performance symbol 8C, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the sub-display presentation are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, in one change, the display screen of the sub-display device 10 is used to display a part of the image displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, to display the reserved image 9A, and to display the middle performance pattern 8C. On the other hand, it is not necessary to perform all of these during one change.
[Modification 2]
In the above, the message image such as "It's hot" or "It's super hot" is displayed superimposed on the battle image in the message addition effect. However, instead of the battle image, only the message image may be displayed.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A8-1]
A first display device capable of displaying an image and performing a performance;
A gaming machine including a second display device different from the first display device,
A gaming machine comprising an effect control means capable of performing a first effect using the display screen of the second display device to display a portion of an image displayed on the display screen of the first display device and form said image together with the first display device, a second effect displaying a reserved image corresponding to a reserved memory, and a third effect displaying a predetermined row of performance symbols on the display screen of the first display device.

[Aspect A8-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A8-1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the presentation control means displays, in the first presentation, an image of a portion of the image displayed on the display screen of the first display device that is covered by the second display device on the display screen of the second display device.

[Aspect A8-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A8-2,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the presentation control means is capable of moving the second display device in the first presentation, and is capable of displaying the portion covered by the second display device while the second display device is moving on the display screen of the second display device.

[Aspect A8-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A8-1 to A8-3,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the presentation control means is capable of displaying a different image on the second display device in the first presentation, overlaying or replacing the image of the portion covered by the second display device.

[Aspect A8-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A8-1 to A8-4,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the presentation control means, in the third presentation, causes a predetermined row of presentation symbols to be displayed in a stopped state on the first display device.

[Aspect A8-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A8-1 to A8-5,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the presentation control means performs a variable display of a predetermined row of presentation symbols on the first display device in the third presentation.

[Aspect A8-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A8-1 to A8-6,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the presentation control means displays the reserved image corresponding to the reserved memory on a display screen of a display device other than the second display device in at least one of the first presentation and the third presentation.

The reserved array direction change performances A to D are explained below using Figures 92 to 95. This reserved array direction change performance can be executed during the decorative pattern change performance. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the reserved array direction change performance, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R). In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the change performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the reserved array direction change performance, it changes the position and inclination of the left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R.

[Reserved array direction change performance A]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the reserved arrangement direction change performance A. In the reserved arrangement direction change performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 92 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retreat position (home position). The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed variably on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The reserved icons 9A are displayed in a horizontal line on the left sub display device 10L. Here, a reserved arrangement direction change performance is executed in which the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the multiple reserved icons 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L changes. In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the display position of the multiple reserved icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L changes while the left sub display device 10L is stationary without changing its position or posture, thereby changing the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the multiple reserved icons 9A.

As shown in FIG. 92(A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four reserved icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line along the horizontal edge of the display screen. As shown in FIG. 92(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a reach is formed in which the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at "2". At this time, the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) moves from the retreat position toward the upper relay position (relay position) and stops at the relay position. During this upward movement of the sub-display device 10, the four reserved icons 9A remain displayed. In other words, by the upward movement of the sub-display device 10, the four reserved icons 9A move in a direction (vertical direction) perpendicular to (intersecting) the arrangement direction (horizontal direction) of the reserved icons 9A while maintaining their display.

As shown in FIG. 92(C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a pseudo-consecutive suggestion image represented as "Consecutive" that suggests the start of a pseudo-consecutive is displayed as a middle decorative pattern 8C. At this time, the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) stops at the relay position, and on the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L), the arrangement direction of the four reserved icons 9A changes from horizontal to vertical. This change may be such that the display of the four reserved icons 9A arranged horizontally disappears and four reserved icons 9A arranged vertically are newly displayed, or the arrangement direction may gradually change from horizontal to vertical while the display of the four reserved icons 9A is maintained. Here, the orientation of each reserved icon 9A also becomes horizontal. That is, each reserved icon 9A is displayed tilted by 90 degrees.

As shown in FIG. 92(D), the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 displays an image indicating that the second round of the pseudo-consecutive will start, which reads "Second round!!!". After that, as shown in FIG. 92(E), the third reach is formed. After that, as shown in FIG. 93(F), the battle performance is executed. At this time, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) stops at the relay position, and the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L) performs a performance in which the arrangement direction of the four reserved icons 9A changes continuously. In other words, a performance in which the angle of the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the four reserved icons 9A changes continuously is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92(C), of the four reserved icons 9A arranged vertically, the top fourth reserved icon is used as the axis of rotation, and the first to third reserved icons rotate left while maintaining the display. As a result, as shown in Figures 92(D) to 92(E), the icon approaches the horizontal edge of the left sub-display device 10L, and finally, as shown in Figure 92(F), the icon is aligned with the horizontal edge of the left sub-display device 10L. The inclination of each of the hold icons 9A also changes in accordance with the change in the arrangement direction. In other words, the orientation of each of the hold icons 9A changes so that the icon orientation matches the arrangement direction.

As shown in FIG. 92(G), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the battle scene, the player is defeated and the decorative symbols are displayed as stopped in a losing state. At this time, the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) moves downward from the relay position toward the evacuation position (home position) and stops at the evacuation position. While the sub-display device 10 moves downward, the four reserved icons 9A remain displayed. In other words, as the sub-display device 10 moves downward, the four reserved icons 9A move in a direction (vertical direction) perpendicular to (intersecting) the arrangement direction (horizontal direction) of the reserved icons 9A while maintaining their display.

As shown in FIG. 92(H), the following variable display is performed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. At this time, the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) is stationary in the retreat position, and the number of reserved balls becomes 3 on the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L) due to the reserved ball consumption, and three reserved balls are displayed. Here, a performance in which the arrangement direction of the three reserved balls 9A changes continuously is performed. During this performance, as shown in FIG. 92(I), when the variable display ends on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the decorative pattern is stopped, the reserved balls of the reserved balls of the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L) become 2 due to the reserved ball consumption. At this time, the reserved balls of the reserved balls 9A continue to change continuously in the arrangement direction. As shown in FIG. 92(J), when the number of hold icons 9A (hold number) on the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L) becomes 1, the display position of one hold icon 9A changes so that the arrangement direction changes when there are two or more holds. The inclination of the hold icon 9A also changes accordingly.

[Reserved array direction change performance B]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the reserved arrangement direction change performance B. In the reserved arrangement direction change performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 93 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retreat position (home position). The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed variably on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In addition, the reserved icons 9A are displayed in a horizontal line on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, a reserved arrangement direction change performance is executed in which the direction (arrangement direction) of the multiple reserved icons 9A displayed on the main display device 7 or the left sub display device 10L changes. In this embodiment, examples are given of a manner in which the direction (arrangement direction) of multiple hold icons 9A changes as the display positions of multiple hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 change, a manner in which the direction (arrangement direction) of multiple hold icons 9A changes as the display positions of multiple hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of a stationary left sub-display device 10L change, and a manner in which the direction (arrangement direction) of multiple hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L changes as the attitude of the left sub-display device 10L changes.

As shown in FIG. 93(A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line in the horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 93(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, an effect is performed in which the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A changes continuously. In other words, an effect is performed in which the angle of the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the four hold icons 9A changes continuously. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 93(A), of the four hold icons 9A arranged in the horizontal direction, the rightmost first hold is used as the rotation axis, and the second to fourth holds rotate to the right while maintaining the display. As a result, as shown in FIG. 93(B) to FIG. 93(C), the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A approaches vertical, and as shown in FIG. 93(C), the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A finally becomes vertical. The inclination of each hold icon 9A also changes according to the change in the arrangement direction. That is, the orientation of each of the hold icons 9A changes so that the orientation of the icon matches the arrangement direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(C) and FIG. 93(D), a movement performance of the four vertically aligned hold icons 9A is executed. Specifically, the four vertically aligned hold icons 9A move horizontally (to the right) while maintaining their display. In other words, the four hold icons 9A move in a direction (horizontal) perpendicular to (intersecting) the arrangement direction (vertical direction). Then, they stop at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 93(E), the four vertically aligned hold icons 9A tilt to the left while maintaining their display, and stop in that state. After that, as shown in FIG. 93(F), the four hold icons 9A move upward in a tilted state. In this case, the four diagonally aligned hold icons 9A move vertically (upward) while maintaining their display. In other words, the four hold icons 9A move in a direction (vertical) intersecting the arrangement direction (diagonal). Then, they stop at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In addition, the four hold icons 9A may not stop at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, but may simply frame out of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(G), the four hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and are then displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. The hold icons 9A are displayed in a horizontal line on the left sub-display device 10L. Next, as shown in FIG. 93(H), the left sub-display device 10L moves upward from the retreat position (home position) and rotates right at the relay position (relay position) to move to the advance position (deployed position) and stop (stop) there. At this time, since the four hold icons 9A are displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the right rotation of the left sub-display device 10L changes the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A. The tilt of each of the hold icons 9A also changes with the right rotation of the sub-display device 10L. That is, the orientation of each of the hold icons 9A changes so that the orientation of the icon matches the arrangement direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(I), when the left sub-display device 10L is stationary (stopped) in the advanced position (deployed position), an effect is performed in which the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A changes continuously. In other words, an effect is performed in which the angle of the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the four hold icons 9A changes continuously. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 93(I) and FIG. 93(J), the four hold icons 9A move from the top to the bottom of the left sub-display device 10L while oscillating so that the arrangement direction alternates between a state in which the arrangement direction is tilted diagonally to the right and a state in which the arrangement direction is tilted diagonally to the left.

[Reserved array direction change performance C]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the reserved arrangement direction change performance C. In the reserved arrangement direction change performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 94 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retreat position (home position). The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed variably on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The reserved icons 9A are displayed in a horizontal line on the left sub display device 10L. Here, a reserved arrangement direction change performance is executed in which the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the multiple reserved icons 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L changes. In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the multiple reserved icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L changes as the posture of the left sub display device 10L changes.

As shown in FIG. 94(A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line horizontally along the horizontal edge of the display screen. As shown in FIG. 94(B), the left sub-display device 10L moves from the retreat position toward the upper relay position. During this upward movement of the left sub-display device 10L, the four hold icons 9A remain displayed. In other words, by moving the left sub-display device 10L upward, the four hold icons 9A move in a direction (vertical direction) perpendicular to (intersecting) the arrangement direction (horizontal direction) of the hold icons 9A while remaining displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(C) to FIG. 94(D), the left sub-display device 10L rotates right at the relay position (relay position) to move to the advance position (deployed position) and stops there. At this time, four hold icons 9A are displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, so the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A changes due to the right rotation of the left sub-display device 10L. The inclination of each hold icon 9A also changes due to the right rotation of the sub-display device 10L. In other words, the orientation of each hold icon 9A changes so that the orientation of the icon matches the arrangement direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 94(E), the four hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L that is stationary (stopped) at the advance position (deployed position). At this time, another image may be displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L instead of the hold icons 9A.

After that, as shown in Figures 94(F) to 94(H), the left sub-display device 10L moves from the advanced position (deployed position) to the retreated position (home position) by rotating left and moving downward, and comes to a standstill (stops) at the retreated position. At this time, the four hold icons 9A are continuously displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, so the left rotation of the left sub-display device 10L changes the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A. In addition, the downward movement of the left sub-display device 10L moves the four hold icons 9A in a direction (vertical direction) perpendicular to (intersecting) the arrangement direction (horizontal direction) of the hold icons 9A while maintaining their display.

Next, as shown in Figures 94(I) to 94(J), the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line on the left sub-display device 10L. In this state, the left sub-display device 10L rotates to the right at the relay position, moving to the advanced position and stopping there. At this time, four hold icons 9A and four hold icons 9B are displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, so the right rotation of the left sub-display device 10L changes the arrangement direction of each of the hold icons 9A, 9B. The tilt of each of the hold icons 9A, 9B also changes as the sub-display device 10L rotates to the right. In other words, the orientation of each of the hold icons 9A, 9B changes so that the orientation of the icon matches the arrangement direction.

[Reserved array direction change performance D]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the reserved arrangement direction change performance D. In the reserved arrangement direction change performance D, first, as shown in FIG. 95 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retreat position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a reach is formed in which the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at "2". On the left sub display device 10L, reserved icons 9A are displayed in a straight line arranged horizontally (horizontally). Here, a reserved arrangement direction change performance is executed in which the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the multiple reserved icons 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L changes. In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the multiple reserved icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L changes as the posture of the left sub display device 10L changes. A specific image TG is also displayed on the left sub display device 10L. The specific image TG represents the appearance of a specific object. Here, the specific image TG is a smiling face image. Note that the specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes all manners in which the number of specific objects can be specified when there are multiple specific objects.

As shown in FIG. 95(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a pseudo-consecutive suggestion image represented as "Consecutive" is displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C, suggesting that a pseudo-consecutive will begin. At this time, the left sub-display device 10L moves from the retreat position toward the upper relay position. During this upward movement of the left sub-display device 10L, the four hold icons 9A remain displayed. In other words, as the left sub-display device 10L moves upward, the four hold icons 9A move in a direction (vertical direction) perpendicular to (intersecting with) the arrangement direction (horizontal direction) of the hold icons 9A while remaining displayed.

Next, as shown in Figures 95(C) to 95(D), the left sub-display device 10L rotates to the right at the relay position, moving to the advanced position and stopping there. At this time, four hold icons 9A are displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, and the right rotation of the left sub-display device 10L changes the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A. The right rotation of the sub-display device 10L also changes the inclination of each hold icon 9A. In other words, the orientation of each hold icon 9A changes so that the orientation of the icon matches the arrangement direction. The display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also displays a specific image TG, and the right rotation of the left sub-display device 10L also changes the inclination of the specific image TG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(E), the four hold icons 9A and the specific image TG disappear from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, which is stationary (stopped) in the advanced position (deployed position). After that, an image indicating "2nd time" is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, indicating that the second time of the pseudo consecutive rounds is about to begin.

After that, as shown in FIG. 95(F) to FIG. 95(H), the left sub-display device 10L moves from the advanced position (deployed position) to the retreat position (home position) by rotating left and moving downward, and stops (stops) at the retreat position. At this time, since the four reserved icons 9A are continuously displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the arrangement direction of the four reserved icons 9A changes due to the left rotation of the left sub-display device 10L. In addition, due to the downward movement of the left sub-display device 10L, the four reserved icons 9A move in a direction (vertical direction) perpendicular (intersecting) to the arrangement direction (horizontal direction) of the reserved icons 9A while maintaining the display. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, as shown in FIG. 95(G), the second variable display is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 95(H), a reach is formed in which the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at "6", and a pseudo-continuous suggestion image represented as "Continuous" that suggests that a pseudo-continuous start will be displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figures 95(I) to 95(J), the left sub-display device 10L rotates to the right at the relay position, moving to the advanced position and stopping there. At this time, four hold icons 9A are displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, and the right rotation of the left sub-display device 10L changes the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A. The tilt of each hold icon 9A also changes with the right rotation of the sub-display device 10L. In other words, the orientation of each hold icon 9A changes so that the orientation of the icon matches the arrangement direction. Since a specific image TG is also displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the tilt of the specific image TG also changes with the right rotation of the left sub-display device 10L. As shown in FIG. 95 (J), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, which is stationary (stopped) in the advanced position (deployed position), the four hold icons 9A and the specific image TG disappear, and an image indicating "3rd time" is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, indicating that the third time of the pseudo consecutive draw is about to begin.

[Example of effect]
Below is an example of the effect of changing the direction of the reserved arrangement.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 92, by changing the display positions of the multiple reserved icons displayed on the sub display device 10, it is possible to execute an arrangement direction change effect in which the arrangement direction of the multiple reserved icons changes. Also, as shown in Fig. 93, by changing the display positions of the multiple reserved icons displayed on the main display device 7, it is possible to execute an arrangement direction change effect in which the arrangement direction of the multiple reserved icons displayed on the sub display device 10 changes. As shown in Figs. 94 and 95, by changing the posture of the sub display device 10, it is possible to execute an arrangement direction change effect in which the arrangement direction of the multiple reserved icons displayed on the sub display device 10 changes. With these configurations, it is possible to visually entertain the player and increase the interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 92(D)(E), 93(A)(B), 94(C)(D), and 95(C)(D), in the arrangement direction change presentation, the angle of the arrangement direction of the multiple reserved icons changes while maintaining their display. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 92(G), 93(E)(F), 94(G)(H), and 95(G)(H), in the arrangement direction change performance, the angle of the reserved icons changes, and then the reserved icons move in a direction intersecting with the arrangement direction. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and can increase the interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 92(B)(G), 93(C)(D)(G), 94(B)(G), and 95(B)(G), in the arrangement direction change presentation, the reserved icons move in a direction intersecting with the direction in which they are arranged while maintaining their display. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 92(D) and Fig. 93(B), in the arrangement direction change presentation, the display position of one or more of the multiple reserved icons on the main display device 7 or the sub display device 10 is changed, thereby changing the arrangement direction of the multiple reserved icons displayed on the main display device 7 or the sub display device 10. This configuration can visually entertain the player and increase the interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 93(H), 94(C)(F), and 95(C)(F), the sub-display device 10 is configured to be rotatable, and in the arrangement direction change presentation, the arrangement direction of the multiple reserved icons displayed on the sub-display device 10 changes as the sub-display device 10 rotates. This configuration can visually entertain the player and increase the interest.

[Modification]
Below are some modified examples of the pending arrangement direction change presentation.
[Modification 1]
In the reserved arrangement direction change performances A to D, the reserved icons 9A are arranged in a straight line. However, the reserved icons 9A may be displayed in a curved line. In this case, the approximate straight line of the reserved icons 9A can be regarded as the arrangement direction of the reserved icons 9A. In addition, even if the reserved icons 9A are displayed in a zigzag or other irregular pattern, the approximate straight line can be regarded as the arrangement direction.

[Modification 2]
In the reserved arrangement direction change performances A to D, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the special chart 1 is illustrated, but the reserved arrangement direction change performance may be the reserved icon 9B or the reserved icon 9C corresponding to the special chart 2. In addition, when both the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9B are displayed, the angle of the arrangement direction of one or both of these may change.

[Modification 3]
In the reserved arrangement direction change performances A to D, the orientation of each reserved icon 9A changes in accordance with the change in the arrangement direction. However, in the reserved arrangement direction change performance, only the arrangement direction may change without changing the orientation of each reserved icon 9A.

[Modification 4]
In the pending arrangement direction change performances A to D, when the arrangement direction of the pending icons 9A changes, the parts that maintain the display do not have to maintain the display, and the parts that do not maintain the display may maintain the display.

[Modification 5]
In the reserved arrangement direction change performances A to D, the reserved icon 9A may be displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. In addition, the reserved icon 9A may change its arrangement direction while it is across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10.

[Modification 6]
The contents of the reserved arrangement direction change performances A to D may be appropriately combined. In addition, the reserved arrangement direction change performances A to D may not include some of the performances described above, or other performances may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Mode B1-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
A display device capable of executing an arrangement direction change effect in which the arrangement direction of the plurality of reserved icons displayed on the display means is changed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Mode B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
In the arrangement direction change performance, the angle of the arrangement direction of the plurality of reserved icons changes while maintaining the display.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1 or B1-2,
In the arrangement direction change performance, the plurality of reserved icons move in a direction intersecting the arrangement direction after the arrangement angle changes.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-3,
In the arrangement direction change performance, the plurality of reserved icons move in a direction intersecting the direction in which they are arranged while maintaining their display.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B1-1 to B1-4,
In the arrangement direction change performance, the display position of one or more of the plurality of reserved icons is changed in the display means, thereby changing the arrangement direction of the plurality of reserved icons displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B1-1 to B1-4,
The display means is configured to be rotatable,
In the arrangement direction change performance, the display means rotates, thereby changing the arrangement direction of the plurality of reserved icons displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The hold display effects A to D are explained below using Figures 96 to 99. These hold display effects can be executed during the decorative pattern variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the hold display effect, it reads corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R).

[Hold display performance A]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the reserved display performance A. In the reserved display performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 96 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retreat position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R execute the decorative pattern change performance (changing display). At this time, three reserved icons 9A are displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the reserved icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific target. Here, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C have a shape that imitates the appearance of the right sub display device 10R. Specifically, they have a shape that combines an inner rectangle and an outer rectangle surrounding the inner rectangle, like the right sub display device 10R. The inner rectangular part is a part that imitates the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, and the part between the inner rectangle and the outer rectangle is a part that imitates the outer frame of the right sub display device 10R. Note that the specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract things such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual things whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes any manner in which the number of specific objects can be specified when there are multiple specific objects. Here, the state in which the reserved number of special diagrams 1 is 3 is illustrated as an example.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in a losing state on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 96(C), the display of the reserved icon 9C disappears. Next, as shown in FIG. 96(D) to FIG. 96(J), the rightmost reserved icon 9A of the three reserved icons 9A displayed side by side in the left-right direction on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L moves from the first display position DP1 that displays the rightmost reserved icon 9A on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the second display position DP2 that displays the reserved icon 9C on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96(D), the hold icon 9A starts to move in a curved line in the direction of the arrow AD1 (diagonally upward to the right) from the first display position DP1 of the left sub-display device 10L toward the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. At this time, the direction in which the multiple hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L are lined up (horizontal direction) is different from the direction in which the hold icon 9A starts to move from the first display position DP1 (diagonally upward to the right). Next, as shown in FIG. 96(E), the hold icon 9A starts to move from the first display position DP1, and a part of the hold icon 9A (hold icon 9A with a part missing) is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L so that the hold icon 9A pops out from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the outside. Next, as shown in FIG. 96(F), the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 so that the hold icon 9A pops out from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In addition, while the hold icon 9A is moving from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon 9A may be displayed across the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(G), the hold icon 9A starts to move in a curved line in the direction of the arrow AD2 (diagonally downward to the right) from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 toward the second display position DP2 of the right sub-display device 10R. Next, as shown in FIG. 96(H), the hold icon 9A starts to move from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and a part of the hold icon 9A (a hold icon 9A with a part missing) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 so that the hold icon 9A jumps into the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. Next, as shown in FIG. 96(I), the entire hold icon 9A is displayed at the upper left position of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R so that the hold icon 9A jumps from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 into the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. At the same time, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right. In addition, while the hold icon 9A is moving from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the hold icon 9A may be displayed across both the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(J), the hold icon 9A moves from the top left of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R toward the second display position DP2, and finally moves to the second display position DP2 of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, where it is displayed as the hold icon 9C. The two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right, and the right one of the two hold icons 9A is displayed at the first display position DP1 of the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. In this way, the hold is consumed. With this hold consumption, the number of hold icons for special chart 1 is reduced by one, becoming two. In other words, it matches the number of hold icons 9A (two) displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L after the hold is consumed.

[Hold display effect B]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the reserved display performance B. In the reserved display performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 97(A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retreat position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R perform the decorative pattern change performance (changing display). At this time, the reserved icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the reserved icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific object. Here, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C have a shape that imitates the appearance of the right sub display device 10R. Specifically, they have a rectangular outer shape similar to that of the right sub display device 10R. Note that the specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes any manner in which the number of specific objects can be specified when there are multiple specific objects. Here, the example shows a state in which the number of reserved objects in Special Figure 1 is 3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in a losing state on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 97(C), the display of the reserved icon 9C disappears. Next, as shown in FIG. 97(D) to FIG. 97(J), the rightmost reserved icon 9A of the three reserved icons 9A displayed side by side in the left-right direction on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L moves from the first display position DP1 that displays the rightmost reserved icon 9A on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the second display position DP2 that displays the reserved icon 9C on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 97(D), the hold icon 9A starts to move in a curved line in the direction of the arrow AD1 (diagonally upward to the right) from the first display position DP1 of the left sub-display device 10L toward the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. At this time, the direction in which the multiple hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L are lined up (horizontal direction) is different from the direction in which the hold icon 9A starts to move from the first display position DP1 (diagonally upward to the right). Next, as shown in FIG. 97(E), the hold icon 9A starts to move from the first display position DP1, and a part of the hold icon 9A (hold icon 9A with a part missing) is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L so that the hold icon 9A pops out from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the outside. Next, as shown in FIG. 97(F), the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 so that the hold icon 9A pops out from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In addition, while the hold icon 9A is moving from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon 9A may be displayed across the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(G), the hold icon 9A starts to move in a curved line in the direction of the arrow AD2 (diagonally downward to the right) from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 toward the second display position DP2 of the right sub-display device 10R. Next, as shown in FIG. 97(H), the hold icon 9A starts to move from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and a part of the hold icon 9A (a hold icon 9A with a part missing) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 so that the hold icon 9A jumps into the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. Next, as shown in FIG. 97(I), the entire hold icon 9A is displayed at the upper left position of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R so that the hold icon 9A jumps from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 into the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. At the same time, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right. In addition, while the hold icon 9A is moving from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the hold icon 9A may be displayed across both the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(J), the hold icon 9A moves from the top left of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R toward the second display position DP2, and finally moves to the second display position DP2 of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, where it is displayed as the hold icon 9C. The two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right, and the right one of the two hold icons 9A is displayed at the first display position DP1 of the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. In this way, the hold is consumed. With this hold consumption, the number of hold icons for special chart 1 is reduced by one, becoming two. In other words, it matches the number of hold icons 9A (two) displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L after the hold is consumed.

[Hold display effect C]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the hold display performance C. In the hold display performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 98 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retreat position (home position). The right sub display device 10R has a circular shape. The right sub display device 10R has an annular part R1 that constitutes the outer periphery of the right sub display device 10R. The right sub display device 10R has a circular display screen inside the annular part R1. The right sub display device 10R is configured to be movable in the up and down direction between the retreat position (home position) and the advance position located above the retreat position. The annular part R1 is configured to be rotatable in the circumferential direction. That is, the annular part R1 is configured to be rotatable rightward (clockwise) and leftward (counterclockwise).

Then, as shown in FIG. 98(A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative pattern change performance (change display) is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. The hold icon 9A representing the first special pattern hold is displayed in the upper region of the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold icon 9B (not shown) representing the second special pattern hold is displayed in the lower region. In addition, a part of the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Note that the right sub display device 10R represents the hold icon 9C as a whole of the right sub display device 10R. An image representing the color, pattern, etc. of the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific target. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a shape that imitates the appearance of the right sub display device 10R. Specifically, like the right sub-display device 10R, it has a shape that combines an inner circle and an outer circle that surrounds it. The inner circle is a part that imitates the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, and the part between the inner circle and the outer circle is a part that imitates the annular part R1 that is the outer frame of the right sub-display device 10R. Note that the specific object is not limited to a character, living thing, or object, but also includes abstract things such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual things whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes all manners in which the number of specific objects can be identified when there are multiple specific objects. Here, an example is shown in which the number of reserved objects in special drawing 1 is 3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are fixed and stopped in a losing state on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 98(C), the display of the reserved icon 9C disappears. Next, as shown in FIG. 98(D) to FIG. 98(I), the rightmost reserved icon 9A of the three reserved icons 9A displayed side by side in the left-right direction on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L moves from the first display position DP1 that displays the rightmost reserved icon 9A on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the second display position DP2 that displays the reserved icon 9C on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. Note that the right sub-display device 10R represents the reserved icon 9C as a whole. Therefore, the position of the whole right sub-display device 10R becomes the second display position DP2. Also, a part of the reserved icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 98(D), the hold icon 9A starts to move in a curved line in the direction of the arrow AD1 (diagonally upward to the right) from the first display position DP1 of the left sub-display device 10L toward the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. At this time, the direction in which the multiple hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L are lined up (horizontal direction) is different from the direction in which the hold icon 9A starts to move from the first display position DP1 (diagonally upward to the right). Next, as shown in FIG. 98(E), the hold icon 9A starts to move from the first display position DP1, and a part of the hold icon 9A (hold icon 9A with a part missing) is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L so that the hold icon 9A pops out from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the outside. Next, as shown in FIG. 98(F), the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 so that the hold icon 9A pops out from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In addition, while the hold icon 9A is moving from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon 9A may be displayed across the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in Figure 98 (G), the hold icon 9A begins to move in a curved line in the direction of the arrow AD2 (diagonally downward to the right) from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 toward the second display position DP2 of the right sub-display device 10R. Next, as shown in Figure 98 (H), the hold icon 9A begins to move from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and a part of the hold icon 9A (hold icon 9A with a part missing) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, as if the hold icon 9A jumps into the right sub-display device 10R. At the same time, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(I), the hold icon 9A moves to the second display position DP2 of the right sub-display device 10R and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. The two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right, and the right one of the two hold icons 9A is displayed at the first display position DP1 on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. In this way, the hold is cleared. With this hold clearing, the number of hold icons for special chart 1 is reduced by one to two. In other words, this matches the number of hold icons 9A (two) displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L after the hold is cleared.

[Hold display effect D]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the hold display performance D. In the hold display performance D, first, as shown in FIG. 99(A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retreat position (home position). The right sub display device 10R has a circular shape. The right sub display device 10R has an annular part R1 that constitutes the outer periphery of the right sub display device 10R. The right sub display device 10R has a circular display screen inside the annular part R1. The right sub display device 10R is configured to be movable in the up and down direction between the retreat position (home position) and the advance position located above the retreat position. The annular part R1 is configured to be rotatable in the circumferential direction. That is, the annular part R1 is configured to be rotatable rightward (clockwise) and leftward (counterclockwise).

Then, as shown in FIG. 99(A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative pattern change performance (change display) is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The hold icon 9A representing the first special pattern hold is displayed in the upper region of the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, and the hold icon 9B (not shown) representing the second special pattern hold is displayed in the lower region. In addition, a part of the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. Note that the right sub-display device 10R represents the hold icon 9C as a whole. An image representing the color, pattern, etc. of the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific target. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a shape that imitates the appearance of the right sub-display device 10R. Specifically, like the right sub-display device 10R, it has a shape that combines an inner circle and an outer circle that surrounds it. The inner circle is a part that imitates the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, and the part between the inner circle and the outer circle is a part that imitates the annular part that is the outer frame of the right sub-display device 10R. Note that the specific object is not limited to a character, living thing, or object, but also includes abstract things such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual things whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes all manners in which the number of specific objects can be identified when there are multiple specific objects. Here, an example is shown in which the number of reserved objects in special chart 1 is 3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in a losing state on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 99(C), the display of the reserved icon 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost reserved icon 9A of the three reserved icons 9A displayed side by side in the left-right direction on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L moves from the first display position DP1 that displays the rightmost reserved icon 9A on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the second display position DP2 that displays the reserved icon 9C on the right sub-display device 10R. Note that the right sub-display device 10R represents the reserved icon 9C as the whole right sub-display device 10R. Therefore, the position of the whole right sub-display device 10R becomes the second display position DP2. Also, a part of the reserved icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. Next, as shown in FIG. 99(D), the whole right sub-display device 10R is displayed as the reserved icon 9C. Then the following change display is executed:

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(E), the right sub-display device 10R moves upward from the retreated position (home position) to the advanced position (deployed position). Next, as shown in FIG. 99(F), the right sub-display device 10R moves downward from the advanced position to the retreated position (home position). Next, as shown in FIG. 99(G), the annular portion R1 of the right sub-display device 10R rotates rightward (clockwise) along the circumferential direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 99(H), after the rotation of the annular portion R1 of the right sub-display device 10R is stopped, the right sub-display device 10R moves upward again from the retreated position (home position) to the advanced position. Next, as shown in FIG. 99(I), the right sub-display device 10R moves downward from the advanced position to the retreated position (home position). Next, as shown in FIG. 99(J), the annular portion R1 of the right sub-display device 10R rotates leftward (counterclockwise) along the circumferential direction.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the hold display.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 96 to 99, the left sub-display device 10L displays the reserved icon 9A, and the right sub-display device 10R is movable and displays the reserved item (reserved icon 9C). This configuration allows the player to visually enjoy the game, and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 96 to 99, the right sub-display device 10R displays the state of the reserved ball (reserved ball icon 9C), including whether or not the reserved ball (reserved ball icon 9C) is on hold. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 96 to 99, the right sub-display device 10R has a shape corresponding to the shape of the reserved item (reserved item icon 9C). This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 96 to 99, the reserved icon 9A has a shape corresponding to the shape of the right sub-display device 10R. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the right sub-display device 10R has a circular shape, as shown in Figures 98 and 99. This configuration can provide visual entertainment to the player, and can increase the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 99, the right sub-display device 10R includes an annular portion R1 that constitutes the outer periphery of the right sub-display device 10R and is rotatable in the circumferential direction. This configuration can provide visual entertainment to the player, and can increase the player's interest.

[Modification]
Below are some variations on the hold display presentation.
[Modification 1]
In the hold display performance of Figures 96 to 98, the right sub-display device 10R that represents the hold (the hold icon 9C) has been described as having a display screen. That is, the right sub-display device 10R represents the hold (the hold icon 9C) using a display screen. However, the right sub-display device 10R may be in a form that does not have a display screen (does not use a display screen). For example, instead of a display screen, it may be a light-emitting device that emits light to represent the color of the hold.
[Modification 2]
In the hold display performance of Figures 96 to 98, the right sub-display device 10R representing the hold (hold icon 9C) has been described as having a shape corresponding to the shape of the hold (hold icon 9C). However, the right sub-display device 10R may not have a shape corresponding to the shape of the hold (hold icon 9C). For example, the shape of the right sub-display device 10R and the shape of the hold (hold icon 9C) may be completely different shapes.
[Modification 3]
In the hold display performance of Figures 96 to 98, the hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub-display device 10L has a shape corresponding to the shape of the right sub-display device 10R representing the hold (hold icon 9C). However, the hold icon 9A may not have a shape corresponding to the shape of the right sub-display device 10R representing the hold (hold icon 9C). For example, the shape of the hold icon 9A and the shape of the right sub-display device 10R may be completely different shapes.
[Modification 4]
In the hold display performance of Figures 96 to 98, the right sub-display device 10R representing the hold (hold icon 9C) has been described as being rectangular or circular. However, the right sub-display device 10R is not limited to such shapes. The right sub-display device 10R may be, for example, an ellipse, a triangle, a square, or another polygonal shape.
[Modification 5]
In the reserved display performance of Figures 96 to 98, the decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the reserved icon 9A is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. For example, the decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) and the reserved icon 9A may be displayed on the same display device (display means).

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B2-1]
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A gaming machine having a movable part that is movable and represents the reserved part,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
The movable part represents the state of the reservation, including the presence or absence of the reservation,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1 or B2-2,
The movable part has a shape corresponding to the shape of the reservation.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-3,
The hold icon has a shape corresponding to the shape of the movable part,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-3 or B2-4,
The movable part has a circular shape.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B2-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-5,
The movable part comprises an annular part that constitutes the outer periphery of the movable part and is rotatable in the circumferential direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The hold movement effects A to D are explained below using Figures 100 to 103. These hold movement effects can be executed during the decorative pattern change effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the hold movement effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R).

[Pending Movement A]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the reserved movement performance A. In the reserved movement performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 100(A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retreat position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R execute the decorative pattern change performance (changing display). At this time, the reserved icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the reserved icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific object. Here, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C have a round shape that represents the appearance of a round figure. Note that the specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes any manner in which the number of specific objects can be specified when there are multiple specific objects. Here, an example is shown in which the number of reserved special charts 1 is 3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in a losing state on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 100(C), the display of the reserved icon 9C disappears. Next, as shown in FIG. 100(D) to FIG. 100(J), the rightmost reserved icon 9A of the three reserved icons 9A displayed side by side in the left-right direction on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L moves from the first display position DP1 that displays the rightmost reserved icon 9A on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the second display position DP2 that displays the reserved icon 9C on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100(D), the hold icon 9A starts to move in a curved line in the direction of the arrow AD1 (diagonally upward to the right) from the first display position DP1 of the left sub-display device 10L toward the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. At this time, the direction in which the multiple hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L are lined up (horizontal direction) is different from the direction in which the hold icon 9A starts to move from the first display position DP1 (diagonally upward to the right). Next, as shown in FIG. 100(E), the hold icon 9A starts to move from the first display position DP1, and a part of the hold icon 9A (hold icon 9A with a part missing) is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L so that the hold icon 9A pops out from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the outside. Next, as shown in FIG. 100(F), the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 so that the hold icon 9A pops out from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In addition, while the hold icon 9A is moving from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon 9A may be displayed across the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(G), the hold icon 9A starts to move in a curved line in the direction of the arrow AD2 (diagonally downward to the right) from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 toward the second display position DP2 of the right sub-display device 10R. Next, as shown in FIG. 100(H), the hold icon 9A starts to move from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and a part of the hold icon 9A (a hold icon 9A with a part missing) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 so that the hold icon 9A jumps into the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. Next, as shown in FIG. 100(I), the entire hold icon 9A is displayed at the upper left position of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R so that the hold icon 9A jumps from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 into the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. At the same time, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right. In addition, while the hold icon 9A is moving from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the hold icon 9A may be displayed across both the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(J), the hold icon 9A moves from the top left of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R toward the second display position DP2, and finally moves to the second display position DP2 of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, where it is displayed as the hold icon 9C. The two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right, and the right one of the two hold icons 9A is displayed at the first display position DP1 of the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. In this way, the hold is consumed. With this hold consumption, the number of hold icons for special chart 1 is reduced by one, becoming two. In other words, it matches the number of hold icons 9A (two) displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L after the hold is consumed.

[Pending Movement Presentation B]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the reserved movement performance B. In the reserved movement performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 101(A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retreat position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R execute the decorative pattern change performance (changing display). At this time, the reserved icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the reserved icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific object. Here, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C have a round shape that represents the appearance of a round figure. Note that the specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes any manner in which the number of specific objects can be specified when there are multiple specific objects. Here, an example is shown in which the number of reserved special charts 1 is 3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in a losing state on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 101(C), the display of the reserved icon 9C disappears. Next, as shown in FIG. 101(D) to FIG. 101(J), the rightmost reserved icon 9A of the three reserved icons 9A displayed side by side in the left-right direction on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L moves from the first display position DP1 that displays the rightmost reserved icon 9A on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the second display position DP2 that displays the reserved icon 9C on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 101(D), the hold icon 9A starts to move linearly in the direction of the arrow AD1 (diagonally upward to the right) from the first display position DP1 of the left sub-display device 10L toward the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. At this time, the direction in which the multiple hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L are lined up (horizontal direction) is different from the direction in which the hold icon 9A starts to move from the first display position DP1 (diagonally upward to the right). Next, as shown in FIG. 101(E), the hold icon 9A starts to move from the first display position DP1, and a part of the hold icon 9A (hold icon 9A with a part missing) is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L so that the hold icon 9A pops out from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the outside. Next, as shown in FIG. 101(F), the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 so that the hold icon 9A pops out from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In addition, while the hold icon 9A is moving from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon 9A may be displayed across the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(G), the hold icon 9A starts to move in a straight line in the direction of the arrow AD2 (diagonally downward to the right) from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 toward the second display position DP2 of the right sub-display device 10R. Next, as shown in FIG. 101(H), the hold icon 9A starts to move from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and a part of the hold icon 9A (a hold icon 9A with a part missing) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 so that the hold icon 9A jumps into the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. Next, as shown in FIG. 101(I), the entire hold icon 9A is displayed at the upper left position of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R so that the hold icon 9A jumps from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 into the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. At the same time, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right. In addition, while the hold icon 9A is moving from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the hold icon 9A may be displayed across both the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(J), the hold icon 9A moves from the top left of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R toward the second display position DP2, and finally moves to the second display position DP2 of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, where it is displayed as the hold icon 9C. The two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right, and the right one of the two hold icons 9A is displayed at the first display position DP1 of the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. In this way, the hold is consumed. With this hold consumption, the number of hold icons for special chart 1 is reduced by one, becoming two. In other words, it matches the number of hold icons 9A (two) displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L after the hold is consumed.

[Pending Movement Presentation C]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the reserved movement performance C. In the reserved movement performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 102(A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retreat position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R execute the decorative pattern change performance (change display). At this time, the reserved icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the reserved icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific object. Here, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C have a round shape that represents the appearance of a round figure. Note that the specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes any manner in which the number of specific objects can be specified when there are multiple specific objects. Here, an example is shown in which the number of reserved special charts 1 is 3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in a losing state on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 102(C), the display of the reserved icon 9C disappears. Next, as shown in FIG. 102(D) to FIG. 102(I), the rightmost reserved icon 9A of the three reserved icons 9A displayed side by side in the left-right direction on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L moves from the first display position DP1 that displays the rightmost reserved icon 9A on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the second display position DP2 that displays the reserved icon 9C on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 102(D), the hold icon 9A starts to move in a curved line in the direction of the arrow AD1 (diagonally upward to the right) from the first display position DP1 of the left sub-display device 10L toward the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. At this time, the direction in which the multiple hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L are lined up (horizontal direction) is different from the direction in which the hold icon 9A starts to move from the first display position DP1 (diagonally upward to the right). Next, as shown in FIG. 102(E), the hold icon 9A starts to move from the first display position DP1, and a part of the hold icon 9A (hold icon 9A with a part missing) is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L so that the hold icon 9A pops out from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Next, as shown in FIG. 102(F), the display of the hold icon 9A is erased from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L as if the hold icon 9A popped out from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L and disappeared. Furthermore, the hold icon 9A is not displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, nor on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 or the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(G), a part of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9A with a part missing) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, as if the hold icon 9A that had disappeared had jumped into the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R from above. Next, as shown in FIG. 102(H), the entire hold icon 9A is displayed in the upper left position of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, as if the hold icon 9A had jumped into the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. At the same time, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(I), the hold icon 9A moves from the top left of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R toward the second display position DP2, and finally moves to the second display position DP2 of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, where it is displayed as the hold icon 9C. The two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right, and the right one of the two hold icons 9A is displayed at the first display position DP1 of the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. In this way, the hold is consumed. With this hold consumption, the number of hold icons for special chart 1 is reduced by one, becoming two. In other words, it matches the number of hold icons 9A (two) displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L after the hold is consumed.

[Holding Movement Presentation D]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the reserved movement performance D. In the reserved movement performance D, first, as shown in FIG. 103(A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retreat position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, the reserved icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the reserved icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific object. Here, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C have a round shape that represents the appearance of a round figure. Note that the specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes any manner in which the number of specific objects can be specified when there are multiple specific objects. Here, an example is shown in which the number of reserved special charts 1 is 3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in a losing state on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 103(C), the display of the reserved icon 9C disappears. Next, as shown in FIG. 103(D) to FIG. 103(H), the rightmost reserved icon 9A of the three reserved icons 9A displayed side by side in the left-right direction on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L moves from the first display position DP1 that displays the rightmost reserved icon 9A on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the second display position DP2 that displays the reserved icon 9C on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 103(D), the hold icon 9A starts to move linearly in the direction of the arrow AD1 (diagonally downward to the right) from the first display position DP1 of the left sub-display device 10L to the first display position DP2 of the right sub-display device 10R. At this time, the direction in which the multiple hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L are lined up (horizontal direction) is different from the direction in which the hold icon 9A starts to move from the first display position DP1 (diagonally downward to the right). Next, as shown in FIG. 103(E), the hold icon 9A starts to move from the first display position DP1, and a part of the hold icon 9A (a hold icon 9A with a part missing) is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L so that the hold icon 9A pops outward from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(F), a part of the hold icon 9A (a hold icon 9A with a part missing) is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R as if the hold icon 9A had jumped from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. Next, as shown in FIG. 103(G), the entire hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R as if the hold icon 9A had jumped into the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. At the same time, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right. Note that while the hold icon 9A is moving from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the hold icon 9A may be displayed across the display screens of the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(H), the hold icon 9A moves to the second display position DP2 on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. The two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right, and the right one of the two hold icons 9A is displayed at the first display position DP1 on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. In this way, the hold is cleared. With this hold clearing, the number of hold icons for special chart 1 is reduced by one to two. In other words, this matches the number of hold icons 9A (two) displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L after the hold is cleared.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the hold movement effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 100 to 103, a first effect is executed in which the reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first display position DP1 on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, a second effect is executed in which the reserved icon 9A is displayed by using the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to move from the first display position DP1 to the second display position DP2 on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, where the reserved icon 9C is displayed, and a third effect is executed in which the reserved icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, after the second effect. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained and increases the interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 100 and 101, in the second performance, the reserved icon 9A is displayed to move from the first display position DP1 to the second display position DP2 using the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 100 and 101, in the second performance, the reserved icon 9A is displayed in order on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L and then on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 100 and 101, in the second performance, the reserved icon 9A is displayed to move from the first display position DP1 to the second display position DP2 using the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 100 and 101, in the second performance, the reserved icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R in that order. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 100 to 103, the direction in which the reserved icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L are aligned is different from the direction in which the reserved icons 9A start to move from the first display position DP1 in the second performance. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 100 and 102, in the second performance, the reserved icon 9A is displayed to move in a curved line from the first display position DP1 to the second display position DP2. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained and increases the player's interest.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the hold movement presentation are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the hold movement performances A, B, and D in Figures 100, 101, and 103, the hold icon 9A is described as being displayed to move continuously from the first display position DP1 to the second display position DP2. However, the hold icon 9A may be displayed to move intermittently from the first display position DP1 to the second display position DP2.
[Modification 2]
In the reserved movement performances A, B, and D of Figures 100, 101, and 103, the reserved icon 9A is described as being displayed to move in a straight line or a curved line from the first display position DP1 to the second display position DP2. However, the manner in which the reserved icon 9A moves is not limited to these.
[Modification 3]
In the reserved movement performance of Figures 100 to 103, the decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the reserved icon 9A is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. For example, the decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) and the reserved icon 9A may be displayed on the same display device (display means).
[Modification 4]
In the reserved movement performance of Figures 100 to 103, the direction in which the reserved icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L are lined up (horizontal direction) and the direction in which the reserved icons 9A start to move from the first display position DP1 (direction of the arrow AD1) are different directions. However, the direction in which the reserved icons 9A are lined up (horizontal direction) and the direction in which the reserved icons 9A start to move from the first display position DP1 may be the same direction (for example, horizontal direction).

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B3-1]
A first display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A second display means for displaying the reserved game,
A first effect in which a hold icon is displayed at a first position on the first display means;
A second effect is displayed by using the first display means such that the hold icon moves from the first position to a second position on the second display means that displays the hold after the first effect.
After the second performance, a third performance is executed in which the hold is displayed on the second display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1,
Further comprising a third display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
In the second performance, the hold icon is displayed so as to move from the first position to the second position using the first display means and the third display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2,
In the second performance, the hold icon is displayed on the first display means and then on the third display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1,
Further comprising a third display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
In the second performance, the hold icon is displayed so as to move from the first position to the second position using the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-4,
In the second performance, the hold icon is displayed in the order of the first display means, the third display means, and the second display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B3-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B3-1 to B3-5,
The direction in which the plurality of reserved icons displayed on the first display means are arranged is different from the direction in which the reserved icon starts to move from the first position in the second performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B3-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B3-1 to B3-6,
In the second performance, the hold icon is displayed to move in a curved line from the first position to the second position.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The information display effects A to D are described below with reference to Figures 104 to 107. These information display effects can be executed during the decorative pattern variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command to execute the information display effect is included, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the sub-display device 10.

[Information display performance A]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the information display effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 104(A), the start of the change performance is executed. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retreat position (home position). On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, a reserved image 9A is displayed. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth memory areas of the first special pattern reserved memory area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third memory areas are displayed. The reserved image 9A corresponding to the first memory area is changed to a reserved state in red. On the other hand, on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the reserved image 9C is displayed. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current change.

Next, as shown in Fig. 104(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in Fig. 104(C), a fixed stop effect (miss) is executed. In this fixed stop effect (miss), the left effect pattern 8L, the center effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are "5", and the center effect pattern 8C is "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (D), a reserved shift effect is executed. The reserved shift effect is an effect that is performed almost simultaneously with the next change start effect, and is an effect that shifts the reserved image 9A. Specifically, as shown by the arrows in the figure, the reserved image 9A (red) corresponding to the first memory area becomes the reserved image 9C, the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second memory area becomes the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first memory area, and the reserved image 9A corresponding to the third memory area becomes the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second memory area.

Next, as shown in Figure 104 (E), the change start performance is executed. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are shown changing and being displayed. Two pending images 9A corresponding to the first and second memory areas are displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Meanwhile, the pending image 9C, which has been changed to pending in red, is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. This pending image 9C corresponds to the current change.

Next, as shown in Fig. 104(F), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 104(G), a battle presentation is executed. This battle presentation is a presentation in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins, the expectation of a big win increases. In this battle presentation, the image of the part of the image displayed on the display screen 7a that is covered by the sub-display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10. Here, the foot parts of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10. Also, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (H), a confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. This confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is an effect in which the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped in a jackpot arrangement on the display device 7a. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R all stop at "7." The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Also, with the confirmed stop of the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the display of the reserved image 9C disappears.

[Information display performance B]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the information display presentation B.
First, as shown in FIG. 105(A), the start of the change performance is executed. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retreat position (home position). On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, a reserved image 9A is displayed. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth memory areas of the first special pattern reserved memory area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third memory areas are displayed. The reserved image 9A corresponding to the first memory area is changed to a reserved color of red. On the other hand, on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the expectation information for the big win corresponding to the change is displayed. Here, a message image MSG saying "so-so" is displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 105(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in Fig. 105 (C), a fixed stop effect (miss) is executed. In this fixed stop effect (miss), the left effect pattern 8L, the center effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are fixed and displayed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are "5", and the center effect pattern 8C is "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (D), a reserved shift effect is executed. The reserved shift effect is an effect that is performed almost simultaneously with the next change start effect, and is an effect that shifts the reserved image 9A. Specifically, as shown by the arrow in the figure, the reserved image 9A (red) corresponding to the first memory area moves to the right sub-display device 10R, and a message image MSG saying "Super Hot" is displayed. In addition, the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second memory area becomes the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first memory area, and the reserved image 9A corresponding to the third memory area becomes the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second memory area.

Next, as shown in Figure 105 (E), the change start effect is executed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. Two pending images 9A corresponding to the first and second memory areas are displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Meanwhile, the word "Super Hot" is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in Fig. 105(F), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both shown to have stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 105(G), a battle presentation is executed. This battle presentation is a presentation in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins, the expectation of a big win increases. In this battle presentation, the image of the part of the image displayed on the display screen 7a that is covered by the sub-display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10. Here, the foot parts of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10. Also, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (H), a confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. This confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is an effect in which the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped in a jackpot arrangement on the display device 7a. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all displayed as stopped at "7." The pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Also, with the confirmed stop of the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, they are no longer displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

[Information display performance C]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the information display presentation C.
First, as shown in FIG. 106(A), the variable start performance is executed. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retreat position (home position). In particular, the right sub display device 10R is a circular display device imitating a reserved image. As a result, the right sub display device 10R indicates the reserved image in the entire device. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, a reserved image 9A is displayed. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. It is assumed that the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area has changed to red.

Next, as shown in Fig. 106(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in Fig. 106 (C), a fixed stop effect (miss) is executed. In this fixed stop effect (miss), the left effect pattern 8L, the center effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are fixed and displayed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are "5", and the center effect pattern 8C is "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(D), a reserved shift effect is executed. The reserved shift effect is an effect that is executed almost simultaneously with the next change start effect, and is an effect that shifts the reserved image 9A. Specifically, as shown by the arrow in the figure, the reserved image 9A (red) corresponding to the first storage area moves to the right sub-display device 10R, and the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R turns red. At this time, an effect that makes it appear as if the reserved image 9A (red) on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L has moved to the right sub-display device 10R is executed using the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 located at the back. In addition, the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area becomes the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area, and the reserved image 9A corresponding to the third storage area becomes the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area.

Next, as shown in Figure 106 (E), the change start performance is executed. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are shown changing. Two pending images 9A corresponding to the first and second memory areas are displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Meanwhile, the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, which indicates the pending images, is red.

Next, as shown in Fig. 106(F), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 106(G), a battle presentation is executed. This battle presentation is a presentation in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins, the expectation of a big win increases. In this battle presentation, the image of the part of the image displayed on the display screen 7a that is covered by the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, the foot part of the enemy character CRB is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. At this time, the reserved image 9A is also displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (H), a confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. This confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is an effect in which the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped in a jackpot arrangement on the display device 7a. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all displayed as stopped at "7." The pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Also, with the confirmed stop of the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R no longer turns red.

[Information display performance D]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the information display effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the variable start performance is executed. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retreat position (home position). In particular, the right sub display device 10R is a circular display device imitating a reserved image. As a result, the right sub display device 10R indicates the reserved image in the entire device. A reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. It is assumed that the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area has changed to red.

Next, as shown in Fig. 107(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in Fig. 107(C), a fixed stop effect (miss) is executed. In this fixed stop effect (miss), the left effect pattern 8L, the center effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are "5", and the center effect pattern 8C is "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(D), a reserved shift effect is executed. The reserved shift effect is an effect that is executed almost simultaneously with the next change start effect, and is an effect that shifts the reserved image 9A. Specifically, as shown by the arrow in the figure, the reserved image 9A (red) corresponding to the first storage area moves to the right sub-display device 10R, and the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R turns red. At this time, an effect that makes it appear as if the reserved image 9A (red) on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L has moved to the right sub-display device 10R is executed using the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 located at the back. In addition, the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area becomes the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area, and the reserved image 9A corresponding to the third storage area becomes the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area.

Next, as shown in Figure 107 (E), the change start performance is executed. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are shown changing. Two pending images 9A corresponding to the first and second memory areas are displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Meanwhile, the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, which indicates the pending images, is red.

Next, as shown in Fig. 107(F), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 107(G), a battle/information addition effect is executed. This battle/information addition effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins, the expectation of a big win increases. The battle/information addition effect is an effect in which information about the change is added. Here, a triangular symbol is added to the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, suggesting that it is even hotter than red alone. Note that the image of the part of the image displayed on the display screen 7a that is covered by the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, the foot part of the enemy character CRB is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. At this time, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(H), a confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. This confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is an effect in which the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped in a jackpot arrangement on the display device 7a. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all displayed as stopped at "7." The pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Also, with the confirmed stop of the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R no longer turns red.

[Example of effect]
Below, examples of the effects of the information display are shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the information relating to the fluctuation is displayed using a right sub-display device 10R separate from the main display device 7 (FIGS. 104(A)(B)(D)(E)(F), 105(A)(B)(D)(E)(F), 106(A)(B)(D)(E)(F)(G), 107(A)(B)(D)(E)(F)(G)). This configuration makes the information relating to the fluctuation easier to understand, which can increase the interest in the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the right sub-display device 10R has a shape that resembles a reserved image, and indicates the reserved state (FIGS. 106 and 107). This configuration makes it easier to understand the information related to the change, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, information showing the expectation of a big win is displayed using the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R (FIGS. 104(A)(B)(D)(E)(F), 105(A)(B)(D)(E)(F), 106(A)(B)(D)(E)(F)(G), 107(A)(B)(D)(E)(F)(G)). With this configuration, the expectation of a big win in the fluctuation can be easily understood, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is used to display the reserved image 9A. This configuration makes the reserved information easier to understand, and can increase the interest in the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a hold shift presentation is executed, and a presentation is given in which the hold image corresponding to the first memory area of the left sub-display device 10L has moved to the right sub-display device 10R (Figures 104 (D), 105 (D), 106 (D), and 107 (D)). With this configuration, it becomes easy to see that the information displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R corresponds to the change in question, thereby making the game more interesting.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is used to present the effect that the reserved image corresponding to the first storage area of the left sub-display device 10L has moved to the right sub-display device 10R (FIGS. 106(D) and 107(D)). With this configuration, it is easy to understand that the information displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R corresponds to the change, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
The following describes modified examples of the information display.
[Modification 1]
In the above description, the right sub-display device 10R is configured to indicate the information on the fluctuation, but the left sub-display device 10L may be configured to indicate the information on the fluctuation.
[Modification 2]
Although the above description assumes that the reserved image is red, the reserved image may be in various colors, such as blue, green, purple, or gold.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B4-1]
A first display device capable of displaying an image and performing a performance;
A gaming machine including a second display device different from the first display device,
A gaming machine comprising a presentation control means for displaying information relating to the current variation using the second display device.

[Aspect B4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1,
The gaming machine, wherein the second display device has a shape that resembles a reserved image.

[Aspect B4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1 or B4-2,
The information relating to the fluctuation is information indicating the expectation of a jackpot.

[Aspect B4-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B4-1 to B4-3,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the presentation control means is capable of displaying a reserved image corresponding to a reserved memory on the first display device.

[Aspect B4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-4,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the presentation control means shifts the reserved image on the first display device in accordance with the consumption of the reserved memory, and executes a movement presentation as if the reserved image corresponding to the next change has moved to the second display device.

[Aspect B4-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-5,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the movement effect is performed using a third display device located behind the first display device and the second display device.

[Aspect B4-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B4-1 to B4-6,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the reserved image is not displayed on the first display device, the reserved image is displayed on a display screen of a display device other than the first display device.

The reserved icon linked performances A to D are explained below using Figures 108 to 111. This reserved icon linked performance can be executed during the decorative pattern variable performance. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the reserved icon linked performance, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R). In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variable performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the reserved icon linked performance, it changes the position and inclination of the left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R.

[Reserved icon linked performance A]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the reserved icon interlocking performance A. In the reserved icon interlocking performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 108(A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retreat position (home position). The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed variably on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The left sub display device 10L displays four reserved icons 9A arranged in a straight line horizontally. Here, a reserved icon interlocking performance in which a specific image displayed for a specific reserved icon, which is one of the four reserved icons 9A, moves in conjunction with the specific reserved icon will be described. In this embodiment, of the four reserved icons 9A in FIG. 108(A), the third reserved icon from the right will be described as the specific reserved icon. Here, the reserved icon that has undergone a specific reserved change among the four reserved icons 9A is called the specific reserved icon.

As shown in FIG. 108(A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line along the horizontal edge of the display screen. As shown in FIG. 108(B), the hold icon 9A of the third hold, which is the third hold icon from the right among the four hold icons 9A, changes to hold by pre-reading. Here, a specific image TG is displayed superimposed on the hold icon 9A of a round image. The specific image TG represents the appearance of a specific object. Here, the specific image TG is a character image representing "heat." Note that a specific object is not limited to a character, living thing, or object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, a specific object here includes any form in which the number of specific objects can be identified when there are multiple specific objects.

As shown in FIG. 108(C), when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon 9A is shifted due to the hold consumption on the sub-display devices 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R). Specifically, the hold icon 9A of the first hold (rightmost) displayed on the left sub-display device 10L moves to the right, frames out of the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, and is then displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. On the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the hold icon frames in from the left side of the display screen, moves to the right, and then frames out from the right side of the display screen. That is, in this embodiment, the hold icon is not displayed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the second to fourth holds move (shift) one position to the right, becoming the hold icons 9A corresponding to the first to third holds. The specific image TG moves in conjunction with (in tandem with) the shift movement of the hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A) on which it overlaps. Therefore, the specific image TG continues to be displayed overlapping the same hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A). This specific hold icon 9A becomes the second hold icon 9A through the shift movement.

As shown in FIG. 108(D), the specific image TG moves downward and is displayed in a position close to the overlapping reserved icon 9A (specific reserved icon 9A). At this time, the specific image TG may have the character "Heat" larger or a different shape. The decorative pattern is displayed variably on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. After that, as shown in FIG. 108(E), when the decorative pattern is displayed stationary on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the reserved icon 9A is shifted again due to the reserved consumption on the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R). Specifically, the reserved icon 9A of the first reserved (rightmost) displayed on the left sub-display device 10L moves to the right, frames out of the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, and is then displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. On the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the reserved icon frames in from the left side of the display screen, moves to the right, and frames out of the right side of the display screen. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds moves (shifts) one position to the right and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The specific image TG moves in conjunction with (in conjunction with) the shifting of the specific hold icon 9A above. Therefore, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific hold icon 9A does not change before and after the shifting. The specific hold icon 9A becomes the hold icon 9A for the first hold due to the shifting.

After that, the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 displays a fluctuating decorative pattern, and when the decorative pattern stops, as shown in FIG. 108(F) and FIG. 108(G), the hold icon 9A is shifted again due to the hold being consumed on the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R). Specifically, the specific hold icon 9A of the first hold (far right) displayed on the left sub-display device 10L moves to the right to become the hold, and after framing out of the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, it is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. On the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the specific hold icon 9A frames in from the left side of the display screen, moves to the right, and then frames out of the right side of the display screen. At this time, the specific image TG moves in accordance with (linked to) the movement of the specific hold icon 9A. Specifically, the specific image TG frames out (disappears) from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L in accordance with the movement of the specific hold icon 9A, and then is (newly) displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. On the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the specific image TG frames in from the left side of the display screen, moves to the right, and then frames out from the right side of the display screen. As a result, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific hold icon 9A does not change while the specific hold icon is moving (it is always located below the specific hold icon 9A).

As shown in FIG. 108(H), the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 displays a change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9A. On the left sub-display device 10L, the reserved number becomes 1 due to the reserved consumption, and one reserved icon 9A is displayed. A specific image TG represented as "heat" frames in from the right side of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R and moves to the left. That is, the specific image TG frames in again from the right side of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R from which the specific reserved icon 9A once framed out. Then, as shown in FIG. 108(I), the specific image TG stops near the center of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. After that, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a reach is formed in which the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at "3". That is, the display of the specific image TG suggests that there is a high expectation of a jackpot in the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9A. After that, as shown in FIG. 108(J), the decorative symbols are displayed stopped in a jackpot state on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Hold icon linked performance B]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the reserved icon interlocking performance B. In the reserved icon interlocking performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 109(A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retreat position (home position). The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed variably on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The left sub display device 10L displays four reserved icons 9A arranged in a straight line horizontally. Here, a reserved icon interlocking performance in which a specific image displayed for a specific reserved icon, which is one of the four reserved icons 9A, moves in conjunction with the specific reserved icon will be described. In this embodiment, of the four reserved icons 9A in FIG. 109(A), the third reserved icon from the right will be described as the specific reserved icon. Here, the reserved icon that has undergone a specific reserved change among the four reserved icons 9A is called the specific reserved icon.

As shown in FIG. 109(A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line along the horizontal edge of the display screen. As shown in FIG. 109(B), the hold icon 9A of the third hold, which is the third hold icon from the right among the four hold icons 9A, changes to hold by pre-reading. Here, a specific image TG is displayed superimposed on the hold icon 9A of a round image. The specific image TG represents the appearance of a specific object. Here, the specific image TG is a character image representing "heat." Note that a specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, a specific object here includes any form in which the number of specific objects can be identified when there are multiple specific objects.

As shown in FIG. 109(C), when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon 9A is shifted due to the hold consumption on the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10) and the main display device 7. Specifically, the hold icon 9A of the first hold (rightmost) displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves to the upper right direction, frames out of the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and is then displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon 9A frames in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves to the upper right direction, and frames out from the right side of the display screen 7a. That is, in this embodiment, the hold icon is not displayed. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the second to fourth holds move (shift) one position to the right, becoming the hold icons 9A corresponding to the first to third holds. The specific image TG moves in conjunction with (in tandem with) the shift movement of the hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A) on which it overlaps. Therefore, the specific image TG continues to be displayed overlapping the same hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A). This specific hold icon 9A becomes the second hold icon 9A through the shift movement.

As shown in FIG. 109(D), the specific image TG moves downward and is displayed in a position close to the overlapping reserved icon 9A (specific reserved icon 9A). At this time, the specific image TG may have the character "Heat" larger or a different shape. The decorative pattern is displayed variably on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. After that, as shown in FIG. 109(E), when the decorative pattern is displayed stationary on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the reserved icon 9A is shifted again due to the reserved consumption on the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10) and the main display device 7. Specifically, the reserved icon 9A of the first reserved (rightmost) displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves in the upper right direction, frames out of the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and is then displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the reserved icon frames in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves in the upper right direction, and frames out from the right side of the display screen 7a. That is, in this embodiment, the reserved icon is not displayed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds moves (shifts) one position to the right and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The specific image TG moves in conjunction with (in conjunction with) the shifting of the specific hold icon 9A above. Therefore, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific hold icon 9A does not change before and after the shifting. This specific hold icon 9A becomes the hold icon 9A for the first hold due to the shifting.

After that, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and when the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped manner, as shown in FIG. 109(F) and FIG. 109(G), the shift movement of the reserved icon 9A due to the reserved consumption is performed again on the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10) and the main display device 7. Specifically, the specific reserved icon 9A of the first reserved (rightmost) displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves in the upper right direction to become the reserved icon, and after framing out of the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, it is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the specific reserved icon 9A frames in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves in the upper right direction, and then frames out from the right side of the display screen 7a. At this time, the specific image TG moves in accordance with (linked with) the movement of the specific reserved icon 9A. Specifically, the specific image TG frames out of the display screen of the left sub display device 10L in accordance with the movement of the specific reserved icon 9A, and then is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the specific image TG frames in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves to the upper right, and then frames out from the right side of the display screen 7a. As a result, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific hold icon 9A does not change while the specific hold icon 9A moves (it is always located below the specific hold icon 9A).

As shown in FIG. 109(H), the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 displays a change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9A. On the left sub-display device 10L, the reserved number becomes 1 due to the reserved consumption, and one reserved icon 9A is displayed. A specific image TG represented as "heat" frames in from the right side of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and moves to the left. That is, the specific image TG frames in again from the right side of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 from which the specific reserved icon 9A once framed out. Then, as shown in FIG. 109(I), the specific image TG stops near the right end of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. After that, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a reach is formed in which the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at "3". That is, the display of the specific image TG suggests that there is a high expectation of a jackpot in the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9A. After that, as shown in FIG. 109(J), the decorative symbols are displayed stopped in a jackpot state on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Hold icon linked performance C]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the reserved icon interlocking performance C. In the reserved icon interlocking performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 110(A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retreat position (home position). The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed variably on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the left sub display device 10L, four reserved icons 9A are displayed in a line arranged horizontally. Here, a reserved icon interlocking performance in which a specific image displayed for a specific reserved icon, which is one of the four reserved icons 9A, moves in conjunction with the specific reserved icon will be described. In this embodiment, of the four reserved icons 9A in FIG. 110(A), the third reserved icon from the right will be described as the specific reserved icon. Here, the reserved icon that has undergone a specific reserved change among the four reserved icons 9A is called the specific reserved icon.

As shown in FIG. 110(A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line along the horizontal edge of the display screen. The hold icon 9A of the third hold, which is the third from the right of the four hold icons 9A, changes to hold due to pre-reading. Here, a specific image TG is displayed superimposed on the hold icon 9A with a round image. The specific image TG represents the appearance of a specific object. Here, the specific image TG is a text image representing "heat." Note that a specific object is not limited to a character, living thing, or object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, a specific object here includes any form in which the number of specific objects can be identified when there are multiple specific objects.

As shown in FIG. 110(B), when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the reserved icon 9A is shifted due to the reserved consumption on the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10) and the main display device 7. Specifically, the reserved icon 9A of the first reserved (rightmost) displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves to the upper right direction, frames out of the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and is then displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the reserved icon 9A frames in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves to the upper right direction, and then moves in a parabolic trajectory to the lower right direction as shown in FIG. 110(C), and frames out from the lower side of the display screen 7a above the right sub display device 10R. That is, in this embodiment, the reserved icon is not displayed. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the reserved icons 9A corresponding to the second to fourth reserved are moved (shifted) one position to the right, becoming the reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first to third reserved. The specific image TG moves in conjunction with (in tandem with) the shift movement of the hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A) on which it overlaps. Therefore, the specific image TG continues to be displayed overlapping the same hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A). This specific hold icon 9A becomes the second hold icon 9A through the shift movement.

As shown in FIG. 110(D), the specific image TG moves downward and is displayed in a position close to the overlapping reserved icon 9A (specific reserved icon 9A). At this time, the specific image TG may have the character "Heat" larger or a different shape. The decorative pattern is displayed variably on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. After that, as shown in FIG. 110(E), when the decorative pattern is displayed stationary on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the reserved icon 9A is shifted again due to the reserved consumption on the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10) and the main display device 7. Specifically, the reserved icon 9A of the first reserved (rightmost) displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves in the upper right direction, frames out of the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and is then displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon enters the frame from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves to the upper right, then moves to the lower right along a parabolic trajectory, and frames out from the lower side of the display screen 7a above the right sub-display device 10R. That is, in this embodiment, the hold icon is not displayed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds moves (shifts) one position to the right and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The specific image TG moves (linked) with the shift movement of the specific hold icon 9A above. Therefore, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific hold icon 9A does not change before and after the shift movement. This specific hold icon 9A becomes the hold icon 9A for the first hold by the shift movement.

After that, the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 displays a fluctuating decorative pattern, and when the decorative pattern stops, as shown in FIG. 110(F) and FIG. 110(G), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10) and the main display device 7 shift the reserved icon 9A again due to the reserved consumption. Specifically, the specific reserved icon 9A of the first reserved (rightmost) displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves to the upper right direction to become the reserved icon, and after framing out of the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, it is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the specific reserved icon 9A frames in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves to the upper right direction, and then moves to the lower right direction along a parabolic trajectory, and frames out from the lower side of the display screen 7a above the right sub display device 10R. At this time, the specific image TG moves in accordance with (linked with) the movement of the specific reserved icon 9A. Specifically, the specific image TG frames out of the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L in accordance with the movement of the specific hold icon 9A, and then is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the specific image TG frames in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves toward the upper right, then moves toward the lower right in a parabolic trajectory, and frames out from the bottom of the display screen 7a above the right sub-display device 10R. As a result, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific hold icon 9A does not change while the specific hold icon 9A moves (it is always located below the specific hold icon 9A).

As shown in FIG. 110(H), the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 displays a change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9A. On the left sub-display device 10L, the reserved number becomes 1 due to the reserved consumption, and one reserved icon 9A is displayed. A specific image TG represented as "heat" frames in from the lower side of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and moves upward. That is, the specific image TG frames in again from the lower side of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 from which the specific reserved icon 9A once framed out. Then, as shown in FIG. 110(I), the specific image TG stops near the lower right of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. After that, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a reach is formed in which the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at "3". That is, the display of the specific image TG suggests that there is a high expectation of a jackpot in the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9A. After that, as shown in FIG. 110(J), the decorative symbols are displayed stopped in a jackpot state on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Hold icon linked performance D]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the reserved icon interlocking performance D. In the reserved icon interlocking performance D, first, as shown in FIG. 111(A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retreat position (home position). The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed variably on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The left sub display device 10L displays four reserved icons 9A in a horizontal line. Here, a reserved icon interlocking performance in which a specific image displayed for a specific reserved icon, which is one of the four reserved icons 9A, moves in conjunction with the specific reserved icon will be described. In this embodiment, of the four reserved icons 9A in FIG. 110(A), the third reserved icon from the right will be described as the specific reserved icon. Note that, here, the reserved icon that has undergone a specific reserved change among the four reserved icons 9A is called the specific reserved icon. The reserved icon 9C is displayed on the right sub display device 10R.

As shown in FIG. 111(A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line along the horizontal edge of the display screen. The third hold icon 9A, which is the third hold icon from the right of the four hold icons 9A, changes to a hold state due to pre-reading. Here, a specific image TG is displayed superimposed on the round hold icon 9A. The specific image TG represents the appearance of a specific object. Here, the specific image TG is a text image representing "heat." Note that a specific object is not limited to a character, living thing, or object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, as well as conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, a specific object here includes any form in which the number of specific objects can be identified when there are multiple specific objects.

As shown in FIG. 111(B), when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the reserved icon 9A is shifted due to the reserved consumption on the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10) and the main display device 7. Specifically, the reserved icon 9C on the right sub display device 10R disappears. The reserved icon 9A of the first reserved (rightmost) displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves to the upper right direction, frames out of the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and is then displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the reserved icon 9A frames in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves to the upper right direction, and then moves in a parabolic trajectory to the lower right direction as shown in FIG. 111(C), frames out of the lower side of the display screen 7a above the right sub display device 10R. It is then displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. On the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the hold icon 9A enters the frame from the top of the display screen, moves downward, and then stops at a predetermined position as shown in FIG. 111(D), becoming the hold icon 9C. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the second to fourth holds move (shift) one position to the right, and become the hold icons 9A corresponding to the first to third holds. The specific image TG moves in conjunction with (in conjunction with) the shift movement of the hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A) with which it overlaps. Therefore, the specific image TG continues to be displayed overlapping the same hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A). This specific hold icon 9A shifts to become the hold icon 9A for the second hold.

As shown in FIG. 111(D), the specific image TG moves downward and is displayed in a position close to the overlapping reserved icon 9A (specific reserved icon 9A). At this time, the specific image TG may have the character "Heat" larger or a different shape. The decorative pattern is displayed variably on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. After that, as shown in FIG. 111(E), when the decorative pattern is displayed stationary on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the reserved icon 9A is shifted again due to the reserved consumption on the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10) and the main display device 7. Specifically, the reserved icon 9C on the right sub display device 10R disappears. The reserved icon 9A of the first reserved (rightmost) displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves in the upper right direction, frames out of the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and is then displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon enters the frame from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves to the upper right, then moves to the lower right along a parabolic trajectory, and frames out from the lower side of the display screen 7a above the right sub-display device 10R. Then, it is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. On the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the hold icon 9A enters the frame from the upper side of the display screen, moves downward, stops at a predetermined position, and becomes the hold icon 9C. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds moves (shifts) one position to the right and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The specific image TG moves (linked) with the shift movement of the specific hold icon 9A above. Therefore, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific hold icon 9A does not change before and after the shift movement. This specific hold icon 9A becomes the hold icon 9A of the first hold by the shift movement.

After that, the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 displays a fluctuating decorative pattern, and when the decorative pattern stops, as shown in FIG. 110(F) and FIG. 110(G), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10) and the main display device 7 shift the reserved icon 9A again due to the reserved consumption. Specifically, the reserved icon 9C of the right sub display device 10R disappears. The specific reserved icon 9A of the first reserved (rightmost) displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves to the upper right direction to become the reserved icon, and after framing out of the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, it is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the specific reserved icon 9A frames in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves to the upper right direction, and then moves to the lower right direction along a parabolic trajectory, and frames out from the lower side of the display screen 7a above the right sub display device 10R. It is then displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. On the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the hold icon 9A frames in from the top of the display screen, moves downward, then stops at a predetermined position and becomes the hold icon 9C. At this time, the specific image TG is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 after the specific hold icon 9A frames out of the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. In other words, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific hold icon 9A is not linked on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

As shown in FIG. 111(H), the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 displays a change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9A. On the left sub-display device 10L, the reserved number becomes 1 due to the reserved consumption, and one reserved icon 9A is displayed. A specific image TG represented as "heat" frames in from the lower side of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and moves upward. That is, the specific image TG frames in again from the lower side of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 from which the specific reserved icon 9A once framed out. Then, as shown in FIG. 111(I), the specific image TG stops near the lower right of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. After that, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a reach is formed in which the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at "3". That is, the display of the specific image TG suggests that there is a high expectation of a jackpot in the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9A. After that, as shown in FIG. 111(J), the decorative symbols are displayed stopped in a jackpot state on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of the hold icon linkage presentation.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 108, a first effect in which a reserved icon 9A is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L, a second effect in which a specific reserved icon, which is one of the reserved icons displayed on the left sub-display device 10L, is displayed with a specific image TG, and a third effect in which a specific reserved icon disappears from the left sub-display device 10L and then a specific image TG is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R can be executed. With these configurations, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be increased.
In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 109, 110, and 111, it is possible to execute a first effect in which a reserved icon 9A is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L, a second effect in which a specific reserved icon, which is one of the reserved icons displayed on the left sub-display device 10L, is displayed with a specific reserved icon, and a third effect in which a specific reserved icon disappears from the left sub-display device 10L and then a specific image TG is displayed on the main display device 7. With these configurations, it is possible to visually entertain the player and increase the interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 109 to 111, in the second performance, after the specific image TG is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L, the specific image TG moves in conjunction with the movement of the specific reserved icon. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 109 to 111, in the second performance, the specific image TG is displayed overlapping the specific reserved icon 9A, and then the display position of the specific image TG changes and is displayed in a position close to the specific reserved icon. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 108, in the third performance, after the specific reserved icon 9A disappears from the left sub-display device 10L, it is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R, and after it disappears from the right sub-display device 10R, the specific image TG is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player and improve the interest.
In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 109, 110, and 111, in the third performance, after the specific reserved icon 9A disappears from the left sub-display device 10L, it is displayed on the main display device 7, and after it disappears from the main display device 7, the specific image TG is displayed on the main display device 7. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player and to increase the interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 108, in the third performance, when the specific reserved icon 9A becomes the reserved icon, it moves from the left sub display device 10L to the right sub display device 10R, and after moving to the right sub display device 10R, it moves toward the outside of the right sub display device 10R and disappears from the right sub display device 10R, and the specific image TG appears from the position where the specific reserved icon 9A disappeared on the right sub display device 10R. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player and improve the interest.
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 109, 110, and 111, in the third performance, when the specific reserved icon 9A becomes the reserved icon, it moves from the left sub-display device 10L to the main display device 7, and after moving to the main display device 7, it moves toward the outside of the main display device 7 and disappears from the main display device 7, and the specific image TG appears from the position where the specific reserved icon 9A disappeared on the main display device 7. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 109 to 111, the specific image TG suggests information related to the expectation of a winning lottery corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9A. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player and increase the interest.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the pending icon linked presentation are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the reserved icon linked performances A to D, the specific image TG represents "heat". However, the specific image TG may be a text image other than "heat". For example, the specific image TG may be "no way", "chance", "extremely hot", etc. And, depending on the content of the text, the expectation of the winning lottery corresponding to the specific reserved icon may be changed. In other words, the content of the text may suggest a difference in the magnitude of expectation.

[Modification 2]
In the reserved icon linkage performances A to D, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the special chart 1 is exemplified, but the reserved icon linkage performance may be the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the special chart 2. In addition, both the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9B may perform the above performance.

[Modification 3]
In the reserved icon linked performances A to D, the reserved icon 9A does not change orientation when it moves. However, in the reserved icon linked performances, the reserved icon 9A may change orientation when it moves. For example, the reserved icon 9A may move while rotating. Also, the reserved icon 9A may change size or flash when it moves.

[Modification 4]
In the hold icon linked performances A to D, when the hold icon 9A moves, the parts that maintain the display do not have to maintain the display, and the parts that do not maintain the display may maintain the display.

[Modification 5]
In the reserved icon linked performances A to D, the reserved icon 9A may be displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. In addition, the specific image TG may also be displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10.

[Modification 6]
The contents of the reserved icon linked effects A to D may be appropriately combined. In addition, the reserved icon linked effects A to D may not include some of the effects described above, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect B5-1]
A first display means capable of displaying an image;
A gaming machine including a second display means capable of displaying an image,
A first effect in which a hold icon is displayed on the first display means;
A second effect in which a specific image is displayed for a specific hold icon that is one of the hold icons displayed on the first display means;
A third effect in which the specific image is displayed on the second display means after the specific hold icon disappears from the first display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-1,
In the second performance, after the specific image is displayed on the first display means, the specific image moves in conjunction with the movement of the specific hold icon.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-1 or B5-2,
In the second performance, after the specific image is displayed overlapping the specific hold icon, the display position of the specific image is changed and the specific image is displayed in a position close to the specific hold icon.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B5-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B5-1 to B5-3,
In the third performance, after the specific hold icon disappears from the first display means, the specific hold icon is displayed on the second display means, and after the specific hold icon disappears from the second display means, the specific image is displayed on the second display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B5-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-4,
In the third performance, when the specific hold icon is placed on hold, it moves from the first display means to the second display means, and after moving to the second display means, it disappears from the second display means by moving toward the outside of the second display means, and the specific image appears on the second display means from the position where the specific hold icon disappeared.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B5-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B5-1 to B5-5,
The specific image indicates information related to the expectation of a winning lottery corresponding to the specific reserved icon.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The hold change suggestion effects A to D are explained below using Figures 112 to 115. These hold change suggestion effects can be executed during the decorative pattern change effect (for example, during a pseudo consecutive effect). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the hold change suggestion image effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R).

[Hold change indication performance A]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the reserved change suggestion performance A. In the reserved change suggestion performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 112(A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retreat position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R perform the decorative pattern change performance (change display). At this time, the reserved icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the reserved icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific object. Here, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C have a round shape that represents the appearance of a round figure. Note that the specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes any manner in which the number of specific objects can be specified when there are multiple specific objects. Here, the state in which the number of reserved items in the special chart 1 is 3 is illustrated. In addition, the color of the three reserved icons 9A and the reserved icon 9C is "white".

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear temporarily, and a first reserved change suggestion image HG1 is displayed, suggesting the possibility of a reserved change of the reserved icon 9C. The first reserved change suggestion image HG1 includes an ally character CRA, which is an image representing an ally character, and an enemy character CRB, which is an image representing an enemy character. The enemy character CRA includes an image suggesting the state of the reserved icon 9C after the reserved change. In this embodiment, the entire enemy character CRA is "red" to suggest the color of the reserved icon 9C after the reserved change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ally character CRA performs a predetermined performance (action). Here, the ally character CRA performs an action as if throwing a ball BG at the enemy character CRB. The ball BG, which is an image representing a ball, is included in the first pending change suggestion image HG1. Next, as shown in FIG. 112(D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA at the enemy character CRB hits the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (E), a second pending change suggestion image HG2 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, suggesting the possibility of a pending change of the pending icon 9C. The second pending change suggestion image HG2 is an image suggesting that a pending change of the pending icon 9C will be executed. Specifically, an image is displayed indicating that the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA has hit the enemy character CRB and caused damage to the enemy character CRA. In other words, an image is displayed indicating that a specified performance has been successful.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the enemy character CRB behaves as if he is frustrated at having been damaged. Here, a text image is displayed showing the enemy character CRB saying, "I got you!". Next, as shown in FIG. 112(G), the enemy character CRB is displayed moving downwards while rotating slightly left from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 towards the reserved icon 9C on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(H), the enemy character CRB is displayed moving from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The enemy character CRB is displayed across the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. Next, as shown in FIG. 112(I), on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the enemy character CRB collides with the reserved icon 9C, and the reserved icon 9C changes to a reserved state. Specifically, the reserved icon 9C changes from "white" to "red," which is the color of the enemy character CRB. Next, as shown in FIG. 112(J), the display of the second reserved change suggestion image HG2 disappears on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Hold change indication performance B]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the reserved change suggestion performance B. In the reserved change suggestion performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 113(A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retreat position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R execute the decorative pattern change performance (change display). At this time, the reserved icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the reserved icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific object. Here, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C have a round shape that represents the appearance of a round figure. Note that the specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes any manner in which the number of specific objects can be specified when there are multiple specific objects. Here, the state in which the number of reserved items in the special chart 1 is 3 is illustrated. In addition, the color of the three reserved icons 9A and the reserved icon 9C is "white".

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear temporarily, and a first reserved change suggestion image HG1 is displayed, suggesting the possibility of a reserved change of the reserved icon 9C. The first reserved change suggestion image HG1 includes an ally character CRA, which is an image representing an ally character, and an enemy character CRB, which is an image representing an enemy character. The enemy character CRA includes an image suggesting the state of the reserved icon 9C after the reserved change. In this embodiment, the entire enemy character CRA is "red" to suggest the color of the reserved icon 9C after the reserved change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ally character CRA performs a predetermined performance (action). Here, the ally character CRA performs an action as if throwing a ball BG at the enemy character CRB. The ball BG, which is an image representing a ball, is included in the first pending change suggestion image HG1. Next, as shown in FIG. 113(D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA at the enemy character CRB hits the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (E), a second pending change suggestion image HG2 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, suggesting the possibility of a pending change of the pending icon 9C. The second pending change suggestion image HG2 is an image suggesting that a pending change of the pending icon 9C will not be executed. Specifically, an image is displayed indicating that the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB, but the ball BG is bounced off the enemy character CRA. In other words, an image is displayed indicating that a specified performance has failed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the enemy character CRB behaves as if he is upset at having been damaged. Here, a text image is displayed representing the enemy character CRB's line, "I won't listen!". Next, as shown in FIG. 113(G), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the display of the second pending change suggestion image HG2 disappears.

[Hold change indication performance C]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the reserved change suggestion performance C. In the reserved change suggestion performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 114 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retreat position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R perform the decorative pattern change performance (change display). At this time, the reserved icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the reserved icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific object. Here, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C have a round shape that represents the appearance of a round figure. Note that the specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes any manner in which the number of specific objects can be specified when there are multiple specific objects. Here, the state in which the number of reserved items in the special chart 1 is 3 is illustrated. In addition, the color of the three reserved icons 9A and the reserved icon 9C is "white".

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear temporarily, and a first reserved change suggestion image HG1 is displayed, suggesting the possibility of a reserved change for the reserved icon 9C. The first reserved change suggestion image HG1 includes an ally character CRA, which is an image representing an ally character, and a ball BG, which is an image representing a ball. The ball BG includes an image suggesting the state of the reserved icon 9C after the reserved change. In this embodiment, the entire ball BG is "red" to suggest the color of the reserved icon 9C after the reserved change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ally character CRA performs a predetermined performance (action). Here, the ally character CRA performs an action as if throwing a ball BG. Next, as shown in FIG. 114(D), the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA flies toward the left sub-display device 10L. Next, as shown in FIG. 114(E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA hits the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (F), a second pending change suggestion image HG2 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, suggesting the possibility of a pending change of the pending icon 9C. The second pending change suggestion image HG2 is an image suggesting that a pending change of the pending icon 9C will be executed. Specifically, the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA is displayed across the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the left sub-display device 10L, so that it flies into the left sub-display device 10L and moves toward the second pending icon 9A from the right of the three pending icons 9A. In other words, an image is displayed indicating that the specified performance has been successful.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(G), the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA collides with the second reserved icon 9A from the right of the three reserved icons 9A on the left sub-display device 10L, and that reserved icon 9A changes to reserved. Specifically, the reserved icon 9A changes from "white" to "red", the same color as the ball BG. Next, as shown in FIG. 114(H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ally character CRA performs an action that will make him happy. Here, a text image representing the ally character CRA's line "Yay!" is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 114(I), the display of the second reserved change suggestion image HG2 disappears on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Hold change indication performance D]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the reserved change suggestion performance D. In the reserved change suggestion performance D, first, as shown in FIG. 115(A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retreat position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R perform the decorative pattern change performance (change display). At this time, the reserved icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the reserved icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific object. Here, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C have a round shape that represents the appearance of a round figure. Note that the specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes any manner in which the number of specific objects can be specified when there are multiple specific objects. Here, the state in which the number of reserved items in the special chart 1 is 3 is illustrated. In addition, the color of the three reserved icons 9A and the reserved icon 9C is "white".

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear temporarily, and a first reserved change suggestion image HG1 is displayed, suggesting the possibility of a reserved change for the reserved icon 9C. The first reserved change suggestion image HG1 includes an ally character CRA, which is an image representing an ally character, and a ball BG, which is an image representing a ball. The ball BG includes an image suggesting the state of the reserved icon 9C after the reserved change. In this embodiment, the entire ball BG is "red" to suggest the color of the reserved icon 9C after the reserved change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ally character CRA performs a predetermined performance (action). Here, the ally character CRA performs an action as if throwing a ball BG. Next, as shown in FIG. 115(D), the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA flies toward the left sub-display device 10L. Next, as shown in FIG. 115(E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA hits the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (F), a second pending change suggestion image HG2 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, suggesting the possibility of a pending change of the pending icon 9C. The second pending change suggestion image HG2 is an image suggesting that a pending change of the pending icon 9C will not be executed. Specifically, an image is displayed showing that the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA hits the left sub-display device 10L, but the ball BG bounces back. In other words, an image is displayed showing that the specified performance has failed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(G), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ally character CRA performs an action that makes him feel frustrated. Here, a text image is displayed that shows the ally character CRA saying, "No good!". Next, as shown in FIG. 115(H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the display of the second pending change suggestion image HG2 disappears.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of image presentations suggesting hold changes.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 112 to 115, a first effect is executed in which the reserved icon 9A (reserved icon 9C) is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L (right sub-display device 10R), and a second effect is executed in which a first reserved change suggestion image HG1 is displayed after the first display effect, suggesting a possible reserved change of the reserved icon 9A (reserved icon 9C). The first reserved change suggestion image HG1 includes, at least in part, an image suggesting the state of the reserved icon 9A (reserved icon 9C) after the reserved change. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and increases the interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 112 to 115, after the second performance, a third performance can be executed in which a second reserved change suggestion image HG2 different from the first reserved change suggestion image HG1 is displayed, suggesting the possibility of a reserved change of the reserved icon 9A (respective reserved icon 9C). With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player and increase the interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 112 to 115, the second reserved change suggestion image HG2 includes, at least in part, an image suggesting the state of the reserved icon 9A (the reserved icon 9C) after the reserved change. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 112 and 114, the second reserved change suggestion image HG2 is an image suggesting that the reserved change of the reserved icon 9A (the reserved icon 9C) will be executed. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 112 and 114, in the third performance, at least a part of the second reserved change suggestion image HG2 is displayed so as to move toward the position where the reserved icon 9A (the reserved icon 9C) is displayed. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 112 and 114, after the third performance, a fourth performance can be executed in which the reserved icon 9A (the reserved icon 9C) is changed from the first state to the second state. This configuration can visually entertain the player, and can increase the interest.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 113 and 115, the second reserved change suggestion image HG2 is an image suggesting that the reserved change of the reserved icon 9A (the reserved icon 9C) will not be executed. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be increased.

[Modification]
Below are some variations on the image presentation indicating a hold change.
[Modification 1]
In the pending change suggestion performances of Figures 112 to 115, the first pending change suggestion image HG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, but the first pending change suggestion image HG1 may be displayed on, for example, the left sub-display device 10L, the right sub-display device 10R, or other display devices. Also, it may be displayed across multiple display devices.
[Modification 2]
In the hold change suggestion presentation of Figures 112 to 115, a part of the first hold change suggestion image HG1 is an image (enemy character CRB, ball BG) suggesting the state of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) after the hold change, but the entire first hold change suggestion image HG1 may be an image suggesting the state of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) after the hold change.
[Modification 3]
In the hold change suggestion presentation of Figures 112 to 115, a part of the second hold change suggestion image HG2 is an image (enemy character CRB, ball BG) suggesting the state of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) after the hold change, but the entire second hold change suggestion image HG2 may be an image suggesting the state of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) after the hold change.
[Modification 4]
In the pending change suggestion presentation of Figures 112 to 115, the first pending change suggestion image HG1 and the second pending change suggestion image HG2 are displayed successively, but for example, the second pending change suggestion image HG2 may be displayed after the first pending change suggestion image HG1 disappears.
[Modification 5]
In the hold change suggestion presentation of Figures 112 to 115, the first hold change suggestion image HG1 and the second hold change suggestion image HG2 are related images, but for example, the first hold change suggestion image HG1 and the second hold change suggestion image HG2 may be images that are completely unrelated.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B6-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of executing a plurality of effects,
A first effect in which a hold icon is displayed on the display means;
After the first display effect, a second effect is executed in which a first hold change suggestion image is displayed, which suggests a possibility of a hold change of the hold icon;
The first hold change suggestion image includes, at least in part, an image suggesting an aspect of the hold icon after the hold change;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-1,
After the second effect, a third effect can be executed in which a second pending change suggestion image different from the first pending change suggestion image is displayed, which suggests a possibility of a pending change of the pending icon.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-2,
The second pending change suggestion image includes, at least in part, an image suggesting an aspect of the pending icon after the pending change;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B6-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-2 or B6-3,
The second pending change suggestion image is an image suggesting that a pending change of the pending icon is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B6-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-4,
In the third performance, at least a part of the second pending change suggestion image is displayed so as to move toward the position where the pending icon is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B6-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-4 or B6-5,
After the third performance, a fourth performance can be executed in which the hold icon is changed from the first state to the second state.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B6-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-2 or B6-3,
The second pending change suggestion image is an image suggesting that the pending change of the pending icon will not be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative pattern display mode effects A to D are explained below using Figures 116 to 119. These decorative pattern display mode effects can be executed during decorative pattern variation effects, during big win games, etc. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a pending change suggestion image effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R).

[Decorative Pattern Display Mode A]
FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern display mode performance A. In the decorative pattern display mode performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 116(A), the second movable role 15 is located at the retreat position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 during the big win game, the decorative pattern change performance (change display) is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side along the horizontal line LN1 in the horizontal direction. The number of times (changes) of the decorative pattern change performance during this big win game is 99 times. Next, as shown in FIG. 116(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are fixed and stopped in a losing mode. The left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side along the horizontal line LN1 in the horizontal direction. This ends the 99th decorative pattern variation presentation during the big win game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(C), a decorative pattern change presentation (changing display) is executed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. The number of decorative pattern change presentations (number of changes) during this jackpot game is 100. Next, as shown in FIG. 116(D), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are fixed and stopped in a losing state on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. This ends the 100th decorative pattern change presentation during the jackpot game. In other words, the number of changes during the jackpot game reaches 100.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(E), when the number of fluctuations during the jackpot game reaches 100, the display of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappears temporarily on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 116(F), the second movable part 15 moves downward from the retreated position toward the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 116(G), the second movable part 15 stops at the advanced position (deployed position) near the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 116(H), the second movable part 15 rotates left at the advanced position and stops in a state tilted at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(I), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed again on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and a decorative pattern change performance (change display) is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. The number of times (changes) of the decorative pattern change performance during this big win game is 101 times. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side on the lower side of the second movable role 15. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side in a state inclined at the same angle as the second movable role 15 from the horizontal direction. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side along the inclined line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in a losing state on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. This ends the 101st decorative pattern variation performance during the big win game. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side on the lower side of the second movable device 15. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side inclined at the same angle as the second movable device 15 from the horizontal direction. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side along the inclined line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.

[Decorative Pattern Display Mode Presentation B]
FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern display mode performance B. In the decorative pattern display mode performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 117(A), the second movable role 15 is located at the retreat position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 during the big win game, the decorative pattern change performance (change display) is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side along the horizontal line LN1 in the horizontal direction. The number of times (changes) of the decorative pattern change performance during this big win game is 99 times. Next, as shown in FIG. 117(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are fixed and stopped in a losing mode. The left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side along the horizontal line LN1 in the horizontal direction. This ends the 99th decorative pattern variation presentation during the big win game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(C), a decorative pattern change presentation (changing display) is executed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. The number of decorative pattern change presentations (number of changes) during this jackpot game is 100. Next, as shown in FIG. 117(D), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are fixed and stopped in a losing state on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. This ends the 100th decorative pattern change presentation during the jackpot game. In other words, the number of changes during the jackpot game reaches 100.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(E), when the number of fluctuations during the jackpot game reaches 100, the display of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappears temporarily on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 117(F), the second movable part 15 moves downward from the retreated position toward the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 117(G), the second movable part 15 stops at the advanced position (deployed position) near the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 117(H), the second movable part 15 rotates left at the advanced position and stops in a state tilted at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(I), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed again on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and a decorative pattern change performance (change display) is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. The number of times (changes) of the decorative pattern change performance during this big win game is 101 times. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side on the lower side of the second movable role 15. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed in a horizontal state. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side along the inclined line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in a losing state on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. This ends the 101st decorative pattern variation performance during the big win game. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side on the lower side of the second movable device 15. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed in a horizontal state. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side along the inclined line LN2 that is inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.

[Decorative Pattern Display Mode Presentation C]
FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern display mode performance C. In the decorative pattern display mode performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 118(A), the second movable role 15 is located at the retreat position (home position). Also, although not shown in FIG. 118(A), the first movable role 14 (left movable role 14L, right movable role 14R) is also located at the retreat position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative pattern change performance (change display) is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side along the horizontal line LN1 in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same number (here, "7"), forming a reach. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side along the horizontal line LN1. Next, as shown in FIG. 118(C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, just before the changing middle decorative pattern 8C stops, the display of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappears, and a button image BTN and an operation prompting image SSG are displayed. The operation prompting image SSG is a text image that reads "press," and prompts the player to perform an operation (pressing operation).

Next, when the player presses the performance button 63, as shown in FIG. 118 (D), the left movable part 14L moves to the right toward the center of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Also, the right movable part 14R moves to the right toward the center of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Together with these, the second movable part 15 moves downward from the retreat position toward the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (E), the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R combine at the advance position (deployed position) to form one logo, and stop so as to cover the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Also, the second movable part 15 stops at the advance position (deployed position) near the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Then, the second movable part 15 covers a part of the upper part of the first movable part 14. In other words, the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 are stopped in a partially overlapping and combined state. Next, as shown in FIG. 118(F), the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 rotate left at the advanced position and stop tilted at a predetermined angle from the horizontal. The tilt angle at this time is the same as that of the second movable part 15 in FIG. 116(H) and FIG. 117(H) described above. Next, as shown in FIG. 118(G), the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 rotate right at the advanced position and stop at a horizontal position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(H), the left movable part 14L moves leftward from the advance position to the retreat position. Also, the right movable part 14R moves rightward from the advance position to the retreat position. Together with these, the second movable part 15 moves upward from the advance position to the retreat position. Next, as shown in FIG. 118(I), the left movable part 14L returns to the retreat position and stops. Also, the right movable part 14R returns to the retreat position and stops. Also, the second movable part 15 returns to the retreat position and stops. Next, as shown in FIG. 118(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are fixed and stopped in a jackpot state with the same number (here, "7") on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side along the horizontal line LN1 in the horizontal direction.

[Decorative pattern change stop performance D]
FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display mode performance D. In the decorative symbol display mode performance D, first, as shown in FIG. 119(A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 during a big win game, a decorative symbol variation performance (variable display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, similar to FIG. 116(I), the second movable role 15 stops in a state inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction at the advance position. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side on the lower side of the second movable role 15. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side in a state inclined at the same angle as the second movable role 15 from the horizontal direction. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side along the inclined line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in a jackpot state in which they are the same number (here, "7") on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. At this time, as in FIG. 116(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side on the lower side of the second movable role device 15. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side in a state inclined at the same angle as the second movable role device 15 from the horizontal direction. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side along the inclined line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 119(C), the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R remain displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, while the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 rotate to the right at the advanced position and return to the horizontal position and stop. Next, as shown in FIG. 119(D), the second movable part 15 returns to the retracted position and stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (E), the left movable part 14L moves to the right toward the center of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Also, the right movable part 14R moves to the right toward the center of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Together with these, the second movable part 15 moves downward from the retreated position toward the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (F), the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R combine at the advanced position (deployed position) to form one logo, and stop so as to cover the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Also, the second movable part 15 stops at the advanced position (deployed position) near the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Then, the second movable part 15 covers a part of the upper part of the first movable part 14. In other words, the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 are stopped in a partially overlapping and combined state. Next, as shown in FIG. 119(G), the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 rotate left in the advanced position and stop tilted at a predetermined angle from the horizontal. The tilt angle at this time is the same as that of the second movable part 15 in FIG. 119(A) and FIG. 119(B) described above.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (H), the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 rotate to the right at the advanced position, and return to their horizontal positions and stop. Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (I), the left movable part 14L moves leftward from the advanced position toward the retracted position. Also, the right movable part 14R moves rightward from the advanced position toward the retracted position. At the same time, the second movable part 15 moves upward from the advanced position toward the retracted position. Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (J), the left movable part 14L returns to the retracted position and stops. Also, the right movable part 14R returns to the retracted position and stops. Also, the second movable part 15 returns to the retracted position and stops.

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of the decorative pattern display mode presentation.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 116 to 119, a first display mode in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side along a first direction (horizontal line L1), and a second display mode in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side along a second direction (inclined line LN2) different from the first direction can be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player and increase the interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when a predetermined condition is met, the display mode changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, as shown in Figures 116 to 119. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 116 to 119, the predetermined condition is that the number of fluctuations in the big win game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times). This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and the player's interest can be enhanced.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 116 to 119, the second movable gadget 15 is arranged along the first direction (horizontal line LN1) in the first display mode, and along the second direction (inclined line LN2) in the second display mode. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 116 to 119, when a big win occurs, the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R are combined at the advance position and arranged along the first direction (horizontal line LN1), and then the combined left movable part 14L and right movable part 14R rotate and are arranged along the second direction (inclined line LN2). This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained and increases the interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 116 to 119, when a big win occurs, the second movable part 15 is arranged along the same direction as the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R. This configuration allows the player to visually enjoy the game, and increases the player's interest.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of decorative pattern display mode presentation are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative pattern display mode presentations A to C of Figures 116 to 118, in the first display mode, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a line along a first direction (horizontal direction, horizontal line L1), but the first direction is not limited to the horizontal direction and may be any direction.
[Modification 2]
In the decorative pattern display mode presentations A, B, and D of Figures 116, 117, and 119, in the second display mode, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a line along an inclined line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle from the first direction (horizontal direction, horizontal line LN1), but the second direction is not limited to such a direction and may be any direction different from the first direction.
[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern display mode presentations A, B, and D of Figures 116, 117, and 119, in the second display mode, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a line along an inclined line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle from the first direction (horizontal direction, horizontal line LN1), but the inclination angle of the inclined line LN2 can be freely set.
[Modification 4]
In the decorative pattern display mode presentations A and B in Figures 116 and 117, the specified condition for changing from the first display mode to the second display mode is that the number of fluctuations during a jackpot game reaches a specified number (for example, 100 times), but the specified condition is not limited to this and can be set arbitrarily.
[Modification 5]
In the decorative pattern display mode presentations of Figures 116 to 119, the movable part that is arranged along the first direction (horizontal line LN1) in the first display mode and along the second direction (inclined line LN2) in the second display mode is the second movable part 15, but it may also be the first movable part 14 (left side movable part 14L, right side movable part 14R) or any other movable part.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C1-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern;
A first display mode in which a plurality of the decorative patterns are displayed in a line along a first direction, and a second display mode in which a plurality of the decorative patterns are displayed in a line along a second direction different from the first direction can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1,
When a predetermined condition is met, the first display mode is changed to the second display mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-2,
The predetermined condition is that the number of fluctuations in a big win game reaches a predetermined number of times.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C1-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects C1-1 to C1-3,
Further comprising a first movable part configured to be movable;
The first movable part is arranged along the first direction in the first display mode, and is arranged along the second direction in the second display mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-4,
A second movable part configured to be movable;
Further comprising a third movable part configured to be movable;
When a big win occurs, the second movable part and the third movable part are united at a predetermined position and arranged along the first direction, and then the united second movable part and the third movable part are rotated and arranged along the second direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-5,
When the big win occurs, the first movable part is arranged along the same direction as the second movable part and the third movable part.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative pattern variation effects A to D are explained below with reference to Figs. 120 to 123. These decorative pattern variation effects can be executed during the decorative pattern variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when it contains an instruction to execute a character display effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a, the left sub-display device 10L, the right sub-display device 10R, the illumination panel 18, etc. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is arranged closer to the player than the display screen 7a and the sub-display device 10. These decorative pattern variation effects are different from the normal decorative pattern variation effects. In the normal decorative pattern variation effects, the decorative pattern varies downward.

[Decorative pattern change performance A]
FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern change performance A. In the decorative pattern change performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 120(A), a decorative pattern change pre-start performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change pre-start performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stationary near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change pre-start performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(B), a left decorative pattern change start effect is performed. In this left decorative pattern change start effect, decorative pattern 8L moves from the change start position to the right where decorative pattern 8C is located, and changes so as to collide with (make contact with) decorative pattern 8C. In this case, decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at that location after colliding with decorative pattern 8C. Note that the pending icon 9A displayed is reduced by one when the decorative pattern starts to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(C), a center decorative pattern change start performance is performed. In this center decorative pattern change start performance, based on decorative pattern 8L hitting (coming into contact with) decorative pattern 8C, decorative pattern 8C moves from the change start position to the right where decorative pattern 8R is located, and changes so as to hit (come into) decorative pattern 8R. In this case, after hitting decorative pattern 8R, decorative pattern 8C temporarily stops at that location.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(D), a right decorative pattern change start performance is performed. In this right decorative pattern change start performance, decorative pattern 8R changes to move to the right based on decorative pattern 8C colliding with (contacting) decorative pattern 8R. In this case, decorative pattern 8R moves a predetermined distance to the right and then temporarily stops at that location. However, instead of temporarily stopping at that location, it may move in a predetermined direction (for example, to the left, which is the opposite direction from the direction it moved).

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(E), a miss display effect is performed. In this miss display effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are temporarily stopped in the above-mentioned left decorative pattern change start effect, center decorative pattern change start effect, and right decorative pattern change start effect are instantly converted to other patterns and a fixed stop display is performed. In the example shown, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were the patterns "5 6 7", are converted to "2 3 4".

[Decorative pattern change performance B]
FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern change performance B. In the decorative pattern change performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 121 (A), a decorative pattern change pre-start performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change pre-start performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stationary near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change pre-start performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(B), a left decorative pattern change start performance is performed. In this left decorative pattern change start performance, decorative pattern 8L moves from the change start position to the right where decorative pattern 8C is located while rotating, and changes so as to collide (make contact) with decorative pattern 8C. In this case, decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at that location after colliding with decorative pattern 8C. Note that the number of reserved icons 9A displayed is reduced by one when the decorative pattern starts to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(C), a center decorative pattern change start performance is performed. In this center decorative pattern change start performance, based on decorative pattern 8L hitting (coming into contact with) decorative pattern 8C, decorative pattern 8C moves while rotating from the change start position to the right where decorative pattern 8R is located, and changes so as to hit (come into) decorative pattern 8R. In this case, after hitting decorative pattern 8R, decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped in that location.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (D), a right decorative pattern change start performance is performed. In this right decorative pattern change start performance, the decorative pattern 8R changes so that it moves while rotating to the right based on the decorative pattern 8C hitting (contacting) the decorative pattern 8R. In this case, the decorative pattern 8R moves a predetermined distance to the right and then temporarily stops at that location. However, instead of temporarily stopping at that location, it may move in a predetermined direction (for example, to the left, which is the opposite direction from the direction it moved).

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(E), a miss display effect is performed. In this miss display effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are temporarily stopped in the above-mentioned left decorative pattern change start effect, center decorative pattern change start effect, and right decorative pattern change start effect are instantly converted to other patterns and a fixed stop display is performed. In the example shown, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were the patterns "5 6 7", are converted to "2 3 4".

[Decorative pattern change performance C]
FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern change performance C. In the decorative pattern change performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 122 (A), a decorative pattern change pre-start performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change pre-start performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stationary near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change pre-start performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(B), a left decorative pattern change start performance is performed. In this left decorative pattern change start performance, decorative pattern 8L moves from the change start position to the right where decorative pattern 8C is located while rotating, and changes so as to collide (make contact) with decorative pattern 8C. In this case, after decorative pattern 8L collides with decorative pattern 8C, an explosion image ZD1 is displayed, showing an explosion, and it explodes and temporarily stops at that location. Note that the number of reserved icons 9A displayed is reduced by one as the decorative pattern starts to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(C), a center decorative pattern change start effect is performed. In this center decorative pattern change start effect, based on decorative pattern 8L hitting (coming into contact with) decorative pattern 8C, decorative pattern 8C moves from the change start position to the right, where decorative pattern 8R is located, while rotating, and changes so as to hit (come into contact with) decorative pattern 8R. In this case, after decorative pattern 8C hits decorative pattern 8R, an explosion image ZD1 is displayed, and it explodes and temporarily stops in that location.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(D), a right decorative pattern change start performance is performed. In this right decorative pattern change start performance, the decorative pattern 8R changes so that it moves while rotating to the right based on the decorative pattern 8C colliding with (contacting) the decorative pattern 8R. In this case, after the decorative pattern 8R moves a predetermined distance to the right, an explosion image ZD1 is displayed, and it explodes and comes to a temporary stop in that location. However, instead of temporarily stopping in that location, it may move in a predetermined direction (for example, to the left, which is the opposite direction from the direction it moved).

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(E), a miss display effect is performed. In this miss display effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are temporarily stopped in the above-mentioned left decorative pattern change start effect, center decorative pattern change start effect, and right decorative pattern change start effect are instantly converted to other patterns and a fixed stop display is performed. In the example shown, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were the patterns "5 6 7", are converted to "2 3 4".

[Decorative pattern change performance D]
FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern change performance D. In the decorative pattern change performance D, first, as shown in FIG. 123(A), a decorative pattern change pre-start performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change pre-start performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stationary near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change pre-start performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(B), a left decorative pattern change start effect is performed. In this left decorative pattern change start effect, the decorative pattern 8L rotates at the change start position, and an explosion image ZD1 is displayed, which shows an explosion. Note that the reserved icon 9A is displayed with one fewer icon as the decorative pattern starts to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(C), a left decorative pattern sublimation effect is performed. In this left decorative pattern sublimation effect, the decorative pattern 8L explodes and then flies (moves) upward while rotating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(D), the center decorative pattern change start effect is performed. In this center decorative pattern change start effect, the decorative pattern 8C rotates at the change start position, and an explosion image ZD1 is displayed, showing the appearance of an explosion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(E), a middle decorative pattern sublimation effect is performed. In this middle decorative pattern sublimation effect, the decorative pattern 8L explodes and then flies (moves) upward while rotating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(F), the right decorative pattern change start effect is performed. In this right decorative pattern change start effect, the decorative pattern 8R rotates at the change start position, and an explosion image ZD1 is displayed, showing the appearance of an explosion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(G), a right decorative pattern sublimation effect is performed. In this right decorative pattern sublimation effect, the decorative pattern 8L explodes and then flies (moves) upward while rotating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(F), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed stationary with the same symbol (symbol 7 in the figure), and a reach display is performed in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed. The reach display represents a so-called reach state. In this reach effect, the character ARA performs various effects. Note that this is not limited to reach effects, and pseudo consecutive effects, pre-reading effects, etc. may also be performed.

In the decorative pattern change effects A to D, the left decorative pattern change start effect to the reach effect are performed with the same change. However, these effects may be performed with different changes instead of the same change. For example, the left decorative pattern change start effect, the center decorative pattern change start effect, and the right decorative pattern change start effect may each be performed with different changes.

[Modification]
In the decorative pattern variation performance D, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are each made to fly upward, but they may fly in a direction different from the upward direction, or each may fly in a different direction. Also, in the decorative pattern variation performance D, the order in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fly upward is the decorative pattern 8L, the decorative pattern 8C, and the decorative pattern 8R, but this is not limited to this, and various orders such as the decorative pattern 8C, the decorative pattern 8R, and the decorative pattern 8L may be used.
In the decorative pattern change performances A to C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are configured to be converted into different patterns after all three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have temporarily stopped, but this is not limited to the above, and once decorative pattern 8L has temporarily stopped, it may be converted into a different pattern before decorative pattern 8C changes, or once decorative pattern 8C has temporarily stopped, it may be converted into a different pattern before decorative pattern 8R changes.

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of decorative pattern changing effects.
[Effect 1]
In the decorative pattern variation presentation, the decorative pattern 8L moves toward the decorative pattern 8C and collides with the decorative pattern 8C, thereby starting the variation of the decorative pattern 8C. This configuration can provide the player with a new variation pattern of the decorative patterns, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the decorative pattern variation presentation, the decorative pattern 8L moves toward the decorative pattern 8C and explodes when it hits the decorative pattern 8C. This configuration can give a strong impact to the start of the variation of the decorative pattern 8C, improving the interest of the variation presentation of the decorative pattern, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the decorative pattern variation presentation, the decorative pattern 8L moves toward the decorative pattern 8C and explodes when it hits the decorative pattern 8C, and then the decorative pattern 8L different from the one before the explosion is stopped at the explosion position. With this configuration, the variation and stopping of the decorative pattern 8L can have a strong impact, which increases the interest in the variation presentation of the decorative pattern, and as a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

[Effect 4]
In the decorative pattern change presentation, the display of the decorative pattern 8R is performed before the presentation in which the decorative patterns 8L and 8C start to change, the presentation in which the decorative pattern 8C hits the decorative pattern 8R is performed after the presentation in which the decorative pattern 8C starts to change, the presentation in which the decorative pattern 8R starts to change is performed after the presentation in which the decorative pattern 8C hits the decorative pattern 8R, and the presentation in which the decorative pattern 8R starts to change is performed by the decorative pattern 8C hitting the decorative pattern 8R in the presentation in which the decorative pattern 8C hits the decorative pattern 8R. According to this configuration, a strong impact can be given to the start of the change of the decorative pattern 8R, and the interest in the presentation of the change of the decorative patterns is improved, and as a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the decorative pattern variation presentation, in the presentation in which the decorative pattern 8C hits the decorative pattern 8R, the decorative pattern 8C explodes when it hits the decorative pattern 8R. According to this configuration, a strong impact can be given to the stop of the variation of the decorative pattern 8R, and the interest of the variation presentation of the decorative pattern can be improved, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect ZD-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display performance may be performed as one of the plurality of display performances,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a first decorative pattern,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a second decorative pattern,
The third display effect is an effect in which the first decorative pattern starts to vary,
The fourth display effect is an effect in which the first decorative pattern hits the second decorative pattern,
The fifth display effect is an effect in which the second decorative pattern starts to vary,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, the fourth display effect, and the fifth display effect may be performed,
In the combination performance, the first display performance and the second display performance are performed, the third display performance is performed after the first display performance and the second display performance, the fourth display performance is performed after the third display performance, and the fifth display performance is performed after the fourth display performance, and in the fifth display performance, the first decorative pattern collides with the second decorative pattern in the fourth display performance, thereby starting the variation of the second decorative pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZD-2]
A gaming machine according to the invention,
In the combination performance, in the fourth display performance, the first decorative symbol explodes when it hits the second decorative symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZD-3]
A gaming machine according to the ZD-2 specification,
In the combination performance, in the fourth display performance, after the first decorative pattern explodes, a decorative pattern different from that before the explosion is stopped at the explosion position.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZD-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of claims ZD-1 to ZD-3,
A sixth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects. A seventh display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects.
An eighth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The sixth display effect is an effect of displaying a third decorative pattern,
The seventh display effect is an effect in which the second decorative pattern hits the third decorative pattern,
The eighth display effect is an effect in which the third decorative pattern starts to vary,
The combination effect may include the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, the fourth display effect, the fifth display effect, the sixth display effect, the seventh display effect, and the eighth display effect,
In the combination performance, the sixth display performance is performed before the third display performance and the fifth display performance, the seventh display performance is performed after the fifth display performance, and the eighth display performance is performed after the seventh display performance, and in the eighth display performance, the second decorative pattern collides with the third decorative pattern in the seventh display performance, thereby starting the variation of the third decorative pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZD-5]
A gaming machine according to the ZD-4,
In the seventh display effect of the combination effect, the second decorative symbol explodes when it hits the third decorative symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the above embodiment, the following may be done.
The first decorative symbol rotates and collides with the second decorative symbol.
If the direction in which the first decorative symbol hits the second decorative symbol is defined as the first direction, when the first decorative symbol explodes and then moves to a second direction different from the first direction, a predetermined effect (reach effect) is performed. In this case, the movement moves in a direction different from the normal movement.

Below, pseudo consecutive performances A to D are explained using Figures 124 to 127. Pseudo consecutive performances A to D are examples of pseudo consecutive performances with different configurations of temporary stop performances. This pseudo consecutive performance can be executed during the decorative pattern variation performance. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a pseudo consecutive performance, it reads corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the sub-display device 10.

[Pseudo consecutive performance A]
Figure 124 is a diagram to explain pseudo consecutive performance A.
First, as shown in FIG. 124(A), the change start performance is executed. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retreat position (home position). On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, a reserved image 9A is displayed. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth memory areas of the first special pattern reserved memory area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third memory areas are displayed. On the other hand, on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the reserved image 9C is displayed. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current change.

Next, as shown in Fig. 124(B), a combo entry effect is executed. In the combo entry effect, a message image "Continuous combo entry" is displayed on the display screen.
Next, as shown in Fig. 124 (C), a temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a predetermined arrangement. Here, as shown by line L1, a "5" stops in the lower row of the left effect symbol 8L, and a "5" stops in the upper row of the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R.
Next, as shown in Fig. 124 (D), a re-changing performance is executed. The re-changing performance is a performance in which the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner.

Next, as shown in Fig. 124 (E), a temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a predetermined arrangement. Here, as shown by line L2, "8" stops on the upper row of the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8C, and "8" stops on the lower row of the right effect symbol 8R.
Next, as shown in Fig. 124 (F), a re-changing performance is executed. The re-changing performance is a performance in which the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner.
Then, until a predetermined time has elapsed (until the period of the continuous combo ends), the display shifts from FIG. 124(F) to FIG. 124(C), and the temporary stop effect and the re-changing effect are repeated. At this time, the arrangement of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the temporary stop effect will be different. Also, the interval time from the temporary stop effect to the re-changing effect and the changing time from the re-changing effect to the temporary stop effect will become shorter. And the shorter the interval time and the changing time, the higher the expectation of a big win.

When a predetermined time has passed (when the continuous combo period ends), the reach formation effect is executed as shown in Fig. 124 (G). Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stop at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 124(H), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. This fixed stop effect (jackpot) is an effect in which the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a jackpot arrangement on the display device 7a. Here, all of the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "7". The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Also, with the fixed stop of the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the display of the reserved image 9C disappears.

[Pseudo consecutive performance B]
Figure 125 is a diagram to explain pseudo consecutive performance B.
First, as shown in FIG. 125(A), the change start performance is executed. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retreat position (home position). On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, a reserved image 9A is displayed. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth memory areas of the first special pattern reserved memory area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third memory areas are displayed. On the other hand, on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the reserved image 9C is displayed. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current change.

Next, as shown in Fig. 125(B), a combo entry effect is executed. In the combo entry effect, a message image "Continuous combo entry" is displayed on the display screen.
Next, as shown in Fig. 125 (C), a temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a predetermined arrangement. Here, as shown by line L1, a "5" stops on the lower row of the left effect symbol 8L, and a "5" stops on the upper rows of the center effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R.
Next, as shown in Fig. 125 (D), a re-changing performance is executed. The re-changing performance is a performance in which the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner.

Next, as shown in Fig. 125 (E), a temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a predetermined arrangement. Here, as shown by line L2, the special symbol "Speed Up" stops on the upper row of the left effect symbol 8L and the center effect symbol 8C, and the special symbol "Speed Up" stops on the lower row of the right effect symbol 8R.
Next, as shown in Fig. 125 (F), a re-changing performance is executed. The re-changing performance is a performance in which the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner.
Then, until a predetermined time has elapsed (until the period of the continuous combo ends), the display shifts from FIG. 125(F) to FIG. 125(C), and the temporary stop effect and the re-change effect are repeated. At this time, the arrangement of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the temporary stop effect will be different. Also, the interval time from the temporary stop effect to the re-change effect and the change time from the re-change effect to the temporary stop effect will become shorter as the special symbol "Speed Up" is lined up on a predetermined line. And the shorter the interval time and the change time, the higher the expectation of a big win.

When a predetermined time has elapsed (when the continuous combo period ends), the reach formation effect is executed as shown in Fig. 125 (G). Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stop at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 125(H), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. This fixed stop effect (jackpot) is an effect in which the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a jackpot arrangement on the display device 7a. Here, all of the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "7". The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Also, with the fixed stop of the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the display of the reserved image 9C disappears.

[Pseudo consecutive performance C]
Figure 126 is a diagram to explain pseudo consecutive performance C.
First, as shown in FIG. 126(A), the change start performance is executed. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retreat position (home position). On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, a reserved image 9A is displayed. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth memory areas of the first special pattern reserved memory area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third memory areas are displayed. On the other hand, on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the reserved image 9C is displayed. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current change.

Next, as shown in Fig. 126(B), a combo entry effect is executed. In the combo entry effect, a message image "Continuous combo entry" is displayed on the display screen.
Next, as shown in Fig. 126(C), a temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in the same color combination. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is "0", the center effect pattern 8C is "4", and the right effect pattern 8R is "6", and these effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all blue.
Next, as shown in Fig. 126 (D), a re-changing performance is executed. The re-changing performance is a performance in which the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner.

Next, as shown in Fig. 126 (E), a temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in the same color combination. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is "7", the center effect pattern 8C is "1", and the right effect pattern 8R is "9", and these effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all red.
Next, as shown in Fig. 126 (F), a re-changing performance is executed. The re-changing performance is a performance in which the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner.
Then, until a predetermined time has elapsed (until the period of the continuous combo ends), the display shifts from FIG. 126(F) to FIG. 126(C), and the temporary stop effect and the re-changing effect are repeated. At this time, the arrangement of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the temporary stop effect will be different. Also, the interval time from the temporary stop effect to the re-changing effect and the changing time from the re-changing effect to the temporary stop effect will become shorter. Note that the interval time and the changing time may be shortened when the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of a specific color (e.g., red) are aligned. And the shorter the interval time and the changing time, the higher the expectation of a big win.

When a predetermined time has passed (when the continuous combo period ends), the reach formation effect is executed as shown in Fig. 126 (G). Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stop at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 126(H), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. This fixed stop effect (jackpot) is an effect in which the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a jackpot arrangement on the display device 7a. Here, all of the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "7". The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Also, with the fixed stop of the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the display of the reserved image 9C disappears.

[Pseudo consecutive performance D]
Figure 127 is a diagram to explain pseudo consecutive performance D.
First, as shown in FIG. 127(A), the start of the change performance is executed. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retreat position (home position). On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, a reserved image 9A is displayed. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth memory areas of the first special pattern reserved memory area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third memory areas are displayed. On the other hand, on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the reserved image 9C is displayed. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current change.

Next, as shown in Fig. 127(B), a combo entry effect is executed. In the combo entry effect, a message image "Continuous combo entry" is displayed on the display screen.
Next, as shown in Fig. 127(C), a temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the center effect pattern 8C stops with the special pattern "continue". Here, the left effect pattern 8L is "5", the center effect pattern 8C is "continue", and the right effect pattern 8R is "4".
Next, as shown in Fig. 127(D), a re-changing performance is executed. The re-changing performance is a performance in which the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner.

Next, as shown in Fig. 127 (E), a temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the center effect pattern 8C stops with the special pattern "continue". Here, the left effect pattern 8L is "8", the center effect pattern 8C is "continue", and the right effect pattern 8R is "2".
Next, as shown in Fig. 127(F), a re-changing performance is executed. The re-changing performance is a performance in which the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner.
Then, until a predetermined time has elapsed (until the period of the continuous combo ends), the display shifts from FIG. 127(F) to FIG. 127(C), and the temporary stop effect and the re-changing effect are repeated. At this time, the arrangement of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the temporary stop effect will be different. Also, the interval time from the temporary stop effect to the re-changing effect and the changing time from the re-changing effect to the temporary stop effect will become shorter. And the shorter the interval time and the changing time, the higher the expectation of a big win.

When a predetermined time has elapsed (when the continuous combo period ends), the reach formation effect is executed as shown in Fig. 127 (G). Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stop at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 127(H), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. This fixed stop effect (jackpot) is an effect in which the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a jackpot arrangement on the display device 7a. Here, all of the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "7". The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Also, with the fixed stop of the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the display of the reserved image 9C disappears.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the pseudo consecutive effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when a consecutive combo is started, the provisional stop effect and the re-changing effect are repeated until the consecutive combo period ends (FIGS. 124(B)-(F), 125(B)-(F), 126(B)-(F), 127(B)-(F)). Moreover, the repetition time from the start of the change to the start of the change again after the provisional stop is shortened. With this configuration, pseudo consecutive consecutive wins continue for a certain period of time, and the interval between the repetition of the pseudo consecutive wins becomes shorter, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the interval time from the provisional stop effect to the re-changing effect and the changing time from the re-changing effect to the provisional stop effect are shortened. With this configuration, the repetition interval of the pseudo consecutive reels is shortened, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the provisional stop performance, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are provisionally stopped in a predetermined arrangement (FIGS. 124(C)(F), 125(C)(F)). With this configuration, the repetition of pseudo consecutive wins becomes easy to understand, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the configuration in which the special symbol is temporarily stopped in the temporary stop performance is exemplified (FIG. 125(E), FIG. 127(C)(E)). With this configuration, the repetition of the pseudo consecutive wins becomes easy to understand, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the configuration is exemplified in which the repetition time is shortened by the temporary stop of the special symbol in the temporary stop performance (FIG. 125(E)). With this configuration, the change in the repetition time becomes easy to understand, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the shorter the repetition time, the higher the expectation of a big win. With this configuration, the repetition of pseudo consecutive wins becomes more interesting, and the entertainment value of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of pseudo consecutive performances are shown.
[Modification 1]
Although the above describes a configuration in which the repetition time of the pseudo consecutive hits repeated in a predetermined period is shortened, the repetition time of the pseudo consecutive hits may be lengthened. Alternatively, the repetition time may be lengthened or shortened.

[Modification 2]
In the above, both the interval time from the temporary stop performance to the re-change performance and the change time from the re-change performance to the temporary stop performance are configured to become shorter, but it may also be configured so that at least one of the interval time and the change time becomes shorter.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C3-1]
A gaming machine capable of executing a repetitive pseudo-repeated performance in which a performance pattern that has started to change temporarily stops and then starts to change again for a predetermined period of time,
The repeat pseudo consecutive performance is a performance in which the repetition time from when the performance symbol starts to change, when the performance symbol passes the temporary stop, and when the performance symbol starts to change again changes within the specified period.

[Aspect C3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1,
The repetitive pseudo-consecutive presentation is a presentation in which at least one of the repetition time components, the fluctuation time being the time from when the fluctuation starts to when the provisional stop occurs, and the interval time being the time from when the provisional stop occurs to when the fluctuation starts again, changes.

[Aspect C3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1 or C3-2,
In the repetitive pseudo consecutive performance, the performance symbols temporarily stop in a predetermined arrangement.

[Aspect C3-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects C3-1 to C3-3,
In the repetitive pseudo consecutive performance, a special symbol among the performance symbols may temporarily stop.

[Aspect C3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-4,
In the repeat pseudo consecutive performance, the repeat time is changed by temporarily stopping the special symbol.

[Aspect C3-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-5,
In the repetitive pseudo consecutive performance, the greater the change in the repetition time, the greater the expectation of a jackpot.

[Aspect C3-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-6,
The repeat pseudo consecutive performance is performed on the display screen of a first display device, and a reserved image corresponding to a reserved memory can be displayed on the display screen of a second display device separate from the first display device.

The decorative symbol opposing effects A to D are explained below with reference to Figures 128 to 131. These decorative symbol opposing effects can be executed during the decorative symbol variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a character display effect, it reads corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays images on the display screen 7a, the left sub-display device 10L, the right sub-display device 10R, the illumination panel 18, etc. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is located closer to the player than the display screen 7a and the sub-display device 10.

[Decorative Pattern Opposite Performance A]
FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern opposing performance A. In the decorative pattern opposing performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 128 (A), a decorative pattern variation performance is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern variation performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(B), a decorative pattern slow-moving effect is performed. In this decorative pattern slow-moving effect, decorative pattern 8L slowly moves (moves) downwards, and decorative patterns 8C and 8R slowly move (moves) upwards. In this case, decorative patterns 8C and 8R slowly move upwards at the same speed while lined up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(C), a decorative pattern temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern temporary stop effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, which have been fluctuating at a slow speed, are displayed stopped on the reach line LN. In the figure, decorative pattern 8L is displayed stopped at "7", decorative pattern 8C is displayed stopped at "8", and decorative pattern 8R is displayed stopped at "8". In this case, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stopped at "7 8 8", indicating a chance eye (chance up display) that increases the chance of winning a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(D), a decorative pattern re-changing performance is performed. In this decorative pattern re-changing performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed again in a changing manner near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(E), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed temporarily stopped at the same symbol (symbol 7), and a reach display is performed to indicate a reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C changes. In the reach effect, the character CRZE performs a specified action on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(F), a jackpot pattern display effect is performed. In this jackpot pattern display effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as a jackpot pattern on the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 7 7" is displayed as the jackpot pattern. When this jackpot pattern is displayed, various effects are performed by the character CRZE.

[Decorative Pattern Opposite Performance B]
FIG. 129 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern opposing performance B. In the decorative pattern opposing performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 129(A), a decorative pattern variation performance is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern variation performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(B), a decorative pattern slow-changing effect is performed. In this decorative pattern slow-changing effect, decorative pattern 8L slowly changes (moves slowly) downward, and decorative patterns 8C and 8R slowly change (move slowly) upward. In this case, decorative pattern 8C slowly changes upward at a faster speed than decorative pattern 8R. However, this is not limited to the above, and decorative pattern 8R may also slowly change upward at a faster speed than decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(C), a decorative pattern temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern temporary stop effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, which have been fluctuating at a slow speed, are displayed stopped on the reach line LN. In the figure, decorative pattern 8L is displayed stopped at "7", decorative pattern 8C is displayed stopped at "8", and decorative pattern 8R is displayed stopped at "8". In this case, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stopped at "7 8 8", indicating a chance eye (chance up display) that increases the chance of winning a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(D), a decorative pattern re-changing performance is performed. In this decorative pattern re-changing performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed again in a changing manner near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(E), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed temporarily stopped at the same symbol (symbol 7), and a reach display is performed to indicate a reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C changes. In the reach effect, the character CRZE performs a specified action on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(F), a jackpot pattern display effect is performed. In this jackpot pattern display effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as a jackpot pattern on the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 7 7" is displayed as the jackpot pattern. When this jackpot pattern is displayed, various effects are performed by the character CRZE.

[Decorative Pattern Opposite Presentation C]
FIG. 130 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern opposing performance C. In the decorative pattern opposing performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 130(A), a decorative pattern variation performance is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern variation performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(B), a decorative pattern slow-changing effect is performed. In this decorative pattern slow-changing effect, decorative pattern 8L slowly changes (moves slowly) downward, and decorative patterns 8C and 8R slowly change (move slowly) upward. In this case, decorative pattern 8C slowly changes upward at a faster speed than decorative pattern 8R. However, this is not limited to the above, and decorative pattern 8R may also slowly change upward at a faster speed than decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(C), a decorative pattern temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern temporary stop effect, the decorative patterns 8C and 8R, which have been fluctuating at a slow speed, are displayed stopped at a position different from the reach line LN. In this case, the decorative pattern 8L is displayed stopped on the reach line LN, and the decorative patterns 8C and 8R are displayed stopped next to each other slightly above the reach line LN. In the figure, the decorative pattern 8L is displayed stopped at a "7 pattern", the decorative pattern 8C is displayed stopped at an "8 pattern", and the decorative pattern 8R is displayed stopped at an "8 pattern". In this case, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stopped at "7 8 8", indicating a chance eye (chance up display) that increases the chance of winning a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(D), a decorative pattern re-changing performance is performed. In this decorative pattern re-changing performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed again in a changing state near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(E), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed temporarily stopped at the same symbol (symbol 7), and a reach display is performed to indicate a reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C changes. In the reach effect, the character CRZE performs a specified action on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(F), a jackpot pattern display effect is performed. In this jackpot pattern display effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as a jackpot pattern on the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 7 7" is displayed as a jackpot pattern. When this jackpot pattern is displayed, various effects are performed by the character CRZE.

[Decorative Pattern Opposite Performance D]
FIG. 131 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern opposing performance D. In the decorative pattern opposing performance D, first, as shown in FIG. 131 (A), a decorative pattern variation performance is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern variation performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131(B), a decorative pattern slow-changing effect is performed. In this decorative pattern slow-changing effect, decorative pattern 8L slowly changes (moves slowly) downward, and decorative patterns 8C and 8R slowly change (move slowly) upward. In this case, decorative pattern 8C slowly changes upward at a faster speed than decorative pattern 8R. However, this is not limited to the above, and decorative pattern 8R may also slowly change upward at a faster speed than decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131(C), a decorative pattern temporary stop performance is performed. In this decorative pattern temporary stop performance, the decorative patterns 8C and 8R, which have been fluctuating at a low speed, are stopped and displayed at a position different from the reach line LN. In this case, the decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed on the reach line LN, and the decorative patterns 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed in parallel slightly above the reach line LN. In addition, in this decorative pattern temporary stop performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed as a predetermined chance-up pattern. This chance-up pattern is a pattern that was not included in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R were fluctuating during the decorative pattern fluctuating performance, and is a pattern that is included in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R during this decorative pattern temporary stop performance. When this chance-up pattern is stopped and displayed, it becomes a so-called chance eye (chance-up display), indicating that the probability of winning has increased. In the figure, decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a "7", decorative pattern 8C is displayed as an "8", and decorative pattern 8R is displayed as an "8".

Next, as shown in FIG. 131(D), a decorative pattern re-changing performance is performed. In this decorative pattern re-changing performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed again in a changing manner near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131(E), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed temporarily stopped at the same symbol (symbol 7), and a reach display is performed to indicate a reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C changes. In the reach effect, the character CRZE performs a specified action on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131(F), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as a jackpot symbol on the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 7 7" is displayed as a jackpot symbol. When this jackpot symbol is displayed as a jackpot symbol, various effects are performed by the character CRZE.

[Modification]
In the decorative pattern opposing performance, the decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a floating manner downward, and at the same time, the decorative patterns 8C and 8R are displayed in a floating manner upward, and then the series of performances in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stationary is repeated multiple times, and the more times it is repeated, the higher the probability of a big win.

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of opposing decorative patterns.
[Effect 1]
In the decorative symbol opposing performance, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed in a downward direction, and at the same time, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed in an upward direction, and then the decorative symbols 8L and 8C are displayed stationary. According to this configuration, a change performance in which the decorative symbols move in opposite directions is performed, so that the change performance can be dynamically performed in which the decorative symbols move away from each other and approach each other. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the decorative symbol facing performance, the chance up display is performed by the stopping state of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this configuration, after the dynamic variation performance, the chance up display that is advantageous to the player is performed, so that the player can be continuously interested in the decorative symbols from the variation performance until they stop. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the decorative symbol opposing performance, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed in a downward direction, and at the same time, the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are displayed in an upward direction, and then the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stationary. According to this configuration, a change performance in which the decorative symbols move in opposite directions (opposite directions) is performed, so that the change performance can be dynamically performed in which the decorative symbols move away from each other and approach each other. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the decorative symbol opposing effect, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed moving downward, and at the same time, the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are displayed moving upward, but the moving speeds of the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are different. With this configuration, a dynamic moving effect can be performed by the decorative symbols 8L and 8C. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the decorative symbol opposing performance, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed in a downward shifting manner, and at the same time, the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are displayed in an upward shifting manner, and then the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a stationary manner. This series of performances is repeated multiple times, and the more times it is repeated, the higher the chance of winning. With this configuration, the more the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change, the more the player will be pleased, so the interest of the variable performance using the decorative symbols can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Z-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display performance may be performed as one of the plurality of display performances,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect in which a first decorative pattern is variably displayed in a first direction,
The second display effect is an effect in which a second decorative pattern is variably displayed in a second direction opposite to the first direction,
The third display effect is an effect in which the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped and displayed,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination performance, the second display performance is performed while the first display performance is being performed, and then the third display performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Z-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZE-1,
In the combination presentation, in the third display presentation, a chance-up display is performed by a stop display mode including the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Z-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZE-1 or ZE-2,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect in which the third decorative pattern is variably displayed in the second direction,
The combination effect may include the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect,
In the combination performance, when the first display performance and the second display performance are being performed, the fourth display performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Zeta-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZE-3,
The second decorative pattern in the second display performance and the third decorative pattern in the fourth display performance move at different speeds in the second direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Z-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects ZE-1 to ZE-4,
In the combination presentation, the second display presentation is performed while the first display presentation is being performed, and then the third display presentation is performed. This series of presentations is repeated a number of times, and the more times the presentation is repeated, the higher the probability of winning.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the above embodiment, the following may be done.
In the case of a jackpot, a jackpot pattern arrangement including a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern may be formed on a predetermined line, and in the third display performance, at least one of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is not displayed stopped on the predetermined line.
In the third display performance, the first decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed is a decorative pattern that is not included in the decorative patterns that are variably displayed during the first display performance.

The decorative symbol pre-reading display effects A to D are explained below with reference to Figures 132 to 135. These decorative symbol pre-reading display effects can be executed during decorative symbol variation effects (e.g., during pseudo consecutive effects), during big win games, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a pending change suggestion image effect, it reads out corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays an image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R).

[Decorative pattern pre-reading display performance A]
FIG. 132 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern pre-reading display performance A. In the decorative pattern pre-reading display performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 132 (A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, a combination of three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R) that can notify winning or losing is also called a "set of decorative patterns". On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R execute a decorative pattern variation performance (variable display).

At this time, as shown in FIG. 132(A), four hold icons 9A are displayed in a straight line arranged horizontally on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, a decorative pattern pre-reading display effect is described in which a pre-reading is performed for a specific hold icon 9AZ, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, and a pre-reading display effect is executed on the decorative pattern. In this embodiment, of the four hold icons 9A shown in FIG. 132(A), the fourth hold on the far left is described as the specific hold icon 9AZ. Note that here, the hold icon 9A that is the subject of the pre-reading is called the specific hold icon 9AZ. Also, the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in the losing state "472". The image representing the number "4" in the left decorative pattern 8L is "blue", the image representing the number "7" in the middle decorative pattern 8C is "red", and the image representing the number "2" in the right decorative pattern 8R is "blue". In this embodiment, among the images representing the numbers "1" to "9", the images representing the numbers "1", "3", "5", "7", and "9" are "red", and the images representing the numbers "2", "4", "6", and "8" are "blue".

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(C), the hold icons 9A are shifted on the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R as the hold is consumed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the second to fourth holds are shifted one position to the right, and become the hold icons 9A corresponding to the first to third holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the corresponding hold position on the right sub-display device 10R as a result of the shift movement. As a result of this shift movement, the hold icon 9A for the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative pattern change performance (changing display) is performed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and then the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a tentatively stopped manner in this order. At this time, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ is displayed as a tentatively stopped manner as the left decorative pattern 8L by the pre-reading of the specific reserved icon 9AZ of the third reservation. That is, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ, which shows a specific image, is displayed as a pre-reading performance during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9AZ. This specific image is an image that represents a specific object, and here, it is a smiling face image, and is displayed entirely in "red". Note that the specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. That is, the specific object here includes any manner in which the number of specific objects can be specified when there are multiple specific objects. After the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ is temporarily displayed, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed as "red" images representing the numbers "3" and "5" as usual. In this way, during the third change prior to the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are "red" images as a pre-reading effect, and one of the decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L) is displayed as a specific decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(E), the hold icon 9A is shifted in the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R due to the hold being consumed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds is shifted (shifted) one position to the right, and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed in the corresponding hold position on the right sub-display device 10R due to the shift movement. This shift movement causes the hold icon 9A for the second hold to become the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative pattern change performance (changing display) is performed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a changing state, and then the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a temporarily stopped state in this order. At this time, the specific decorative patterns in which the same specific image is displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are displayed in a temporarily stopped state in order by the pre-reading of the specific reserved icon 9AZ of the second reservation. That is, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ and the specific middle decorative pattern 8CZ in which a specific image is displayed are displayed in a temporarily stopped state as a pre-reading performance during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9AZ. This specific image is the same as that displayed in the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ during the previous change. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ and the specific middle decorative pattern 8CZ, the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily displayed with a "red" image representing the number "1" as usual. In this way, during the second change prior to the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, as a pre-reading effect, all three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed as "red" images, and two of the decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C) are displayed as specific decorative patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(G), the hold icon 9A is shifted on the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R due to the hold being consumed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second hold is moved (shifted) one position to the right and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the corresponding hold position on the right sub-display device 10R due to the shift movement. This shift movement causes the hold icon 9A of the first hold to become a specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative pattern change performance (changing display) is performed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a tentatively stopped order. At this time, the specific decorative patterns in which the same specific image is displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a tentatively stopped order by the pre-reading of the specific reserved icon 9AZ of the first reservation. That is, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ, the specific middle decorative pattern 8CZ, and the specific right decorative pattern 8RZ in which a specific image is displayed are displayed in a tentatively stopped order as a pre-reading performance during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9AZ. This specific image is the same as that displayed in the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ and the specific middle decorative pattern 8CZ during the previous change. In this way, during the change immediately prior to the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, as a pre-reading effect, all three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed as "red" images and are stopped at the specific decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(I), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R shift the reserved icon 9A due to the reserved consumption. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific reserved icon 9AZ corresponding to the first reserved item is shifted, and the specific reserved icon 9CZ is displayed at the corresponding reserved position on the right sub-display device 10R. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are used to execute a decorative pattern change performance (changing display) corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9CZ that was the subject of the pre-reading.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132(J), three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, center decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are displayed as fixed stops in a jackpot or miss mode. FIG. 132(J) shows a state in which the fixed stops are displayed in the jackpot mode of "777". The above-mentioned pre-reading effect suggests that the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT has a higher than usual chance of a win.

[Decorative pattern pre-reading display performance B]
Fig. 133 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern pre-reading display performance B. In the decorative pattern pre-reading display performance B, first, as shown in Fig. 133 (A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, a combination of three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R) that can notify winning or losing is also called a "set of decorative patterns". On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R perform a decorative pattern variation performance (variable display).

At this time, as shown in FIG. 133(A), four hold icons 9A are displayed in a straight line arranged horizontally on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, a decorative pattern pre-reading display effect is described in which a pre-reading is performed for a specific hold icon 9AZ, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, and a pre-reading display effect is executed on the decorative pattern. In this embodiment, of the four hold icons 9A shown in FIG. 133(A), the fourth hold on the far left is described as the specific hold icon 9AZ. Note that here, the hold icon 9A that is the subject of the pre-reading is called the specific hold icon 9AZ. Also, the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in the losing state "472". The image representing the number "4" in the left decorative pattern 8L is "blue", the image representing the number "7" in the middle decorative pattern 8C is "red", and the image representing the number "2" in the right decorative pattern 8R is "blue". In this embodiment, among the images representing the numbers "1" to "9", the images representing the numbers "1", "3", "5", "7", and "9" are "red", and the images representing the numbers "2", "4", "6", and "8" are "blue".

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(C), the hold icons 9A are shifted on the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R as the hold is consumed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the second to fourth holds are shifted one position to the right, and become the hold icons 9A corresponding to the first to third holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the corresponding hold position on the right sub-display device 10R as a result of the shift movement. As a result of this shift movement, the hold icon 9A for the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative pattern change performance (changing display) is performed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and then the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a tentatively stopped manner in this order. At this time, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ is displayed as a tentatively stopped manner as the left decorative pattern 8L by the pre-reading of the specific reserved icon 9AZ of the third reservation. That is, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ, which shows a specific image, is displayed as a tentatively stopped manner as a pre-reading performance during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9AZ. This specific image is an image that represents a specific object, and here, it is an image that combines a smiling face image and a square image with the word "chance" under the smiling face image, and is displayed in "red" as a whole. Note that the specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract things such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual things whose representation is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all manners in which the number of specific targets can be specified when there are multiple specific targets. After the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ is temporarily displayed, the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed as "red" images representing the numbers "3" and "5", as usual. Thus, during the third change prior to the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, as a pre-reading performance, all three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are "red" images, and one of the decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L) is displayed as a specific decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(E), the hold icon 9A is shifted on the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R due to the hold being consumed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds is shifted (shifted) one position to the right, and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the corresponding hold position on the right sub-display device 10R due to the shift movement. This shift movement causes the hold icon 9A for the second hold to become the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative pattern change performance (changing display) is performed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a changing state, and then the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a temporarily stopped state in this order. At this time, the specific decorative patterns in which the same specific image is displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are displayed in a temporarily stopped state in this order, due to the pre-reading of the specific reserved icon 9AZ of the second reservation. That is, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ and the specific middle decorative pattern 8CZ in which a specific image is displayed are displayed in a temporarily stopped state as a pre-reading performance during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9AZ. This specific image is the same as the one displayed in the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ during the previous change. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ and the specific middle decorative pattern 8CZ, the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily displayed with a "red" image representing the number "1" as usual. In this way, during the second change prior to the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, as a pre-reading effect, all three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed as "red" images, and two of the decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C) are displayed as specific decorative patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(G), the hold icon 9A is shifted on the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R due to the hold being consumed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second hold is moved (shifted) one position to the right and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the corresponding hold position on the right sub-display device 10R due to the shift movement. This shift movement causes the hold icon 9A of the first hold to become a specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative pattern change performance (changing display) is executed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a changing state, and then the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a temporarily stopped state in this order. At this time, the specific decorative patterns in which the same specific image is displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a temporarily stopped state in this order, based on the pre-reading of the specific reserved icon 9AZ of the first reservation. That is, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ, the specific middle decorative pattern 8CZ, and the specific right decorative pattern 8RZ in which a specific image is displayed are displayed in a temporarily stopped state as a pre-reading performance during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9AZ. This specific image is the same as that displayed in the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ and the specific middle decorative pattern 8CZ during the previous change. In this way, during the change immediately prior to the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, as a pre-reading effect, all three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed as "red" images and are stopped at the specific decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(I), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R shift the reserved icon 9A due to the reserved consumption. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific reserved icon 9AZ corresponding to the first reserved item is shifted, and the specific reserved icon 9CZ is displayed at the corresponding reserved position on the right sub-display device 10R. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are used to execute a decorative pattern change performance (changing display) corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9CZ that was the subject of the pre-reading.

After that, as shown in FIG. 133(J), three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, center decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are displayed as fixed stops in the form of a big win or a miss. In FIG. 133(J), a state in which the fixed stops are displayed in the form of a big win "777" is shown. The above-mentioned pre-reading effect suggests that the expected probability of a win is higher than usual in the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT. In addition,

[Decorative pattern pre-reading display performance C]
Fig. 134 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern pre-reading display performance C. In the decorative pattern pre-reading display performance C, first, as shown in Fig. 134 (A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, a combination of three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R) that can notify winning or losing is also called a "set of decorative patterns". On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R perform a decorative pattern variation performance (variable display).

At this time, as shown in FIG. 134(A), four hold icons 9A are displayed in a straight line arranged horizontally on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, a decorative pattern pre-reading display effect is described in which a pre-reading is performed for a specific hold icon 9AZ, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, and a pre-reading display effect is executed on the decorative pattern. In this embodiment, of the four hold icons 9A shown in FIG. 134(A), the fourth hold on the far left is described as the specific hold icon 9AZ. Note that here, the hold icon 9A that is the subject of the pre-reading is called the specific hold icon 9AZ. Also, the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped in the losing state "472" on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The image representing the number "4" in the left decorative pattern 8L is "blue", the image representing the number "7" in the middle decorative pattern 8C is "red", and the image representing the number "2" in the right decorative pattern 8R is "blue". In this embodiment, among the images representing the numbers "1" to "9", the images representing the numbers "1", "3", "5", "7", and "9" are "red", and the images representing the numbers "2", "4", "6", and "8" are "blue".

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(C), the hold icons 9A are shifted on the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R as the hold is consumed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the second to fourth holds are shifted one position to the right, and become the hold icons 9A corresponding to the first to third holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the corresponding hold position on the right sub-display device 10R as a result of the shift movement. As a result of this shift movement, the hold icon 9A for the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative pattern change performance (changing display) is performed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and then the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a tentatively stopped manner in this order. At this time, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ is displayed as a tentatively stopped manner as the left decorative pattern 8L by the pre-reading of the specific reserved icon 9AZ of the third reservation. That is, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ, which shows a specific image, is displayed as a pre-reading performance during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9AZ. This specific image is an image that represents a specific object, and here, it is a smiling face image, and is displayed entirely in "blue". Note that the specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. That is, the specific object here includes any manner in which the number of specific objects can be specified when there are multiple specific objects. After the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ is temporarily displayed, the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed as "blue" images representing the numbers "8" and "6", as usual. In this way, during the third change prior to the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are "blue" images, and one of the decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L) is displayed as a specific decorative pattern, as a pre-reading effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(E), the hold icon 9A is shifted on the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R due to the hold being consumed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds is shifted (shifted) one position to the right, and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the corresponding hold position on the right sub-display device 10R due to the shift movement. This shift movement causes the hold icon 9A for the second hold to become the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative pattern change performance (changing display) is performed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a changing state, and then the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a temporarily stopped state in this order. At this time, the specific decorative patterns in which the same specific image is displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are displayed in a temporarily stopped state in this order, due to the pre-reading of the specific reserved icon 9AZ of the second reservation. That is, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ and the specific middle decorative pattern 8CZ in which a specific image is displayed are displayed in a temporarily stopped state as a pre-reading performance during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9AZ. This specific image is the same as that displayed in the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ during the previous change. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ and the specific middle decorative pattern 8CZ, the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily displayed with a "blue" image representing the number "2" as usual. In this way, during the second change prior to the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, as a pre-reading effect, all three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed as "blue" images, and two of the decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C) are displayed as specific decorative patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(G), the hold icon 9A is shifted on the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R due to the hold being consumed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second hold is moved (shifted) one position to the right and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the corresponding hold position on the right sub-display device 10R due to the shift movement. This shift movement causes the hold icon 9A of the first hold to become a specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative pattern change performance (changing display) is performed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a changing state, and then the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a temporarily stopped state in this order. At this time, the specific decorative patterns in which the same specific image is displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a temporarily stopped state in this order, based on the pre-reading of the specific reserved icon 9AZ of the first reservation. That is, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ, the specific middle decorative pattern 8CZ, and the specific right decorative pattern 8RZ in which a specific image is displayed are displayed in a temporarily stopped state as a pre-reading performance during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9AZ. This specific image is the same as that displayed in the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ and the specific middle decorative pattern 8CZ during the previous change. In this way, during the change immediately prior to the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, as a pre-reading effect, all three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed as "blue" images and are stopped at the specific decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(I), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R shift the reserved icon 9A due to the reserved consumption. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific reserved icon 9AZ corresponding to the first reserved item is shifted, and the specific reserved icon 9CZ is displayed at the corresponding reserved position on the right sub-display device 10R. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are used to execute a decorative pattern change performance (changing display) corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9CZ that was the subject of the pre-reading.

After that, as shown in FIG. 134(J), three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, center decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are displayed as fixed stops in a jackpot or miss mode. FIG. 134(J) shows a state in which the fixed stops are displayed in the jackpot mode of "777". The above-mentioned pre-reading effect suggests that the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT has a higher chance of winning than usual.

[Decorative pattern pre-reading display performance D]
FIG. 135 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern pre-reading display performance D. In the decorative pattern pre-reading display performance D, first, as shown in FIG. 135 (A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, a combination of three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R) that can notify winning or losing is also called a "set of decorative patterns". On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R perform a decorative pattern variation performance (variable display).

At this time, as shown in FIG. 135(A), four hold icons 9A are displayed in a straight line arranged horizontally on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, a decorative pattern pre-reading display effect is described in which a pre-reading is performed for a specific hold icon 9AZ, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, and a pre-reading display effect is executed on the decorative pattern. In this embodiment, of the four hold icons 9A shown in FIG. 135(A), the fourth hold on the far left is described as the specific hold icon 9AZ. Note that here, the hold icon that is the subject of the pre-reading among the hold icons 9A is called the specific hold icon 9AZ. Also, the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in the losing state "472". The image representing the number "4" in the left decorative pattern 8L is "blue", the image representing the number "7" in the middle decorative pattern 8C is "red", and the image representing the number "2" in the right decorative pattern 8R is "blue". In this embodiment, among the images representing the numbers "1" to "9", the images representing the numbers "1", "3", "5", "7", and "9" are "red", and the images representing the numbers "2", "4", "6", and "8" are "blue".

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(C), the hold icons 9A are shifted on the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R as the hold is consumed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the second to fourth holds are shifted one position to the right, and become the hold icons 9A corresponding to the first to third holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the corresponding hold position on the right sub-display device 10R as a result of the shift movement. As a result of this shift movement, the hold icon 9A for the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative pattern change performance (changing display) is performed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and then the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a temporary stop manner in this order. At this time, the specific decorative patterns in which the specific images are displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a temporary stop manner in this order, due to the pre-reading of the specific reserved icon 9AZ of the third reservation. That is, as a pre-reading performance during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9AZ, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ in which the first specific image is displayed, the specific middle decorative pattern 8CZ in which the second specific image is displayed, and the specific right decorative pattern 8RZ in which the second specific image is displayed are displayed in a temporary stop manner. This specific image is an image that represents a specific target. The first specific image is an image that combines a smiling face image and a square image with the word "chance" below the smiling face image, and is displayed in "red" as a whole. The second specific image is a smiling face image, and is entirely displayed in "red". Note that the specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes any manner in which the number of specific objects can be identified when there are multiple specific objects. In this way, during the third change prior to the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, as a pre-reading performance, all three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are "red" images, and one of the decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L) is stopped and displayed as a specific decorative pattern showing the first specific image, and the remaining two decorative patterns (middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are stopped and displayed as specific decorative patterns showing the second specific image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(E), the hold icon 9A is shifted on the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R due to the hold being consumed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds is shifted (shifted) one position to the right, and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the corresponding hold position on the right sub-display device 10R due to the shift movement. This shift movement causes the hold icon 9A for the second hold to become the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative pattern change performance (changing display) is performed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and then the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a tentatively stopped manner in this order. At this time, the specific decorative patterns in which the specific images are displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a tentatively stopped manner in this order, based on the pre-reading of the specific reserved icon 9AZ of the second reservation. That is, as a pre-reading performance during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9AZ, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ and the specific middle decorative pattern 8CZ in which the first specific image is displayed, and the specific right decorative pattern 8RZ in which the second specific image is displayed are displayed in a tentatively stopped manner. In this way, during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, as a pre-reading effect, all three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are "red" images, and two of the decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C) are displayed as specific decorative patterns showing the first specific image, and the remaining decorative pattern (right decorative pattern 8R) is displayed as a specific decorative pattern showing the second specific image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(G), the hold icon 9A is shifted on the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R due to the hold being consumed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second hold is moved (shifted) one position to the right and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the corresponding hold position on the right sub-display device 10R due to the shift movement. This shift movement causes the hold icon 9A of the first hold to become a specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative pattern change performance (changing display) is performed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and then the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a tentatively stopped manner in this order. At this time, by reading ahead the specific reserved icon 9AZ of the first reservation, the specific decorative patterns in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R display specific images are displayed in a tentatively stopped manner in this order. That is, as a pre-reading performance during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9AZ, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ, the specific middle decorative pattern 8CZ, and the specific right decorative pattern 8RZ displaying the first specific image are displayed in a tentatively stopped manner. In this way, during the change immediately prior to the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, as a pre-reading effect, all three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed as "red" images, and the specific decorative pattern showing the first specific image is displayed stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(I), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R shift the reserved icon 9A due to the reserved consumption. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific reserved icon 9AZ corresponding to the first reserved item is shifted, and the specific reserved icon 9CZ is displayed at the corresponding reserved position on the right sub-display device 10R. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are used to execute a decorative pattern change performance (changing display) corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9CZ that was the subject of the pre-reading.

After that, as shown in FIG. 135(J), three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed as fixed stops in a jackpot or miss mode. FIG. 135(J) shows a state in which the fixed stops are displayed in the jackpot mode of "777". The above-mentioned pre-reading effect suggests that the expected hit rate is higher than usual in the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT.

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of the decorative pattern pre-reading display performance.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 132 to 135, a first performance can be executed in which a set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, center decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) that is a combination of the same type of decorative symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed by pre-reading during the fluctuation, and the expectation of a win varies depending on the type of decorative symbols that make up the set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, center decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first performance. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 132 to 135, during the next change following the change in which the first effect is executed, a second effect can be executed in which a set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) that is a combination of decorative symbols of the same type as the set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect are temporarily stopped and displayed. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 132 to 135, during the change immediately before the change in which the first effect is executed, a third effect can be executed in which a set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) that is a combination of decorative symbols of the same type as the set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect are temporarily stopped and displayed. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 132 to 135, after the first performance, a set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, center decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) is displayed to indicate a winning or losing combination. This configuration allows the player to enjoy the game visually, and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 132 to 135, a set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, center decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) temporarily displayed in the first performance is a combination of decorative symbols of the same color (blue, red). This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained and can increase the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 132 to 135, a set of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first performance may be a combination of decorative patterns of a first color (blue), or a combination of decorative patterns of a second color (red) different from the first color (blue). When a set of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) is a combination of decorative patterns of the second color (red), the probability of winning is higher than when the set of decorative patterns is a combination of decorative patterns of the first color (blue).

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the decorative pattern pre-reading display performance are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative pattern pre-reading display performance of Figures 132 to 135, a pre-reading performance is performed during the change three times before, two times before, and one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, but for example, a pre-reading performance may be performed during the change two times before and one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, or a pre-reading performance may be performed during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ.
[Modification 2]
In the decorative pattern pre-reading display performance of Figures 132 to 135, a set of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) which is a combination of decorative patterns of the same color are temporarily displayed as a pre-reading performance during the change corresponding to a specific hold icon 9AZ, but this set of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) may be a combination of decorative patterns of the same figures, designs, patterns, letters, etc.
[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern pre-reading display performance of Figures 132 to 135, a set of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) which are a combination of the same blue or red decorative patterns are temporarily displayed as a pre-reading performance during the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, but the colors of the decorative patterns may be colors other than blue and red.
[Modification 4]
In the decorative pattern pre-reading display performance D of Figure 135, a set of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) which are a combination of decorative patterns that are the same red but have different image types are temporarily displayed as a pre-reading performance during the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, but it is sufficient that at least one of the multiple types is a set of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) which is a combination of the same decorative patterns.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C5-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns capable of informing whether or not a win has been obtained,
A first performance can be executed in which the set of decorative patterns, which is a combination of decorative patterns of the same type, is temporarily stopped and displayed by pre-reading during the variation,
The degree of expectation of a win varies depending on the type of decorative symbols constituting the set of decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the first performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C5-1,
During a variation following the variation in which the first performance is executed, a second performance can be executed in which the set of decorative patterns, which is a combination of decorative patterns of the same type as the set of decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the first performance, are temporarily stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C5-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C5-1 or C5-2,
During a variation immediately before the variation in which the first performance is executed, a third performance can be executed in which the set of decorative patterns, which is a combination of decorative patterns of the same type as the set of decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the first performance, are temporarily stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C5-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C5-1 to C5-3,
After the first performance, a fixed stop display is displayed to notify a win or a loss by the set of decorative symbols.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C5-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C5-1 to C5-4,
The set of decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the first performance is a combination of decorative symbols of the same color.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C5-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect C5-5,
The set of decorative symbols temporarily stopped in the first performance may be a combination of decorative symbols of a first color, or a combination of decorative symbols of a second color different from the first color,
When the set of decorative symbols is a combination of decorative symbols of the second color, the probability of winning is higher than when the set of decorative symbols is a combination of decorative symbols of the first color.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative symbol pre-reading effects A to D are described below with reference to Figures 136 to 139. These decorative symbol pre-reading effects can be executed during the decorative symbol variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the decorative symbol pre-reading effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays an image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and on the display screen of the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R). In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the decorative symbol pre-reading effect, it changes the position and inclination of the left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R.

[Decorative pattern pre-reading performance A]
FIG. 136 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol pre-reading performance A. In the decorative symbol pre-reading performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 136 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retreat position (home position). The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, a combination of three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R) that can notify a win or a miss is also called a "set of decorative symbols". On the left sub display device 10L, four reserved icons 9A are displayed in a straight line arranged horizontally. Here, a decorative symbol pre-reading performance in which a specific reserved icon 9AT, which is one reserved icon among the four reserved icons 9A, is pre-read, and a pre-reading performance is executed on the decorative symbol is described. In this embodiment, of the four reserved icons 9A in FIG. 136(A), the fourth reserved icon on the far left is described as a specific reserved icon 9AT. Here, the reserved icon that is the target of the pre-reading among the reserved icons 9A is called the specific reserved icon 9AT.

As shown in FIG. 136(A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four reserved icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line along the horizontal edge of the display screen. On the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the reserved icon 9C is displayed. In FIG. 136(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R stop and display "789", and then the reserved icon 9C disappears (reservation is consumed). As shown in FIG. 136(B), on the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R), the reserved icon 9A is shifted due to the reservation being consumed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the second to fourth reservations is shifted (shifted) one place to the right, and becomes the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first to third reservations. The reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first reservation on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the reserved position on the right sub-display device 10R by the shift movement. This shift movement causes the third reserved icon 9A to become a specific reserved icon 9AT. Then, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to change display.

As shown in FIG. 136(C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, center decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are displayed in a variable manner, and then temporarily stopped in the order of left decorative symbol 8L, right decorative symbol 8R, and center decorative symbol 8C.
By reading ahead the specific reserved icon 9AT of the third reserved, the specific left decorative pattern 8LT is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative pattern 8L. That is, as a pre-reading performance during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9AT, the specific left decorative pattern 8LT with the specific image displayed is temporarily stopped and displayed. This specific image is an image representing a specific object, and here is a smiling face image. Note that the specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. That is, the specific object here includes any manner in which the number of specific objects can be specified when there are multiple specific objects. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative pattern 8LT, the center decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed as usual, with images showing numbers (here, "2" and "6"). After that, the reserved icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R due to the reserved consumption. In this way, during the third change prior to the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, one decorative pattern (left decorative pattern 8L) is displayed stopped as a specific decorative pattern as a pre-reading effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (D), on the sub-display devices 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted due to the hold being consumed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds moves (shifts) one position to the right and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed in the corresponding hold position on the right sub-display device 10R due to the shift movement. This shift movement causes the hold icon 9A for the second hold to become a specific hold icon 9AT. Then, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to change display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed in a temporary stop in the order of left decorative pattern 8L, right decorative pattern 8R, and middle decorative pattern 8C after the display changes. At this time, the specific decorative patterns in which the same specific image is displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a temporary stop in order by the pre-reading of the specific reserved icon 9AT of the second reservation. That is, the specific left decorative pattern 8LT and the specific right decorative pattern 8RT in which a specific image is displayed are displayed in a temporary stop as a pre-reading performance during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9AT. This specific image is the same as the one displayed in the specific left decorative pattern 8LT during the previous change. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative pattern 8LT and the specific right decorative pattern 8RT, an image in which a number (here, "6") is displayed is displayed in the middle decorative pattern 8C as usual. After that, as the reserved amount is consumed, the reserved icon 9C disappears from the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. In this way, during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9AT, two decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed as specific decorative patterns as a pre-reading effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (F), on the sub-display devices 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted due to the hold being consumed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the second hold moves (shifts) one position to the right and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is shifted and displayed at the corresponding hold position on the right sub-display device 10R. Then, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to change display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(G), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed in a fluctuating manner, and then the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C are displayed in a temporarily stopped manner in this order. At this time, the specific decorative patterns in which the same specific images are displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C are displayed in a temporarily stopped manner in order by the pre-reading of the specific reserved icon 9AT of the first reservation. That is, the specific left decorative pattern 8LT, the specific right decorative pattern 8RT, and the specific middle decorative pattern 8CT, each of which displays a specific image, are displayed in a temporarily stopped manner as a pre-reading performance during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9AT. This specific image is the same as that displayed in the specific left decorative pattern 8LT and the specific right decorative pattern 8RT during the previous change. After that, as the reserved amount is consumed, the reserved icon 9C disappears from the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. In this way, during the change immediately before the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9AT, all (three) decorative patterns are displayed as specific decorative patterns as a pre-reading effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (H), the hold icon 9A is shifted on the sub-display devices 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) due to the hold being consumed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the first hold moves (shifts) one position to the right, and the specific hold icon 9CT is displayed in the corresponding hold position on the right sub-display device 10R. Then, a variable display corresponding to the specific hold icon 9CT that was the subject of the look-ahead is started.

In the variation corresponding to the specific pending icon 9CT, the three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the corresponding image CRG is displayed. This corresponding image CRG is an image corresponding to the specific image displayed in the specific decorative pattern as a pre-reading performance. Here, the specific image is a smiling face image, and this corresponding image CRG is also a smiling face image. Note that the corresponding image CRG may be an image corresponding to the specific image, and may not be the same as the specific image. For example, the corresponding image CRG may be an image that expresses the content of the specific image in text, or may be an image in which the shape of the specific image is deformed. The corresponding image CRG may move. After that, as shown in FIG. 136(J), the three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed as a fixed stop in the form of a big win or a miss. FIG. 136(J) shows a state in which the fixed stop is displayed in the form of a big win. The above-mentioned predictive effect suggests that the fluctuations corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT have a higher chance of winning than usual.

[Decorative Design Prediction B]
FIG. 137 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol pre-reading performance B. In the decorative symbol pre-reading performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 137(A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retreat position (home position). The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, a combination of three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R) that can notify a win or a miss is also called a "set of decorative symbols". On the left sub display device 10L, four reserved icons 9A are displayed in a straight line arranged horizontally. Here, a decorative symbol pre-reading performance in which a specific reserved icon 9AT, which is one reserved icon among the four reserved icons 9A, is pre-read, and a pre-reading performance is executed on the decorative symbol is described. In this embodiment, of the four reserved icons 9A in FIG. 137(A), the fourth reserved icon on the far left is described as a specific reserved icon 9AT. Here, the reserved icon that is the target of the pre-reading among the reserved icons 9A is called the specific reserved icon 9AT.

As shown in FIG. 137(A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four reserved icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line along the horizontal edge of the display screen. On the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the reserved icon 9C is displayed. In FIG. 137(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R stop and display "789", and then the reserved icon 9C disappears (reservation is consumed). As shown in FIG. 137(B), in the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R), the reserved icon 9A is shifted due to the reservation being consumed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the second to fourth reservations is shifted (shifted) one place to the right, and becomes the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first to third reservations. The reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first reservation on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the reserved position on the right sub-display device 10R by the shift movement. This shift movement causes the third reserved icon 9A to become a specific reserved icon 9AT. Then, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to change display.

As shown in FIG. 137(C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, center decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are displayed variably, and then temporarily stopped in the order of left decorative symbol 8L, right decorative symbol 8R, and center decorative symbol 8C.
By reading ahead the specific reserved icon 9AT of the third reserved, the specific left decorative pattern 8LT is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative pattern 8L. That is, as a pre-reading performance during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9AT, the specific left decorative pattern 8LT with the specific image displayed is temporarily stopped and displayed. This specific image is an image representing a specific object, and here, it represents a part of the left side of a smiling face image. Note that the specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. That is, the specific object here includes all manners in which the number of specific objects can be specified when there are multiple specific objects. Here, the specific image displayed on the specific left decorative pattern 8LT is also called the "first specific image". After the specific left decorative pattern 8LT is temporarily stopped and displayed, as usual, the center decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with numbers (here, "2" and "6"). After that, the reserved icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R due to the reserved consumption. In this way, during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9AT, a specific decorative pattern is stopped and displayed on one decorative pattern (left decorative pattern 8L) as a pre-reading performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137 (D), on the sub-display devices 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted due to the hold being consumed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds moves (shifts) one position to the right and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed in the corresponding hold position on the right sub-display device 10R due to the shift movement. This shift movement causes the hold icon 9A for the second hold to become a specific hold icon 9AT. Then, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to change display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137(E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed temporarily in the order of left decorative pattern 8L, right decorative pattern 8R, and middle decorative pattern 8C after the display changes. At this time, the specific decorative patterns in which the specific images corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed temporarily in order by the pre-reading of the specific reserved icon 9AT of the second reservation. That is, as a pre-reading performance during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9AT, the specific left decorative pattern 8LT in which the first specific image is displayed and the specific right decorative pattern 8RT in which the second specific image is displayed are displayed temporarily. The first specific image is the same as that displayed in the specific left decorative pattern 8LT during the previous change. The second specific image represents a part of the right side of the smiling face image. After the specific left decorative pattern 8LT and the specific right decorative pattern 8RT are temporarily displayed, the center decorative pattern 8C temporarily displays an image showing a number (here, "6") as usual. After that, as the reserved item is consumed, the reserved icon 9C disappears from the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. In this way, during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9AT, two decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed as specific decorative patterns as a pre-reading performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137 (F), on the sub-display devices 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted due to the hold being consumed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the second hold moves (shifts) one position to the right and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed in the corresponding hold position on the right sub-display device 10R due to the shift movement. Then, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to display changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137(G), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed in a varying manner, and then the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C are displayed in a temporarily stopped manner in this order. At this time, by reading ahead the specific reserved icon 9AT of the first reservation, the specific decorative patterns in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C each show a specific image corresponding to each other are displayed in a temporarily stopped manner in this order. That is, as a pre-reading performance during the variation one time before the variation corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9AT, the specific left decorative pattern 8LT showing the first specific image, the specific right decorative pattern 8RT showing the second specific image, and the specific middle decorative pattern 8CT showing the third specific image are displayed in a temporarily stopped manner. The first and second specific images are the same as those displayed in the specific left decorative pattern 8LT and the specific right decorative pattern 8RT during the previous change. The third specific image represents a central part of a smiling face image. The first, second, and third specific images are lined up to form a single smiling face image. After that, as the hold is consumed, the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. In this way, during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, all (three) decorative patterns are displayed stopped as specific decorative patterns as a pre-reading performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137 (H), on the sub-display devices 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted due to the hold being consumed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the first hold moves (shifts) one position to the right, and the specific hold icon 9CT is displayed in the corresponding hold position on the right sub-display device 10R. Then, a variable display corresponding to the specific hold icon 9CT that was the subject of the look-ahead is started.

In the variation corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9CT, the three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the corresponding image CRG is displayed. This corresponding image CRG is an image corresponding to the specific image displayed in the specific decorative pattern as a look-ahead performance. Here, the specific image is a smiling face image, and this corresponding image CRG is a text image expressed as "Smile!!!". In this way, the corresponding image CRG only needs to be an image corresponding to the specific image, and does not need to be the same as the specific image. After that, as shown in FIG. 137(J), the three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed as a fixed stop in the form of a big win or a miss. In FIG. 137(J), a state in which the fixed stop is displayed in the form of a big win is shown. The above-mentioned look-ahead performance suggests that the variation corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9AT has a higher expectation of a win than usual.

[Decorative Design Prediction C]
FIG. 138 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol pre-reading performance C. In the decorative symbol pre-reading performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 138(A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retreat position (home position). The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, a combination of three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R) that can notify a win or a miss is also called a "set of decorative symbols". On the left sub display device 10L, four reserved icons 9A are displayed in a straight line arranged horizontally. Here, a decorative symbol pre-reading performance in which a specific reserved icon 9AT, which is one reserved icon among the four reserved icons 9A, is pre-read, and a pre-reading performance is executed on the decorative symbol is described. In this embodiment, of the four reserved icons 9A in FIG. 138(A), the fourth reserved icon on the far left is described as a specific reserved icon 9AT. Here, the reserved icon that is the target of the pre-reading among the reserved icons 9A is called the specific reserved icon 9AT.

As shown in FIG. 138(A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four reserved icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line along the horizontal edge of the display screen. On the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the reserved icon 9C is displayed. In FIG. 138(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R stop and display "789", and then the reserved icon 9C disappears (reservation is consumed). As shown in FIG. 138(B), in the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R), the reserved icon 9A is shifted due to the reservation being consumed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the second to fourth reservations is shifted (shifted) one place to the right, and becomes the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first to third reservations. The reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first reservation on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the reserved position on the right sub-display device 10R by the shift movement. This shift movement causes the third reserved icon 9A to become a specific reserved icon 9AT. Then, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to change display.

As shown in FIG. 138(C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, center decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are displayed variably, and then temporarily stopped in the order of left decorative symbol 8L, right decorative symbol 8R, and center decorative symbol 8C.
By reading ahead the specific reserved icon 9AT of the third reserved, the specific left decorative pattern 8LT is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative pattern 8L. That is, as a pre-reading performance during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9AT, the specific left decorative pattern 8LT with the specific image displayed is temporarily stopped and displayed. This specific image is an image representing a specific object, and here, it is a character image representing the hiragana "ma". Note that the specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. That is, the specific object here includes all manners in which the number of specific objects can be specified when there are multiple specific objects. Here, the specific image displayed on the specific left decorative pattern 8LT is also called the "first specific image". After the specific left decorative pattern 8LT is temporarily stopped and displayed, as usual, the center decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with numbers (here, "2" and "6"). After that, the reserved icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R due to the reserved consumption. In this way, during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9AT, a specific decorative pattern is stopped and displayed on one decorative pattern (left decorative pattern 8L) as a pre-reading performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (D), on the sub-display devices 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted due to the hold being consumed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds moves (shifts) one position to the right and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed in the corresponding hold position on the right sub-display device 10R due to the shift movement. This shift movement causes the hold icon 9A for the second hold to become a specific hold icon 9AT. Then, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to change display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138(E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed in a temporary stop in the order of left decorative pattern 8L, right decorative pattern 8R, and middle decorative pattern 8C after the display changes. At this time, the specific decorative patterns in which the specific images corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a temporary stop are displayed in order by the pre-reading of the specific reserved icon 9AT of the second reservation. That is, as a pre-reading performance during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9AT, the specific left decorative pattern 8LT in which the first specific image is displayed and the specific right decorative pattern 8RT in which the second specific image is displayed are displayed in a temporary stop. The first specific image is the same as the one displayed on the specific left decorative pattern 8LT during the previous change. The second specific image is a character image representing the hiragana character "ka". After the specific left decorative pattern 8LT and the specific right decorative pattern 8RT are temporarily displayed, the center decorative pattern 8C temporarily displays an image showing a number (here, "6") as usual. After that, as the reserved item is consumed, the reserved icon 9C disappears from the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. In this way, during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9AT, two decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed as specific decorative patterns as a pre-reading performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (F), on the sub-display devices 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted due to the hold being consumed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the second hold moves (shifts) one position to the right and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is shifted and displayed at the corresponding hold position on the right sub-display device 10R. Then, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R start to change display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138(G), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed in a varying manner, and then the left decorative pattern 8L, right decorative pattern 8R, and middle decorative pattern 8C are displayed in a temporarily stopped manner in this order. At this time, by reading ahead the specific reserved icon 9AT of the first reservation, the specific decorative patterns in which the left decorative pattern 8L, right decorative pattern 8R, and middle decorative pattern 8C each show a specific image corresponding to each other are displayed in a temporarily stopped manner in this order. That is, as a pre-reading performance during the variation one time before the variation corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9AT, the specific left decorative pattern 8LT showing the first specific image, the specific right decorative pattern 8RT showing the second specific image, and the specific middle decorative pattern 8CT showing the third specific image are displayed in a temporarily stopped manner. The first and second specific images are the same as those displayed in the specific left decorative pattern 8LT and the specific right decorative pattern 8RT during the previous change. The third specific image is a character image representing the hiragana character "sa". The first, second, and third specific images are lined up to form a word with the meaning of "No way". After that, as the reserved item is consumed, the reserved icon 9C disappears from the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. In this way, during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9AT, all (three) decorative patterns are displayed as stopped specific decorative patterns as a pre-reading effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (H), the hold icon 9A is shifted on the sub-display devices 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) due to the hold being consumed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the first hold moves (shifts) one position to the right, and the specific hold icon 9CT is displayed in the corresponding hold position on the right sub-display device 10R. Then, a variable display corresponding to the specific hold icon 9CT that was the subject of the look-ahead is started.

In the variation corresponding to the specific pending icon 9CT, the three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the corresponding image CRG is displayed. This corresponding image CRG is an image corresponding to the specific image displayed in the specific decorative pattern as a pre-reading performance. Here, the specific image is a character image of "No way", and this corresponding image CRG is a character image expressed as "No way!!!". Note that the corresponding image CRG may be an image corresponding to the specific image, and may not be the same as the specific image. For example, the corresponding image CRG may be a character having the same meaning as the content of the specific image, or may be one in which the font has been changed or converted into Roman letters or katakana. After that, as shown in FIG. 138(J), the three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed in a fixed stop in the form of a big win or a miss. FIG. 138(J) shows a state where the definitive stop display is in the form of a jackpot. The above-mentioned look-ahead effect suggests that the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT has a higher probability of winning than usual.

[Decorative pattern pre-reading performance D]
FIG. 139 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol pre-reading performance D. In the decorative symbol pre-reading performance D, first, as shown in FIG. 139 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retreat position (home position). The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, a combination of three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R) that can notify a win or a miss is also called a "set of decorative symbols". On the left sub display device 10L, four reserved icons 9A are displayed in a straight line arranged horizontally. Here, a decorative symbol pre-reading performance in which a specific reserved icon 9AT, which is one reserved icon among the four reserved icons 9A, is pre-read, and a pre-reading performance is executed on the decorative symbol is described. In this embodiment, of the four reserved icons 9A in FIG. 139(A), the fourth reserved icon on the far left is described as a specific reserved icon 9AT. Here, the reserved icon that is the target of the pre-reading among the reserved icons 9A is called the specific reserved icon 9AT.

As shown in FIG. 139(A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four reserved icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line along the horizontal edge of the display screen. On the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the reserved icon 9C is displayed. In FIG. 139(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R stop and display "789", and then the reserved icon 9C disappears (reservation is consumed). As shown in FIG. 139(B), on the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R), the reserved icon 9A is shifted due to the reservation being consumed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the second to fourth reservations is shifted (shifted) one place to the right, and becomes the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first to third reservations. The reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first reservation on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the reserved position on the right sub-display device 10R by the shift movement. This shift movement causes the third reserved icon 9A to become a specific reserved icon 9AT. Then, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to change display.

As shown in FIG. 139(C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, center decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are displayed in a variable manner, and then temporarily stopped in the order of left decorative symbol 8L, right decorative symbol 8R, and center decorative symbol 8C.
By reading ahead the specific reserved icon 9AT of the third reserved, the specific left decorative pattern 8LT is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative pattern 8L. That is, as a pre-reading performance during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9AT, the specific left decorative pattern 8LT with the specific image displayed is temporarily stopped and displayed. This specific image is an image representing a specific object, and here, it is a character image representing "No way!!!". Note that the specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes any manner in which the number of specific objects can be specified when there are multiple specific objects. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative pattern 8LT, the center decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed as usual, with images representing numbers (here, "2" and "6"). After that, the reserved icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R due to the reserved consumption. In this way, during the third change prior to the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, a specific image is displayed on one decorative pattern (left decorative pattern 8L) as a pre-reading effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (D), on the sub-display devices 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted due to the hold being consumed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds moves (shifts) one position to the right and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed in the corresponding hold position on the right sub-display device 10R due to the shift movement. This shift movement causes the hold icon 9A for the second hold to become a specific hold icon 9AT. Then, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to change display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed in a fluctuating manner, and then the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C are displayed in a tentatively stopped manner in this order. At this time, the specific decorative patterns in which the same specific image is displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a tentatively stopped manner in order by the pre-reading of the specific reserved icon 9AT of the second reservation. That is, the specific left decorative pattern 8LT and the specific right decorative pattern 8RT, each of which displays a specific image, are displayed in a tentatively stopped manner as a pre-reading performance during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9AT. This specific image is the same as that displayed in the specific left decorative pattern 8LT during the previous change. After the tentatively stopped display of the specific left decorative pattern 8LT and the specific right decorative pattern 8RT, an image in which a number (here, "6") is displayed is displayed in a tentatively stopped manner in the middle decorative pattern 8C as usual. After that, as the reserved amount is consumed, the reserved icon 9C disappears from the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. In this way, during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9AT, two decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed as specific decorative patterns as a pre-reading effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (F), on the sub-display devices 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted due to the hold being consumed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the second hold moves (shifts) one position to the right and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed in the corresponding hold position on the right sub-display device 10R due to the shift movement. Then, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to display changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(G), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed in a temporary stop in the order of left decorative pattern 8L, right decorative pattern 8R, and middle decorative pattern 8C after the display changes. At this time, the specific decorative patterns in which the same specific image is displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L, right decorative pattern 8R, and middle decorative pattern 8C are displayed in a temporary stop in order by the pre-reading of the specific reserved icon 9AT of the first reservation. That is, the specific left decorative pattern 8LT, the specific right decorative pattern 8RT, and the specific middle decorative pattern 8CT, each of which displays a specific image, are displayed in a temporary stop as a pre-reading performance during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9AT. This specific image is the same as the one that was temporarily displayed in the specific left decorative pattern 8LT and the specific right decorative pattern 8RT during the previous change. After that, as the reserved amount is consumed, the reserved icon 9C disappears from the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. In this way, during the change immediately before the change corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9AT, all (three) decorative patterns are displayed as specific decorative patterns as a pre-reading effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (H), on the sub-display devices 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted due to the hold being consumed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the first hold moves (shifts) one position to the right, and the specific hold icon 9CT is displayed in the corresponding hold position on the right sub-display device 10R. Then, a variable display corresponding to the specific hold icon 9CT that was the subject of the look-ahead is started.

In the variation corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9CT, the three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the corresponding image CRG is displayed. This corresponding image CRG is an image corresponding to the specific image displayed in the specific decorative pattern as a pre-reading performance. Here, the specific image is a character image representing "No way!!!", and this corresponding image CRG is also a character image representing "No way!!!". Note that the corresponding image CRG may be an image corresponding to the specific image, and may not be the same as the specific image. For example, the corresponding image CRG may be a character having the same meaning as the content of the specific image, or may be one in which the font has been changed or converted into Roman letters or katakana. After that, as shown in FIG. 139(J), the three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed in a fixed stop state in the form of a big win or a miss. FIG. 139(J) shows a state where the definitive stop display is in the form of a jackpot. The above-mentioned look-ahead effect suggests that the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT has a higher probability of winning than usual.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the decorative pattern pre-reading performance.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 136 to 139, a first effect is executed in which a specific decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as at least one of a set of decorative symbols by pre-reading during the change, and a second effect is executed in which a corresponding image CRG corresponding to the specific image displayed in the specific decorative symbol is displayed during the change corresponding to the pre-reading after the first effect. This configuration can visually entertain the player and increase the interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 136 to 139, during the next change following the change in which the first effect is executed, a third effect can be executed in which a greater number of specific decorative symbols are temporarily stopped than the number of specific decorative symbols temporarily stopped in the first effect. This configuration can provide visual entertainment to the player, and can increase the player's interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 136 to 139, during the change immediately before the change in which the first effect is executed, a fourth effect can be executed in which a number of specific decorative symbols that is less than the number of specific decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect are temporarily stopped and displayed. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, after the second performance, a set of decorative symbols is displayed as a fixed stop display to notify a win or a loss, as shown in Figures 136 to 139. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 138 to 139, the specific decorative pattern includes an image showing a predetermined character, and in the second performance, an image with the same content as the predetermined character is displayed. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be enhanced.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the third performance, all of the decorative symbols in a set become specific decorative symbols and are temporarily stopped and displayed, as shown in Figures 136 to 139. This configuration allows the player to visually enjoy the game, and can increase the player's interest.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the decorative pattern pre-reading performance are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative pattern pre-reading performances A to D, the number of specific decorative patterns is increased by one for each variable performance, from "0", "1", "2", to "3". However, the number of specific decorative patterns may be increased in any manner. For example, after FIG. 138(B), FIG. 138(E) may be executed without executing FIG. 138(C) and (D). In this case, the number of specific decorative patterns increases to "0", "2", and "3". Also, after FIG. 138(B), FIG. 138(G) may be executed without executing FIG. 138(C) to (F). In this case, the number of specific decorative patterns increases to "0" and "3". The same applies to FIG. 136, FIG. 137, and FIG. 139.

[Modification 2]
The decorative pattern pre-reading performances A to D have been described as pre-reading performances of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to special chart 1, but the decorative pattern pre-reading performance may also be executed as a pre-reading performance of the reserved icon 9B corresponding to special chart 2.

[Modification 3]
The contents of the specific images may be changed according to the difference in the expectation of the big win for the decorative pattern pre-reading effects A to D. For example, the expectation of the big win may be higher for the pre-reading effect of FIG. 137 than for the pre-reading effect of FIG. 136.

[Modification 4]
In the decorative pattern pre-reading performances A to D, the specific decorative pattern does not have to be displayed in the order of the left decorative pattern, the right decorative pattern, and the center decorative pattern. For example, the specific decorative pattern may be displayed first in the center decorative pattern, and in the next change, the center decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern become the specific decorative pattern, and finally, all three may become the specific decorative pattern.

[Modification 5]
The decorative pattern pre-reading performances A to D may end midway. For example, after Fig. 138(A) to (F), Fig. 138(A) may be executed again instead of Fig. 138(G).

[Modification 6]
The contents of the decorative pattern pre-reading effects A to D may be appropriately combined. In addition, the decorative pattern pre-reading effects A to D may not include some of the effects described above, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect C6-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns capable of informing whether or not a win has been obtained,
A first effect in which a specific decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed as at least one decorative pattern among the set of decorative patterns by pre-reading during the change;
A second effect in which an image corresponding to the image shown in the specific decorative pattern is displayed during the variation corresponding to the pre-reading after the first effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect C6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C6-1,
A third performance can be executed in which a number of the specific decorative symbols tentatively displayed is greater than the number of the specific decorative symbols tentatively displayed in the first performance during a fluctuation following the fluctuation in which the first performance is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect C6-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C6-1 or C6-2,
A fourth performance can be executed in which a number of the specific decorative symbols tentatively displayed is smaller than the number of the specific decorative symbols tentatively displayed in the first performance during a fluctuation immediately before the fluctuation in which the first performance is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect C6-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C6-1 to C6-3,
After the second performance, a fixed stop display is displayed to notify a win or a loss by the set of decorative symbols.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect C6-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C6-1 to C6-4,
The specific decorative pattern includes an image representing a predetermined character,
In the second performance, an image having the same content as the predetermined characters is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect C6-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect C6-2,
In the third performance, all of the set of decorative symbols become the specific decorative symbols and are temporarily stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The operation image tilt display effects A to D are described below with reference to Figures 140 to 143. These operation image tilt display effects can be executed during the decorative pattern variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the operation image tilt display effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays an image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and on the display screen of the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R). In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the operation image tilt display effect, it changes the position and tilt of the left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R.

[Operation image tilt display effect A]
140 is a diagram for explaining the operation image tilt display performance A. In the operation image tilt display performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 140(A), the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the The right sub-display device 10R is located in the retreat position (home position). During the variable display, the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears, and the message "Erase the smile!!" appears on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The opening image OPG is displayed with the message "Win!" This opening image OPG is a game effect in which the player operates the effect button 63 to erase all the button images within the time limit. It is displayed at the start. In addition, the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 may display a change display of the decorative pattern, and the sub display device 10 may display a hold icon 9A. .

As shown in FIG. 140(B), when the game presentation starts, the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The specific image is an image representing a specific object, and in this case, it is a smiling face image. The specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes any manner in which the number of specific objects can be specified when there are multiple specific objects. Here, the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2 are the same image, but may be different images (e.g., a smiling face and a crying face). When the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2 are displayed, the inclinations of the images are different from each other. After that, the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2 are displayed in a state in which they are rotated left and right so that the inclination of the image changes while maintaining the inclinations of the images different from each other. After that, as shown in FIG. 140(C), the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2 move so that their display positions change on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 while maintaining the different image inclinations.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140(D), a switching effect is executed. The switching effect is an effect in which a plurality of specific images TG are simultaneously switched to the button image BTN. Specifically, the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2 are simultaneously illuminated, and the first effect image EF1 and the second effect image EF2 are displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 140(E), when the first effect image EF1 and the second effect image EF2 disappear, the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 are simultaneously displayed in their place, respectively. That is, the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2 are simultaneously illuminated and simultaneously switched to the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2. The first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 are images that respectively represent the appearance of the effect button 63, and are the same image here. When the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 are displayed simultaneously, the inclination of the images is the same as that of the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2. Therefore, when the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 are displayed simultaneously, the inclinations of the images are different from each other. Note that the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 may have different image sizes and shapes. When the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 are displayed in a state where they are rotated left and right so that the inclination of the images changes while maintaining the inclinations of the images different from each other. After that, as shown in FIG. 140(F), the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 move so that their display positions change on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 while maintaining the different image inclinations.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140(G), after the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 stop at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, an operation prompting image SPG saying "Hit it!!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The operation prompting image SPG is an image that encourages the player to operate the effect button 63, since the current operation period of the effect button 63 is valid. When the player operates the effect button 63, a button image disappearance effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 140(H) and FIG. 140(I). The button image disappearance effect is an effect in which multiple button images disappear in sequence on the main display device 7. Here, the button images BTN explode one by one in sequence according to the number of times the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), and are switched to an explosion image EX. Here, first, the second button image BTN2 is switched to the second explosion image EX2, and then the first button image BTN1 is switched to the first explosion image EX1. After the explosion image EX is displayed, a smoke image KM representing the smoke after the explosion is displayed, and then the display disappears from the main display device 7. In FIG. 140(I), the second smoke image KM2 is displayed after the second explosion image EX2. In this way, the button images BTN explode one by one in sequence according to the number of times the performance button 63 is operated (pressed), and when all of them have exploded, three decorative patterns are displayed and then stopped as shown in FIG. 140(J). Here, they are stopped and displayed in the form of a big win. It should be noted that the decorative patterns may also be stopped and displayed in the form of a loss.

[Operation image tilt display effect B]
141 is a diagram for explaining the operation image tilt display performance B. In the operation image tilt display performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 141(A), the sub-display device 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10L) The right sub-display device 10R is located in the retreat position (home position). During the variable display, the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears, and the message "Erase the smile!!" appears on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The opening image OPG is displayed with the message "Win!" This opening image OPG is a game effect in which the player operates the effect button 63 to erase all the button images within the time limit. It is displayed at the start. In addition, the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 may display a change display of the decorative pattern, and the sub display device 10 may display a hold icon 9A. .

As shown in FIG. 141(B), when the game presentation starts, the first specific image TG1, the second specific image TG2, the third specific image TG3, and the fourth specific image TG4 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The specific image is an image that represents a specific object, and in this case, it is a smiling face image. Note that the specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes any form in which the number of specific objects can be specified when there are multiple specific objects. Here, the first to fourth specific images TG1 to TG4 are all the same image, but they may be different images from each other (for example, a smiling face and a crying face). When the first to fourth specific images TG1 to TG4 are displayed, the inclination of the image is randomly different. After that, the first to fourth specific images TG1 to TG4 are displayed in a state where they are rotated left and right so that the inclination of the image changes randomly.

Next, as shown in Figures 141 (C) to 141 (E), a switching effect is executed. The switching effect is an effect in which multiple specific images TG randomly switch to button images BTN or select button images SKB. Here, first, as shown in Figure 141 (C), the second specific image TG2 and the third specific image TG3 simultaneously switch to the second select button image SKB2 and the third button image BTN3. The second select button image SKB2 is an image that represents the appearance of the select button 68. The third button image BTN3 is an image that represents the appearance of the effect button 63. When the second select button image SKB2 and the third button image BTN3 are displayed simultaneously, the inclinations of the images are different from each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (D), the first specific image TG1 switches to the first button image BTN1. The first button image BTN1 is an image that represents the appearance of the performance button 63, and is the same image as the third button image BTN3. When the first button image BTN1 is displayed, the inclination of the image is different from that of the third button image BTN3. Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (E), the fourth specific image TG4 switches to the fourth select button image SKB4. The fourth select button image SKB4 is an image that represents the appearance of the select button 68, and is the same image as the second select button image SKB2. When the fourth select button image SKB4 is displayed, the inclination of the image is different from that of the second select button image SKB2. The first button image BTN1, the second select button image SKB2, the third button image BTN3, and the fourth select button image SKB4 are displayed frozen with the inclination of the image different from one another. Note that these may not be frozen, but may be displayed rotated left and right so that the inclination of the image changes while maintaining the different inclination of the image from one another.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141(F), an operation prompting image SPG with the words "Hit it!!" is displayed at the top of the display screen 7a. The operation prompting image SPG is an image that encourages the player to operate the effect button 63 and the select button 68, since the current operation period for the effect button 63 and the select button 68 is valid. When the player operates the effect button 63 and the select button 68, a button image disappearance effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 141(G) to FIG. 141(I). The button image disappearance effect is an effect in which multiple button images (button image BTN and select button image SKB) randomly disappear on the main display device 7. Here, in response to the operation (pressing) of the select button 68, the select button images SKB explode all at once, as shown in FIG. 141(G), and switch to explosion images EX2 and EX4. After the explosion images EX2 and EX4 are displayed, smoke images KM2 and KM4 representing smoke after the explosion are displayed as shown in FIG. 141(H), and then disappear from the main display device 7. Also, depending on the number of times the performance button 63 is operated (pressed), the button images BTN explode one by one in order and switch to the explosion image EX. Here, as shown in FIG. 141(H), first, the third button image BTN3 switches to the third explosion image EX3, and then, as shown in FIG. 141(I), the first button image BTN1 switches to the first explosion image EX1. After the explosion image EX is displayed, a smoke image KM representing smoke after the explosion is displayed, and then disappears from the main display device 7. In FIG. 141(I), the third smoke image KM3 is displayed after the third explosion image EX3. In this way, in response to the operation (pressing) of the effect button 63 and the select button 68, the button image BTN and the select button image SKB explode, and when they all explode, three decorative symbols are displayed as shown in FIG. 141 (J), and then are displayed still. Here, they are displayed as a jackpot. The decorative symbols may also be displayed as a loss.

[Operation image tilt display effect C]
142 is a diagram for explaining the operation image tilt display performance C. In the operation image tilt display performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 142(A), the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10L) The right sub-display device 10R is located in the retreat position (home position). During the variable display, the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears, and the message "Erase the smile!!" appears on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The opening image OPG is displayed with the message "Win!" This opening image OPG is a game effect in which the player operates the effect button 63 to erase all the button images within the time limit. It is displayed at the start. In addition, the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 may display a change display of the decorative pattern, and the sub display device 10 may display a hold icon 9A. .

As shown in FIG. 142(B), when the game presentation starts, the first specific image TG1, the second specific image TG2, the third specific image TG3, the fourth specific image TG4, the fifth specific image TG5, the sixth specific image TG6, the seventh specific image TG7, and the eighth specific image TG8 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R). The specific image is an image that represents a specific object, and in this case, it is a smiling face image. Note that the specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes all manners in which the number of specific objects can be specified when there are multiple specific objects. Here, the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are all the same image, but they may also be different images from each other (for example, a smiling face and a crying face). The first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are displayed in a ring shape across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. When displayed, the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are each tilted so that the bottom of the face image faces the center of the ring. In other words, when displayed, the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are displayed with the image tilts different from each other. After that, as shown in FIG. 142(C), the color of the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 randomly changes while maintaining the image tilts different from each other.

Next, as shown in Fig. 142 (D), a switching effect is executed. The switching effect is an effect in which a plurality of specific images TG are simultaneously switched to button images BTN. Specifically, the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 each emit light at the same time, and the first effect image EF1, the second effect image EF2, the third effect image EF3, the fourth effect image EF4, the fifth effect image EF5, the sixth effect image EF6, the seventh effect image EF7, and the eighth effect image EF8 are displayed. 142(E), when the first to eighth effect images EF1 to EF8 disappear, the first button image BTN1, the second button image BTN2, the third button image BTN3, the fourth button image BTN4, the fifth button image BTN5, the sixth button image BTN6, the seventh button image BTN7, and the eighth button image BTN8 are displayed at the same time in their places. That is, the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 emit light at the same time and are switched to the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 all at once (simultaneously). The first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are images that respectively show the appearance of the effect button 63, and are the same image here. The first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed in a ring shape across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. When the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed simultaneously, the inclination of the images is the same as the inclination of the corresponding first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8. Therefore, when the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed simultaneously, the inclination of the images is different from one another. Note that the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 may have different image sizes and shapes. When the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, as shown in FIG. 142(F), the color of the images of the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 randomly changes while maintaining the different inclination of the images.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142(G), the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed in a ring across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, and then an operation prompting image SPG with the message "Hit it!" is displayed in the center of the ring. The operation prompting image SPG is an image that encourages the player to operate the effect button 63, since the current operation period for the effect button 63 is valid. When the player operates the effect button 63, a button image disappearance effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 142(H) and FIG. 142(I). The button image disappearance effect is an effect in which multiple button images disappear in sequence on the main display device 7. Here, the ring-shaped button images BTN explode one by one in sequence according to the number of times the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), and switch to an explosion image EX. Here, the first button image BTN1, the second button image BTN2, the third button image BTN3, the fourth button image BTN4, the fifth button image BTN5, the sixth button image BTN6, the seventh button image BTN7, and the eighth button image BTN8 are switched to the first explosion image EX1, the second explosion image EX2, the third explosion image EX3, the fourth explosion image EX4, the fifth explosion image EX5, the sixth explosion image EX6, the seventh explosion image EX7, and the eighth explosion image EX8 in order, and disappear from the main display device 7 in order. In this way, the button images BTN explode one by one in accordance with the number of times the performance button 63 is operated (pressed), and when all of them have exploded, three decorative patterns are displayed and then stopped as shown in FIG. 142 (J). Here, they are stopped and displayed in the form of a big win. The decorative patterns may also be stopped and displayed in the form of a loss.

[Operation image tilt display effect D]
143 is a diagram for explaining the operation image tilt display performance D. In the operation image tilt display performance D, first, as shown in FIG. 143(A), the sub-display device 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10L) The right sub-display device 10R is located in the retreat position (home position). During the variable display, the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears, and the message "Erase the smile!!" appears on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The opening image OPG is displayed with the message "Win!" This opening image OPG is a game effect in which the player operates the effect button 63 to erase all the button images within the time limit. It is displayed at the start. In addition, the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 may display a change display of the decorative pattern, and the sub display device 10 may display a hold icon 9A. .

As shown in FIG. 143(B), when the game presentation starts, the first specific image TG1, the second specific image TG2, the third specific image TG3, the fourth specific image TG4, the fifth specific image TG5, the sixth specific image TG6, the seventh specific image TG7, and the eighth specific image TG8 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The specific image is an image representing a specific object, and in this case, it is a smiling face image. Note that the specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes any manner in which the number of specific objects can be specified when there are multiple specific objects. Here, the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are all the same image, but may be different images from each other (for example, a smiling face and a crying face). The first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are displayed in a circular arrangement on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. When the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are displayed, they are each tilted so that the bottom of the face image faces the center of the lined up rings. In other words, when the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are displayed, the images are displayed with different inclinations. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 143(C), the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are enlarged and displayed while expanding the rings, and are displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub-display device 10 in a state where the inclination of the images changes while maintaining the different inclinations of the images.

Next, as shown in Fig. 143 (D), a switching effect is executed. The switching effect is an effect in which a plurality of specific images TG are simultaneously switched to button images BTN. Specifically, the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 each emit light at the same time, and the first effect image EF1, the second effect image EF2, the third effect image EF3, the fourth effect image EF4, the fifth effect image EF5, the sixth effect image EF6, the seventh effect image EF7, and the eighth effect image EF8 are displayed. 143(E), when the first to eighth effect images EF1 to EF8 disappear, the first button image BTN1, the second button image BTN2, the third button image BTN3, the fourth button image BTN4, the fifth button image BTN5, the sixth button image BTN6, the seventh button image BTN7, and the eighth button image BTN8 are displayed at the same time in their places. That is, the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 emit light at the same time and are switched to the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 all at once (simultaneously). The first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are images that respectively show the appearance of the performance button 63, and are the same image here. The first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed in a ring shape across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. When the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed simultaneously, the inclination of the images is the same as that of the corresponding first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8. Therefore, when the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed simultaneously, the inclination of the images is different from one another. Note that the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 may have different image sizes and shapes. When the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, as shown in FIG. 143(F), the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 move and rotate randomly left and right while maintaining the randomly different inclination of the images, and the color of the images changes randomly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(G), the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are again displayed in a ring across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, and then an operation prompting image SPG with the message "Hit it!" is displayed in the center of the ring. The operation prompting image SPG is an image that encourages the player to operate the effect button 63, since the current operation period for the effect button 63 is valid. When the player operates the effect button 63, a button image disappearance effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 143(H) and FIG. 143(I). The button image disappearance effect is an effect in which multiple button images disappear in sequence on the main display device 7. Here, the ring-shaped button images BTN explode one by one in sequence according to the number of times the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), and switch to an explosion image EX. Here, the first button image BTN1, the second button image BTN2, the third button image BTN3, the fourth button image BTN4, the fifth button image BTN5, the sixth button image BTN6, the seventh button image BTN7, and the eighth button image BTN8 are switched to the first explosion image EX1, the second explosion image EX2, the third explosion image EX3, the fourth explosion image EX4, the fifth explosion image EX5, the sixth explosion image EX6, the seventh explosion image EX7, and the eighth explosion image EX8 in order, and disappear from the main display device 7 in order. In this way, the button images BTN explode one by one in accordance with the number of times the performance button 63 is operated (pressed), and when all of them have exploded, three decorative patterns are displayed and then stopped as shown in FIG. 143 (J). Here, they are stopped and displayed in the form of a big win. The decorative patterns may also be stopped and displayed in the form of a loss.

[Example of effect]
An example of the effect of the tilted display of the operation image is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 140(E), 142(E), and 143(E), it is possible to execute a display effect in which a plurality of button images BTN are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and in this display effect, the inclinations of the plurality of button images BTN are different from one another. This configuration can provide visual entertainment to the player, and can increase the player's interest.
In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 141 (C), a display effect can be executed in which a plurality of button images (button image BTN and select button image SKB) are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and in this display effect, the inclinations of the plurality of button images (button image BTN and select button image SKB) are different from each other. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be enhanced.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 140(E), 142(E), and 143(E), in the display performance, the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is switched from a state in which the plurality of button images BTN are not displayed to a state in which all of the plurality of operation means images are displayed at once. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 140(C)-(E), 142(C)-(E), and 143(C)-(E), in the display performance, from a state in which a plurality of specific images TG are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, all of the plurality of specific images TG are simultaneously switched to button images BTN. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and can increase the player's interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the display performance, a plurality of specific images TG are displayed in a circular arrangement as shown in Figures 142 and 143. This configuration can provide visual entertainment to the player, and can enhance the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, after the display effect, a disappearance effect can be executed in which a plurality of button images BTN disappear in sequence, as shown in Figures 140 to 143. This configuration can provide visual entertainment to the player, thereby enhancing the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 140 to 143, the disappearance effect is executed in response to the player's operation of the effect button 63. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and increases the player's interest.

[Modification]
The following describes modified examples of the operation image tilt display presentation.
[Modification 1]
In the operation image tilt display effects C to D in Figures 142 and 143, an image is not displayed inside the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 arranged in a ring shape. However, an image may be displayed inside the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 arranged in a ring shape. And, for example, when the game is successful, the image may change.

[Modification 2]
In the operation image tilt display effects A to D, the game effects when the game is successful have been described. Therefore, when the game is unsuccessful, different effects may be executed. For example, in FIG. 142, if the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 do not all disappear within a predetermined period, a decorative symbol of a losing combination may be stopped and displayed.

[Modification 3]
The number of specific images and button images shown in the operation image tilt display effects A to D is merely an example, and a different number of specific images and button images may be displayed.

[Modification 4]
In the operation image tilt display effects A to D, the button image disappearance effect may be executed even if the player does not operate the effect button 63. In other words, the button images may be switched to the explosion image EX in sequence even if the player does not operate the effect button 63.

[Modification 5]
In the operation image tilt display performances A to D, the operation prompting image SPG may be a character other than "Hit it!!" For example, the operation prompting image SPG may be a character other than "Hit it!!" In addition, the opening image OPG may be a character other than "Erase the smile!!!" For example, the opening image OPG may be a character other than "Succeed in the mission!!!".

[Modification 6]
The contents of the operation image tilt display effects A to D may be appropriately combined. In addition, the operation image tilt display effects A to D may not include some of the effects described above, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect D1-1]
An operation means operable by a player;
A gaming machine including a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is an operation means image representing the operation means;
A display effect in which a plurality of images of the operation means are displayed on the display means is executed,
In the display performance, the inclinations of the plurality of operation means images are different from each other.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1,
In the display performance, the display unit is switched from a state in which the plurality of operation means images are not displayed to a state in which all of the plurality of operation means images are displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-2,
one of the plurality of types of images is a specific image representing a specific object;
In the display performance, from a state in which the plurality of specific images are displayed on the display means, all of the plurality of specific images are simultaneously switched to the operation means image,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D1-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-1 to D1-3,
In the display performance, the plurality of operation means images are displayed in a circular arrangement.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D1-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-1 to D1-4,
After the display effect, a disappearance effect can be executed in which the plurality of operation means images disappear in sequence.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-5,
The disappearance effect is executed in response to the operation of the operation means by the player.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative symbol button stop effects A to D are explained below using Figures 144 to 147. These decorative symbol button stop effects can be executed during decorative symbol variation effects. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a character display effect, it reads corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays images on the display screen 7a, the left sub-display device 10L, the right sub-display device 10R, the illumination panel 18, etc. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is located closer to the player than the display screen 7a and the sub-display device 10.

[Decorative pattern button stop effect A]
FIG. 144 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol button stop performance A. In the decorative symbol button stop performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 144 (A), a decorative symbol change performance is performed on the reach line LN. In this decorative symbol change performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol change performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (B), button display performance 1 is performed. In button display performance 1, while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing, a button image ZF1 representing the performance button 63 is displayed. This button image ZF1 is displayed at a position above the changing area of the decorative pattern 8L so as to correspond to the decorative pattern 8L. This allows the player to know that the button image ZF1 and the decorative pattern 8L are associated with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(C), button press performance 1 is performed. In this button press performance 1, the decorative pattern 8L is displayed stopped on the reach line LN when the player sees the button image ZF1 and presses the performance button 63. In this figure, the decorative pattern 8L is a "6" symbol that is displayed stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (D), button display presentation 2 is performed. In this button display presentation 2, while the decorative patterns 8C and 8R are changing, the button image ZF1 representing the presentation button 63 is displayed again. This button image ZF1 is displayed at a position on the changing area of the decorative pattern 8C so as to correspond to the decorative pattern 8C. This allows the player to know that the button image ZF1 and the decorative pattern 8C are associated with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (E), button press effect 2 is performed. In this button press effect 2, the decorative pattern 8C is displayed as stopped when the player presses the effect button 63 after seeing the button image ZF1. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C is displayed as stopped at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, the decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a "7" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (F), button display presentation 3 is performed. In this button display presentation 3, while the decorative pattern 8R is changing, the button image ZF1 representing the presentation button 63 is displayed again. This button image ZF1 is displayed in the position of the changing area above the decorative pattern 8C so as to correspond to the decorative pattern 8R. This allows the player to know that the button image ZF1 and the decorative pattern 8R are associated with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (G), button press performance 3 is performed. In this button press performance 3, the decorative pattern 8R is displayed as stopped when the player who has seen the button image ZF1 presses the performance button 63. In this case, the decorative pattern 8R is displayed as stopped next to the decorative pattern 8C at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, the decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a "7" symbol.

Next, as shown in Fig. 144 (H), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and a reach display is performed in which the decorative symbol 8C changes at high speed. In this reach effect, the character CRZE performs various effects.
After this reach effect, a losing symbol or a big win symbol is displayed.

[Decorative pattern button stop effect B]
FIG. 145 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol button stop performance B. In the decorative symbol button stop performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 145 (A), a decorative symbol change performance is performed on the reach line LN. In this decorative symbol change performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol change performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(B), button display performance 1 is performed. In this button display performance 1, while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing, three button images ZF1, ZF2, and ZF3 representing the performance button 63 are displayed. The button image ZF1 is displayed in a position above the changing area of the decorative pattern 8L so as to correspond to the decorative pattern 8L. The button image ZF2 is displayed in a position above the changing area of the decorative pattern 8C so as to correspond to the decorative pattern 8C. The button image ZF3 is displayed in a position above the changing area of the decorative pattern 8R so as to correspond to the decorative pattern 8R. From these, the player can see that the button image ZF1 and the decorative pattern 8L are associated, the button image ZF2 and the decorative pattern 8C are associated, and the button image ZF3 and the decorative pattern 8R are associated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(C), button press performance 1 is performed. In this button press performance 1, the decorative pattern 8L is displayed stopped on the reach line LN when the player sees the button image ZF1 and presses the performance button 63. In this figure, the decorative pattern 8L is a "6" symbol that is displayed stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(D), button display effect 2 is performed. In this button display effect 2, while the decorative patterns 8C and 8R are changing, button images ZF2 and ZF3 are continuously displayed above the changing areas of the decorative patterns 8C and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(E), button press effect 2 is performed. In this button press effect 2, the decorative pattern 8C is displayed as stopped when the player who has seen the button image ZF2 presses the effect button 63. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C is displayed as stopped at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, the decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a "7" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(F), button display effect 3 is performed. In this button display effect 3, while the decorative pattern 8R is changing, the button image ZF3 representing the effect button 63 is continuously displayed above the changing area of the decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(G), button press performance 3 is performed. In this button press performance 3, the decorative pattern 8R is displayed as stopped when the player who has seen the button image ZF3 presses the performance button 63. In this case, the decorative pattern 8R is displayed as stopped next to the decorative pattern 8C at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, the decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a "7" symbol.

Next, as shown in Fig. 145 (H), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and a reach display is performed in which the decorative symbol 8C changes at high speed. In this reach effect, the character CRZE performs various effects.
After this reach effect, a losing symbol or a big win symbol is displayed.

[Decorative pattern button stop effect C]
FIG. 146 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol button stop performance C. In the decorative symbol button stop performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 146 (A), a decorative symbol change performance is performed on the reach line LN. In this decorative symbol change performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol change performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(B), button display performance 1 is performed. In this button display performance 1, while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing, three button images ZF1, ZF2, and ZF3 representing the performance button 63 are displayed. The button image ZF1 is displayed on the changing area of the decorative pattern 8L so as to correspond to the decorative pattern 8L. The button image ZF2 is displayed on the changing area of the decorative pattern 8C so as to correspond to the decorative pattern 8C. The button image ZF3 is displayed on the changing area of the decorative pattern 8R so as to correspond to the decorative pattern 8R. From this, the player can see that the button image ZF1 and the decorative pattern 8L are associated, the button image ZF2 and the decorative pattern 8C are associated, and the button image ZF3 and the decorative pattern 8R are associated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(C), button press performance 1 is performed. In this button press performance 1, the decorative pattern 8L is displayed stopped on the reach line LN when the player presses the performance button 63 after seeing the button image ZF1. In this figure, the decorative pattern 8L is a "6" symbol that is displayed stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(D), button display effect 2 is performed. In this button display effect 2, while the decorative patterns 8C and 8R are changing, button images ZF2 and ZF3 are continuously displayed on the changing area of the decorative patterns 8C and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (E), button press effect 2 is performed. In this button press effect 2, the decorative pattern 8C is displayed as stopped when the player who has seen the button image ZF2 presses the effect button 63. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C is displayed as stopped at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, the decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a "7" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(F), button display effect 3 is performed. In this button display effect 3, while the decorative pattern 8R is changing, the button image ZF3 representing the effect button 63 is continuously displayed on the changing area of the decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (G), button press performance 3 is performed. In this button press performance 3, the decorative pattern 8R is displayed as stopped when the player who has seen the button image ZF3 presses the performance button 63. In this case, the decorative pattern 8R is displayed as stopped next to the decorative pattern 8C at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, the decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a "7" symbol.

Next, as shown in Fig. 146 (H), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and a reach display is performed in which the decorative symbol 8C changes at high speed. In this reach effect, the character CRZE performs various effects.
After this reach effect, a losing symbol or a big win symbol is displayed.

[Decorative Pattern Button Stop Performance D]
FIG. 147 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol button stop performance D. In the decorative symbol button stop performance D, first, as shown in FIG. 147 (A), a decorative symbol change performance is performed on the reach line LN. In this decorative symbol change performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol change performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(B), button display performance 1 is performed. In this button display performance 1, three button images ZF4, ZF5, and ZF6 representing the performance button 63 are displayed while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. The button image ZF4 includes a stop order suggestion display, and is displayed on the changing area of the decorative pattern 8L so as to correspond to the decorative pattern 8L. The button image ZF5 includes a stop order suggestion display, and is displayed on the changing area of the decorative pattern 8C so as to correspond to the decorative pattern 8C. The button image ZF6 includes a stop order suggestion display, and is displayed on the changing area of the decorative pattern 8R so as to correspond to the decorative pattern 8R. From these, the player can see that the button image ZF1 and the decorative pattern 8L are associated, the button image ZF2 and the decorative pattern 8C are associated, and the button image ZF3 and the decorative pattern 8R are associated. In addition, the stop order suggestion display of the button image ZF4 is displayed as "Ichi", the stop order suggestion display of the button image ZF5 is displayed as "Ni", and the stop order suggestion display of the button image ZF6 is displayed as "Third". The stop order suggestion display "Ichi" of the button image ZF4 indicates that when the performance button 63 is pressed, the corresponding decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a stopped pattern among the changing decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the stop order suggestion display "Ni" of the button image ZF5 indicates that when the performance button 63 is pressed, the corresponding decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a stopped pattern among the changing decorative patterns 8C and 8R, and the stop order suggestion display "Third" of the button image ZF5 indicates that when the performance button 63 is pressed, the corresponding decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a stopped pattern. That is, the stop order indications of the button images ZF4, ZF5, and ZF6 indicate the stop order of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R when the performance button 63 is pressed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(C), button press performance 1 is performed. In this button press performance 1, the decorative pattern 8L is displayed stopped on the reach line LN when the player sees the button image ZF4 and presses the performance button 63. In this figure, the decorative pattern 8L is a "6" symbol that is displayed stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(D), button display effect 2 is performed. In this button display effect 2, while the decorative patterns 8C and 8R are changing, button images ZF5 and ZF6 are continuously displayed on the changing area of the decorative patterns 8C and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(E), button press effect 2 is performed. In this button press effect 2, the decorative pattern 8C is displayed as stopped when the player presses the effect button 63 after seeing the button image ZF5. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C is displayed as stopped at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, the decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a "7" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(F), button display effect 3 is performed. In this button display effect 3, while the decorative pattern 8R is changing, the button image ZF6 representing the effect button 63 is continuously displayed on the changing area of the decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(G), button press performance 3 is performed. In this button press performance 3, the decorative pattern 8R is displayed as stopped when the player who has seen the button image ZF6 presses the performance button 63. In this case, the decorative pattern 8R is displayed as stopped next to the decorative pattern 8C at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, the decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a "7" symbol.

Next, as shown in Fig. 147(H), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and a reach display is performed in which the decorative symbol 8C changes at high speed. In this reach effect, the character CRZE performs various effects.
After this reach effect, a losing symbol or a big win symbol is displayed.

The decorative pattern button stop performance is performed in the same variation. The decorative pattern button stop performance may be divided into multiple variations instead of the same variation. For example, in the decorative pattern button stop performance D, the button display performance 1 and the button press performance 1 may be performed in the first variation, the button display performance 2 and the button press performance 2 in the second variation, and the button display performance 3 and the button press performance 3 in the third variation. The decorative pattern button stop performance may also be performed in a predetermined performance, such as a pseudo consecutive performance or a pre-reading performance. Furthermore, in the decorative pattern button stop performance, the stop mode of the decorative pattern that stops in the button press performance 3 may be a chance eye (chance up display) that increases the expectation of a big win.

[Modification]
In the decorative pattern button stop effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be stopped simultaneously by pressing the effect button 63 once.
The decorative pattern button stop effect may be performed in a plurality of successive variations. For example, the decorative pattern button stop effect D may be performed in a first variation, a second variation, a third variation, and so on. In this case, the stop order indication of the button images corresponding to the decorative patterns may be switched, and when the effect button 63 is pressed, the order of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R to be stopped may be switched. For example, in the first variation, button image ZF4 may be associated with decorative pattern 8L, button image ZF5 may be associated with decorative pattern 8C, and button image ZF6 may be associated with decorative pattern 8R, so that the stopping order of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is decorative pattern 8L → decorative pattern 8C → decorative pattern 8R; in the second variation, button image ZF4 may be associated with decorative pattern 8C, button image ZF5 may be associated with decorative pattern 8R, and button image ZF6 may be associated with decorative pattern 8L, so that the stopping order of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is decorative pattern 8C → decorative pattern 8R → decorative pattern 8L.

[Example of effect]
An example of the effect of the decorative pattern button stopping performance is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the decorative symbol button stop effect, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, a button image is displayed, and then, by operating the effect button 63, at least one of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are changing is displayed in a stopped state. With this configuration, the player can stop the decorative symbols from changing, so the player can enjoy the variable effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the decorative symbol button stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each a group of decorative symbols consisting of a number of decorative symbols, and by operating the effect button 63, at least one of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are changing is stopped and displayed. With this configuration, the player can stop the decorative symbols from changing, so the player can enjoy the changing effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the decorative symbol button stop effects B to D, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, the button images ZF1, ZF2, and ZF3 are displayed, and then, by operating the effect button 63, one of the decorative symbols 8L and/or 8C is displayed in a stopped manner. With this configuration, the player can stop the decorative symbols from changing, so the player can enjoy the variable effects. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the decorative symbol button stop effects B to D, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, the button images ZF1, ZF2, and ZF3 are displayed, and then, by operating the effect button 63, one of the decorative symbols 8L is displayed in a static manner, and then, by operating the effect button 63 again, one of the decorative symbols 8C is displayed in a static manner. With this configuration, the decorative symbols can be stopped one by one by the player, so the player can enjoy the variable effects. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the decorative pattern button stop performance D, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, the button images ZF4, ZF5, and ZF6 are displayed, and these button images include stop order suggestion images. Each time the performance button 63 is operated, the variation of the decorative patterns associated with the button images including the stop order suggestion images is stopped in the order based on the stop order suggestion images. With this configuration, the decorative patterns can be stopped one by one by the player while knowing the stop order of the decorative patterns, so the player can enjoy the variable performance. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect ZF-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects and an operation means operable by a player,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display performance may be performed as one of the plurality of display performances,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect in which a plurality of decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner,
the second display effect is an effect of displaying a first operating means image representing the operating means,
The third display performance is a performance in which at least one decorative pattern among the plurality of decorative patterns being variably displayed in the first display performance is stopped and displayed,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination performance, the second display performance is performed while the first display performance is being performed, and then, the third display performance is performed by operating the operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZF-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZF-1,
The plurality of decorative symbols include a first group of decorative symbols and a second group of decorative symbols;
In the combination performance, in the third display performance, one decorative pattern of the first decorative pattern group is stopped and displayed by operating the operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZF-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZF-2,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
the fourth display effect is an effect of displaying a second operating means image representing the operating means,
The fifth display performance is a performance in which at least one decorative pattern among the second decorative pattern group being variably displayed in the first display performance is stopped and displayed,
The combination effect may include the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, the fourth display effect, and the fifth display effect,
In the combination performance, the fourth display performance is performed when the first display performance is being performed, and then, the fifth display performance is performed by operating the operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZF-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZF-3,
In the combination performance, the second display performance is performed when the first display performance is being performed, the fourth display performance is performed when the first display performance is being performed, after the second display performance and the fourth display performance, the third display performance is performed by operating the operation means, and after the third display performance, the fifth display performance is performed by operating the operation means again.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZF-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZF-4,
A sixth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The sixth display effect is an effect of displaying a first stop order suggestion image and a second stop order suggestion image,
the first stop order suggestion image is associated with the first operation means image in the second display performance, and is an image suggesting that, when the operation means is operated, the decorative patterns of the first decorative pattern group among the plurality of decorative patterns will be stopped and displayed before the second decorative pattern group;
the second stop order suggestion image is associated with the second operation means image in the fourth display performance, and is an image suggesting that, when the operation means is operated, the decorative patterns of the second decorative pattern group among the plurality of decorative patterns will be stopped and displayed after the decorative patterns of the first decorative pattern group;
The combination effect may include the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, the fourth display effect, the fifth display effect, and the sixth display effect,
In the combination performance, the sixth display performance is performed when the second display performance and the fourth display performance are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the above embodiment, the following may be done.
The first operation means image is on the moving line of the first decorative symbol group, and the second operation means image is on the moving line of the second decorative symbol group.
The stopping order of the first group of decorative symbols and the second group of decorative symbols changes when the variation changes.
The stop positions of the first decorative symbol group and the second decorative symbol group are offset from the reach line. The first decorative symbol group and the second decorative symbol group are the same symbol.
○Combination effects are performed during pseudo-consecutive effects.
The stop display mode of the decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol group and the decorative symbols of the second decorative symbol group is a chance-up mode.
○It is carried out with the same fluctuation.

Below, icon display effects A to D are explained using Figures 148 to 151. These icon display effects can be executed during the decorative pattern variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a character display effect, it reads corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays images on the display screen 7a, left sub-display device 10L, right sub-display device 10R, illumination panel 18, etc. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is located closer to the player than the display screen 7a and the sub-display device 10.

[Icon display effect A]
FIG. 148 is a diagram for explaining the icon display performance A. In the icon performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 148 (A), a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(B), an icon appearance effect is performed. In this icon appearance effect, four icons ZG1, two icons ZG2, and one icon ZG3 are displayed. Icon ZG1 includes the character "PSI", which suggests a pseudo consecutive effect, and a first character. Icon ZG2 includes the character "SP", which suggests a super reach effect, and a second character different from the first character. Icon ZG3 includes the character "O", which suggests a jackpot, and a third character different from the first and second characters.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(C), icon formation performance 1 is performed. In this icon formation performance 1, multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 form a first formation. Specifically, multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are arranged in a circular shape. At this time, multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(D), icon formation performance 2 is performed. In this icon formation performance 2, multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 form a second formation from a first formation. Specifically, multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are arranged in an "H" shape with spaces between the icons. At this time, multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(E), an icon selection effect is performed. In this icon selection effect, one icon is selected from the multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 arranged in the second formation. The figure shows that icon ZG2 has been selected.

Next, as shown in Fig. 148(F), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and a reach display is performed in which the decorative symbol 8C changes at high speed. In this reach effect, the character CRZG performs various effects. This character CRZG corresponds to the second character included in the icon ZG2.
After this reach effect, a losing symbol or a big win symbol is displayed.

[Icon display effect B]
FIG. 149 is a diagram for explaining the icon display performance B. In the icon performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 149(A), a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(B), an icon appearance effect is performed. In this icon appearance effect, multiple icons (four icons ZG1, two icons ZG2, and one icon ZG3) appear (display) one by one on the display device (main display device 7 (display screen 7a) or sub display device 10). Icon ZG1 includes the character "pseudo" suggesting a pseudo consecutive performance, and a first character. Icon ZG2 includes the character "SP" suggesting a super reach performance, and a second character different from the first character. Icon ZG3 includes the character "hit" suggesting a big win, and a third character different from the first character and the second character. Multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 appear on the display screen 7a from around the upper right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(C), icon formation performance 1 is performed. In this icon formation performance 1, multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 form a first formation. Specifically, multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are arranged in a circle with spaces between them. At this time, multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(D), icon formation performance 2 is performed. In this icon formation performance 2, multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 form a second formation from a first formation. Specifically, multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are arranged in an "H" shape with spaces between the icons. At this time, multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(E), an icon exit appearance is performed. In this icon exit appearance, the multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 in the second formation exit one by one from the display device (main display device 7 (display screen 7a) or sub display device 10), resulting in the exit of all of the multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3. The figure shows that three icons ZG1 have exited and that icon ZG1 is about to exit. The multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 exit from around the top right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(F), an icon reappearance effect is performed. In this icon reappearance effect, multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 that have disappeared outside the display device reappear on the display device. In this case, in the icon reappearance effect, multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 expand from the right side of the display screen 7a, appear on the display screen 7a one by one, and move slowly to the left side of the display screen 7a. Also, in the icon reappearance effect, a button image ZG4 representing the effect button 63 is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. Multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 move behind (at the back) of button image ZG4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(G), an icon selection effect is performed. In this icon selection effect, one of the multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 that have reappeared in the icon reappearance effect and that move slowly across the display screen 7a is selected. Specifically, when a player sees button image ZG4 in the icon reappearance effect, the player presses effect button 63 to select one of the multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 that have reappeared in the icon reappearance effect. In this case, the icon located behind button image ZG4 (that overlaps with button image ZG4) when effect button 63 is pressed is selected. However, this is not limited to the above, and an icon may be selected randomly when effect button 63 is pressed. In the figure, the state in which icon ZG2 has been selected is shown.

Next, as shown in Fig. 149 (H), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and a reach display is performed in which the decorative symbol 8C changes at high speed. In this reach effect, the character CRZG performs various effects. This character CRZG corresponds to the second character included in the icon ZG2.
After this reach effect, a losing symbol or a big win symbol is displayed.

[Icon display effect C]
FIG. 150 is a diagram for explaining the icon display performance C. In the icon performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 150(A), a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(B), an icon appearance effect is performed. In this icon appearance effect, multiple icons (four icons ZG1, two icons ZG2, and one icon ZG3) appear (display) one by one on the display device (main display device 7 (display screen 7a) or sub display device 10). Icon ZG1 includes the character "pseudo" suggesting a pseudo consecutive effect, and a first character. Icon ZG2 includes the character "SP" suggesting a super reach effect, and a second character different from the first character. Icon ZG3 includes the character "hit" suggesting a big win, and a third character different from the first character and the second character. Multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 appear on the display screen 7a from around the upper right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(C), icon formation performance 1 is performed. In this icon formation performance 1, multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 form a first formation. Specifically, multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are arranged in a circular shape so as to overlap (touch) adjacent icons. At this time, multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(D), icon formation performance 2 is performed. In this icon formation performance 2, multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 form a second formation from a first formation. Specifically, multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are arranged in an "H" shape so that they overlap (are in contact with) adjacent icons. At this time, multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(E), an icon exit appearance is performed. In this icon exit appearance, the multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 in the second formation exit one by one from the display device (main display device 7 (display screen 7a) or sub display device 10), resulting in the exit of all of the multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3. The figure shows three icons ZG1 exiting, and icon ZG1 about to exit. The multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 exit from around the top right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(F), an icon reappearance effect is performed. In this icon reappearance effect, multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 that have disappeared from the display device reappear on the display device. In this case, in the icon reappearance effect, multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 expand from the right side of the display screen 7a, appear on the display screen 7a one by one, and move slowly to the left side of the display screen 7a. Also, in the icon reappearance effect, a button image ZG4 representing the effect button 63 is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. Multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 move behind (at the back) of button image ZG4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(G), an icon selection effect is performed. In this icon selection effect, one of the multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 that have reappeared in the icon reappearance effect and that move slowly across the display screen 7a is selected. Specifically, when a player sees button image ZG4 in the icon reappearance effect, the player presses effect button 63 to select one of the multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 that have reappeared in the icon reappearance effect. In this case, the icon located behind button image ZG4 (that overlaps with button image ZG4) when effect button 63 is pressed is selected. However, this is not limited to the above, and an icon may be selected randomly when effect button 63 is pressed. In the figure, the selection of icon ZG2 is shown.

Next, as shown in Fig. 150(H), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and a reach display is performed in which the decorative symbol 8C changes at high speed. In this reach effect, the character CRZG performs various effects. This character CRZG corresponds to the second character included in the icon ZG2.
After this reach effect, a losing symbol or a big win symbol is displayed.

[Icon display effect D]
FIG. 151 is a diagram for explaining the icon display performance D. In the icon performance D, first, as shown in FIG. 151 (A), a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(B), an icon appearance effect is performed. In this icon appearance effect, multiple icons (four icons ZG1, two icons ZG2, and one icon ZG3) appear (display) one by one on the display device (main display device 7 (display screen 7a) or sub display device 10). Icon ZG1 includes the character "pseudo" suggesting a pseudo consecutive effect, and a first character. Icon ZG2 includes the character "SP" suggesting a super reach effect, and a second character different from the first character. Icon ZG3 includes the character "hit" suggesting a big win, and a third character different from the first character and the second character. Multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 appear on the display screen 7a from around the upper right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(C), icon formation performance 1 is performed. In this icon formation performance 1, multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 form a first formation. Specifically, the multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are arranged in a circular shape so as to overlap (contact) with adjacent icons. At this time, the multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are moving (rotating) counterclockwise. Note that the multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 may move clockwise, or may move so that the size of the formation (diameter of the circle) increases while maintaining a circular shape.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (D), icon formation performance 2 is performed. In this icon formation performance 2, multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 form a second formation from a first formation. Specifically, multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are arranged in an "H" shape so that they overlap with adjacent icons (so that they are in contact with the adjacent icons). At this time, multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 may move (rotate) counterclockwise, or may move so that the size of the formation increases while maintaining the H shape.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(E), an icon exit appearance is performed. In this icon exit appearance, the multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 in the second formation exit one by one from the display device (main display device 7 (display screen 7a) or sub display device 10), resulting in the exit of all of the multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3. The figure shows that three icons ZG1 have exited and that icon ZG1 is about to exit. The multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 exit from around the top right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(F), an icon reappearance effect is performed. In this icon reappearance effect, multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 that have disappeared from the display device reappear on the display device. In this case, in the icon reappearance effect, multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 expand from the right side of the display screen 7a, appear on the display screen 7a one by one, and move slowly to the left side of the display screen 7a. Also, in the icon reappearance effect, a button image ZG4 representing the effect button 63 is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. Multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 move behind (at the back) of button image ZG4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(G), an icon selection effect is performed. In this icon selection effect, one of the multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 that have reappeared in the icon reappearance effect and that move slowly across the display screen 7a is selected. Specifically, when a player sees button image ZG4 in the icon reappearance effect, the player presses effect button 63 to select one of the multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 that have reappeared in the icon reappearance effect. In this case, the icon located behind button image ZG4 (that overlaps with button image ZG4) when effect button 63 is pressed is selected. However, this is not limited to the above, and an icon may be selected randomly when effect button 63 is pressed. In the figure, the state in which icon ZG2 has been selected is shown.

Next, as shown in Fig. 151 (H), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and a reach display is performed in which the decorative symbol 8C changes at high speed. In this reach effect, the character CRZG performs various effects. This character CRZG corresponds to the second character included in the icon ZG2.
After this reach effect, a losing symbol or a big win symbol is displayed.

[Modification]
In the icon display presentation, each of the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 includes a character and text suggesting the subsequent development, and in addition to this, the probability of winning a jackpot, etc. may be added.
In the above-mentioned icon display effects B to D, the positions at which the icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 enter the display device during the icon appearance effect are substantially the same as the positions at which they enter the display device during the icon disappearance effect, but they may be different.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of icon display effects.
[Effect 1]
In the icon display effect, after the icon appearance effect displays the plurality of icons ZG, ZG2, ZG3, the plurality of icons ZG, ZG2, ZG3 form a first formation, and then the plurality of icons ZG, ZG2, ZG3 form a second formation. With this configuration, the plurality of icons form two formations in sequence, so that the player does not get bored with the icon effect, and the interest of the icon effect can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the icon display effects B to D, the icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 appear one by one in the icon appearance effect, and the icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are displayed. With this configuration, the icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 can be recognized one by one, which can increase the interest of the icon effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

[Effect 3]
In the icon display effect D, the formation is formed so that the icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 overlap each other in the icon formation effect. With this configuration, the gaps between the icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are reduced, making it easier to recognize the outline of the formed formation, and improving the interest of the icon effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the icon display effect D, the icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 move within the formation while forming a formation in the icon formation effect. With this configuration, the formation formed by the icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 can move, so that the interest of the formation effect can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the icon display effects B to D, in the icon exit appearance, after the icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 form a formation on the display device (main display device 7, sub display device 10), these icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 exit the display device one by one. With this configuration, the exit of the icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 can be recognized one by one, so that the interest of the icon effect can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect ZG-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display performance may be performed as one of the plurality of display performances,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
the first display effect is an effect of displaying a plurality of icons,
the second display effect is an effect in which the plurality of icons form a first formation,
the third display effect is an effect in which the plurality of icons form a second formation,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination performance, the first display performance is performed, and then the second display performance is performed, and the second display performance is performed, and then the third display performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZG-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZG-1,
The first display effect is an effect in which the plurality of icons appear one by one on the display means from outside the display means, and the plurality of icons are displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZG-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZG-1 or ZG-2,
In the second display performance or the third display performance, the plurality of icons form the formation so as to overlap each other.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZG-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects ZG-1 to ZG-3,
In the second display performance or the third display performance, the plurality of icons form the formation and move within the formation.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZG-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects ZG-1 to ZG-4,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
the fourth display effect is an effect in which the plurality of icons exit one by one from the display means to the outside of the display means;
The combination effect may include the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed, and then the fourth display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the above embodiment, the following may be done.
After the fourth display effect, the plurality of icons that had disappeared from the display means reappear on the display means one by one.
The icon that has exited the display means in the fourth display effect returns to the display means from the opposite direction to the exit direction. It may return from the same position as the exit position. In this case, the icon that returns to the display means may be displayed in an enlarged manner. Also, an operation means image representing the operation means may be displayed on the icon that has returned to the display means or on the changing line of the decorative pattern. Also, an icon corresponding to the operation means image may be selected by operating the operation means, and an effect corresponding to that icon (such as a reach effect using the character of the icon) may be performed.

The following describes the performance execution confirmation performances A to D, using Figures 152 to 155. The performance execution confirmation performances A to D can be executed during the decorative pattern variation performance, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the performance execution confirmation performance, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the sub-display device 10.

[Performance execution confirmation performance A]
FIG. 152 is a diagram for explaining the performance execution confirmation performance A.
First, as shown in FIG. 152(A), a change start performance is executed. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retreat position (home position). On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, a reserved image 9A is displayed. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth memory areas of the first special pattern reserved memory area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third memory areas are displayed. On the other hand, on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the reserved image 9C is displayed. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152(B), a preview image appearance effect is executed. In this preview image appearance effect, a hexagonal performance preview image PNG with "Continue" written inside is displayed on the display screen 7a. This performance preview image PNG suggests a pseudo consecutive performance. "NEXT" may be used instead of "Continue".

Next, as shown in Fig. 152(C), a preview image movement effect is executed. In this preview image movement effect, the effect preview image PNG moves in a rolling manner in the area at the edge of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow YG1.
Next, as shown in Fig. 152(D), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both stopped at "2". Also, the effect preview image PNG moves in a rolling manner in the area at the edge of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow YG2.

Next, as shown in Fig. 152 (E), the execution confirmation effect is executed. In the execution confirmation effect, the effect preview image PNG rolls in the area at the edge of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow YG3, and moves from the display screen 7a to the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. At this time, the background of the effect preview image PNG turns red on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. At this time, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 152(F), a temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the center effect pattern 8C stops with the special pattern "continue". Here, the left effect pattern 8L is "2", the center effect pattern 8C is "continue", and the right effect pattern 8R is "2".

Next, as shown in Figure 152 (G), a re-changing performance is executed. The re-changing performance is a performance in which the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner.
Next, as shown in Fig. 152 (H), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at "7".

[Performance execution confirmation performance B]
FIG. 153 is a diagram for explaining the performance execution confirmation performance B.
First, as shown in FIG. 153(A), the change start performance is executed. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retreat position (home position). On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, a reserved image 9A is displayed. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth memory areas of the first special pattern reserved memory area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third memory areas are displayed. On the other hand, on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the reserved image 9C is displayed. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153(B), a preview image appearance effect is executed. In this preview image appearance effect, a hexagonal performance preview image PNG with "Continue" written inside is displayed on the display screen 7a. This performance preview image PNG suggests a pseudo consecutive performance. "NEXT" may be used instead of "Continue".

Next, as shown in Fig. 153(C), a preview image movement effect is executed. In this preview image movement effect, the effect preview image PNG moves in a rolling manner in the area at the edge of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow YG1.
Next, as shown in Fig. 153(D), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both stopped at "2". Also, the effect preview image PNG moves in a rolling manner in the area at the edge of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow YG2.

Next, as shown in Fig. 153(E), a preview image disappearing effect is executed. The preview image disappearing effect is an effect in which the effect preview image PNG disappears outside the display screen 7a as shown by an arrow YG3.
Next, as shown in FIG. 153(F), a fixed stop effect (miss) is executed. This fixed stop effect (miss) is an effect in which the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped on the display device 7a. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both stopped at "2", and the center effect pattern 8C is stopped at "1". In addition, with the fixed stop of the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the display of the reserved image 9C disappears.

[Performance execution confirmation performance C]
Figure 154 is a diagram for explaining the performance execution confirmation performance C.
First, as shown in FIG. 154(A), a change start performance is executed. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retreat position (home position). On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, a reserved image 9A is displayed. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth memory areas of the first special pattern reserved memory area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third memory areas are displayed. On the other hand, on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the reserved image 9C is displayed. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(B), a preview image appearance effect is executed. In this preview image appearance effect, a hexagonal performance preview image PNG with "Continue" written inside is displayed on the display screen 7a. This performance preview image PNG suggests a pseudo consecutive performance. "NEXT" may be used instead of "Continue".

Next, as shown in Fig. 154(C), a preview image movement effect is executed. In this preview image movement effect, the effect preview image PNG moves in a rolling manner in the area at the edge of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow YG1.
Next, as shown in Fig. 154(D), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both stopped at "2". Also, the effect preview image PNG moves in a rolling manner in the area at the edge of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow YG2.

Next, as shown in Fig. 154 (E), a preview image disappearing effect is executed. The preview image disappearing effect is an effect in which the effect preview image PNG disappears outside the display screen 7a as shown by an arrow YG3.
Next, as shown in FIG. 154(F), a temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the center effect pattern 8C stops with the special pattern "continue". Here, the left effect pattern 8L is "2", the center effect pattern 8C is "continue", and the right effect pattern 8R is "2".

Next, as shown in Figure 154 (G), a re-changing performance is executed. The re-changing performance is a performance in which the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner.
Next, as shown in Fig. 154 (H), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both shown to have stopped at "7".

[Performance execution confirmation performance D]
Figure 155 is a diagram for explaining the performance execution confirmation performance D.
First, as shown in FIG. 155(A), the change start performance is executed. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retreat position (home position). On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, a reserved image 9A is displayed. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth memory areas of the first special pattern reserved memory area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third memory areas are displayed. On the other hand, on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the reserved image 9C is displayed. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 155(B), a preview image appearance effect is executed. In this preview image appearance effect, a preview image PNG, which is hexagonal and has "SP" written inside, is displayed on the display screen 7a. This preview image PNG suggests that a SP reach effect is about to occur.

Next, as shown in Fig. 155(C), a preview image movement effect is executed. In this preview image movement effect, the effect preview image PNG moves in a rolling manner in the area at the edge of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow YG1.
Next, as shown in Fig. 155(D), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both stopped at "2". Also, the effect preview image PNG moves in a rolling manner in the area at the edge of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow YG2.

Next, as shown in Fig. 155 (E), the execution confirmation effect is executed. In the execution confirmation effect, the effect preview image PNG rolls in the area at the edge of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow YG3, and moves from the display screen 7a to the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. At this time, the background of the effect preview image PNG turns red on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A that was displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.
Next, as shown in Fig. 155 (F), a reach development effect is executed. In this reach development effect, a message image MSG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the message image MSG is "Development".

Next, as shown in FIG. 155(G), a battle presentation is executed. In this battle presentation, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins, the expectation of a big win increases. In this battle presentation, the part of the image displayed on the display screen 7a that is covered by the sub-display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10. Here, the feet of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10. Therefore, the reserved image 9A that was displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 155 (H), a confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. This confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is an effect in which the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped in a jackpot arrangement on the display device 7a. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped at "2." The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Also, with the confirmed stop of the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the display of the reserved image 9C disappears.

[Example of effect]
Below is an example of the effect of the performance confirmation performance.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the performance preview image PNG is displayed on the display screen 7a, the performance preview image PNG moves to the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, and the execution of the performance suggested by the performance preview image PNG is decided (FIGS. 152(B)-(E), 155(B)-(E)). With this configuration, the player's heart pounds over the direction of the performance preview image PNG, which can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the performance preview image PNG is displayed on the display screen 7a, the area at the edge of the display screen 7a is moved (FIGS. 152(C)(D), 153(C)(D), 154(C)(D), 155(C)(D)). This configuration makes players excited about the direction of the performance preview image PNG, which can increase the interest in the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the performance preview image PNG moves along a predetermined route on the display screen 7a (FIGS. 152(C)(D), 153(C)(D), 154(C)(D), 155(C)(D)). This configuration makes it easier to understand the behavior of the performance preview image PNG, which can increase the interest in the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effects are performed using an effect preview image PNG that previews the effects to be executed later (FIGS. 152(B), 153(B), 154(B), and 155(B)). This configuration makes it easier to understand the effects to be executed later, and can increase the interest in the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when a preview image disappearance effect is executed in which the preview image PNG disappears off the display screen 7a without moving to the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L (FIG. 153(E)), it is determined that the effect suggested by the preview image PNG will not be executed in principle. With this configuration, the player's heart pounds over the direction of the preview image PNG, which increases the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the performance preview image PNG moves to the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the background of the performance preview image PNG turns red on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L (FIG. 152(E), FIG. 155(E)). With this configuration, it becomes easier to know whether the performance suggested by the performance preview image PNG will be executed, and the excitement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the effect execution confirmation effect are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, a performance preview image PNG is used that suggests a performance that will be executed later, but an image that is not directly related to the later performance (for example, a message image such as "Super Hot") may be used.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the preview image PNG moves along a predetermined route on the display screen 7a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the preview image is an image resembling a balloon, it may be made to float gently on the display screen 7a.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect E2-1]
A first display device capable of displaying an image and performing a performance;
A gaming machine including a second display device different from the first display device,
A gaming machine characterized in that, after a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen of the first display device, the execution of a specific performance is determined by moving the predetermined image from the display screen of the first display device to the display screen of the second display device.

[Aspect E2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1,
a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen of said first display device, and then said predetermined image is moved on the display screen of said first display device.

[Aspect E2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-2,
The predetermined image moves along a predetermined route on the display screen of the first display device.

[Aspect E2-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-3,
The predetermined image is a preview image that predicts the execution of the specific performance.

[Aspect E2-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-4,
When the predetermined image does not move from the first display device to the second display device, it is determined that the specific effect will not be executed in principle.

[Aspect E2-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-5,
a game machine, characterized in that, when the predetermined image moves from the display screen of the first display device to the display screen of the second display device, an execution confirmation effect is performed on the display screen of the second display device.

[Aspect E2-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-6,
The display screen of the second display device can be used to display a reserved image corresponding to the reserved memory,
A gaming machine characterized in that, during the execution confirmation performance, the reserved image is displayed on a display device other than the second display device.

[Aspect E2-8]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-7,
A gaming machine, characterized in that even if the predetermined image does not move from the first display device to the second display device, it may be determined that the specific effect will be executed.

The reach development selection effects A to D are explained below using Figures 156 to 159. These reach development selection effects can be executed during the decorative pattern variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a character display effect, it reads corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays images on the display screen 7a, the left sub-display device 10L, the right sub-display device 10R, the illumination panel 18, etc. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is located closer to the player than the display screen 7a and the sub-display device 10.

[Reach development selection performance A]
FIG. 156 is a diagram for explaining the reach development selection performance A. In the reach development selection performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 156 (A), a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 156 (B), reach selection performance 1 is performed. In this reach selection performance 1, a first area formed from three reach performance selection areas (reach performance selection area ZH1, reach performance selection area ZH2, and reach performance selection area ZH3) is displayed. Reach performance selection areas ZH1, ZH2, and ZH3 are circular and arranged adjacent to each other. Reach performance selection area ZH1 includes the characters "A reach." The characters "A reach" suggest that when reach performance selection area ZH1 is selected, an A reach will be performed in the reach performance. Reach performance selection area ZH2 includes the characters "B reach." The characters "B reach" suggest that when reach performance selection area ZH2 is selected, a B reach will be performed in the reach performance. Reach performance selection area ZH3 includes the characters "C reach." The words "C Reach" suggest that when the reach effect selection area ZH3 is selected, a C Reach will be performed in the reach effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 156(C), reach selection performance 2 is performed. In this reach selection performance 2, a second area formed from three reach performance selection areas (reach performance selection area ZH1A, reach performance selection area ZH2A, and reach performance selection area ZH3A) is displayed. Reach performance selection areas ZH1A, ZH2A, and ZH3A are rectangular and arranged adjacent to each other. These reach performance selection areas ZH1A, ZH2A, and ZH3A correspond to the reach performance selection areas ZH1, ZH2, and ZH3 of the first area, respectively, and are larger than the corresponding reach performance selection areas ZH1, ZH2, and ZH3. Therefore, the second area is larger than the first area. Reach performance selection area ZH1A corresponds to the reach performance selection area ZH1 of the first area, and includes the characters "A Reach." The characters "A reach" suggest that when reach performance selection area ZH1A is selected, an A reach will occur in the reach performance. Reach performance selection area ZH2A corresponds to reach performance selection area ZH2 in the first area, and contains the characters "B reach". The characters "B reach" suggest that when reach performance selection area ZH2A is selected, a B reach will occur in the reach performance. Reach performance selection area ZH3A corresponds to reach performance selection area ZH3 in the first area, and contains the characters "C reach". The characters "C reach" suggest that when reach performance selection area ZH3A is selected, a C reach will occur in the reach performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 156(D), a reach determination effect is performed. In this reach determination effect, one area is determined (selected) from the second area. In the figure, the reach effect selection area ZH2A is shown hatched, and the state in which the reach effect selection area ZH2A has been selected is shown.

Next, as shown in Fig. 156(E), in this reach performance, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and the decorative symbol 8C is displayed with high speed fluctuation. In this reach performance, the character CRZH performs various performances.
After this reach effect, a losing symbol or a big win symbol is displayed.

[Reach development selection performance B]
FIG. 157 is a diagram for explaining the reach development selection performance B. In the reach development selection performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 157(A), a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(B), reach selection performance 1 is performed. In this reach selection performance 1, a first area formed from three reach performance selection areas (reach performance selection area ZH4, reach performance selection area ZH5, and reach performance selection area ZH6) is displayed. Reach performance selection areas ZH4, ZH5, and ZH6 are circular and arranged adjacent to each other. Reach performance selection area ZH4 includes the characters "A reach", a first character, and one star mark. The characters "A reach" suggest that when reach performance selection area ZH4 is selected, A reach will be performed in the reach performance. The one star mark represents the expected probability of a jackpot, and indicates that the expected probability of a jackpot is relatively low. Reach performance selection area ZH5 includes the characters "B reach", a second character, and two star marks. The characters "B reach" suggest that if the reach performance selection area ZH5 is selected, a B reach will be performed in the reach performance. The two star marks represent the likelihood of a jackpot, indicating that the likelihood of a jackpot is relatively medium. The reach performance selection area ZH6 includes the characters "C reach", a third character, and three star marks. The characters "C reach" suggest that if the reach performance selection area ZH6 is selected, a C reach will be performed in the reach performance. The three star marks represent the likelihood of a jackpot, indicating that the likelihood of a jackpot is relatively high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(C), reach selection performance 2 is performed. In this reach selection performance 2, a second area formed from four reach performance selection areas (reach performance selection area ZH4A, reach performance selection area ZH5A, reach performance selection area ZH6A, and reach performance selection area ZH7A) is displayed. The reach performance selection areas ZH4A, ZH5A, and ZH6A are rectangular and arranged adjacent to each other. These reach performance selection areas ZH4A, ZH5A, and ZH6A correspond to the reach performance selection areas ZH4, ZH5, and ZH6 of the first area, respectively, and are larger than the corresponding reach performance selection areas ZH4, ZH5, and ZH6. Therefore, the second area is larger than the first area. The reach performance selection area ZH4A is an area corresponding to the reach performance selection area ZH4 of the first area, and includes the characters "A reach", a first character, and one star mark. The characters "A reach" suggest that when the reach performance selection area ZH4A is selected, an A reach will be performed in the reach performance. The one star mark represents the jackpot expectation, and indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively low. The reach performance selection area ZH5A is an area corresponding to the reach performance selection area ZH5 of the first area, and includes the characters "B reach", a second character, and two star marks. The characters "B reach" suggest that when the reach performance selection area ZH5A is selected, a B reach will be performed in the reach performance. The two star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and indicate that the jackpot expectation is relatively medium. The reach performance selection area ZH6A includes the characters "C reach", a third character, and three star marks. The characters "C reach" suggest that when the reach performance selection area ZH6A is selected, a C reach will be performed in the reach performance. The three star marks represent the expectation of a jackpot, indicating that the expectation of a jackpot is relatively high. The reach performance selection area ZH7A includes the characters "D reach", a fourth character, and five star marks. The characters "D reach" suggest that when the reach performance selection area ZH7A is selected, a D reach will be performed in the reach performance. The five star marks represent the expectation of a jackpot, indicating that the expectation of a jackpot is extremely high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(D), a reach determination effect is performed. In this reach determination effect, one area is determined (selected) from the second area. In the figure, the reach effect selection area ZH2A is shown hatched, and the state in which the reach effect selection area ZH2A has been selected is shown.

157(E), in this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and the decorative symbol 8C is displayed with a high-speed change. In this reach effect, the character CRZH, which is the second character included in the reach effect selection area ZH5A determined in the reach determination effect, performs various effects.
After this reach effect, a losing symbol or a big win symbol is displayed.

[Reach development selection performance C]
FIG. 158 is a diagram for explaining the reach development selection performance C. In the reach development selection performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 158 (A), a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158(B), reach selection performance 1 is performed. In this reach selection performance 1, a first area formed of four reach performance selection areas (reach performance selection area ZH8, reach performance selection area ZH9, reach performance selection area ZH10, and reach performance selection area ZH11) is displayed. Reach performance selection areas ZH8, ZH9, ZH10, and ZH11 are triangular and arranged adjacent to each other. Reach performance selection area ZH8 includes the characters "A reach", a first character, and one star mark. The characters "A reach" suggest that when reach performance selection area ZH8 is selected, A reach will be performed in the reach performance. The one star mark represents the jackpot expectation, and indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively low. Reach performance selection area ZH9 includes the characters "B reach", a second character, and two star marks. The characters "B Reach" suggest that when the reach performance selection area ZH9 is selected, a B reach will be performed in the reach performance. The two star marks represent the expectation of a jackpot, and indicate that the expectation of a jackpot is relatively medium. The reach performance selection area ZH10 includes the characters "C Reach", a third character, and three star marks. The characters "C Reach" suggest that when the reach performance selection area ZH10 is selected, a C reach will be performed in the reach performance. The three star marks represent the expectation of a jackpot, and indicate that the expectation of a jackpot is relatively high. The reach performance selection area ZH11 includes the characters "E Reach", a fifth character, and four star marks. The characters "E Reach" suggest that when the reach performance selection area ZH11 is selected, an E reach will be performed in the reach performance. Four stars indicate the likelihood of a big win, and are relatively higher than three stars.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158(C), reach selection performance 2 is performed. In this reach selection performance 2, a second area formed from five reach performance selection areas (reach performance selection area ZH8A, reach performance selection area ZH9A, reach performance selection area ZH10A, reach performance selection area ZH11A, and reach performance selection area ZH12A) is displayed. Reach performance selection areas ZH8A, ZH9A, ZH10A, and ZH11A are trapezoidal and arranged adjacent to each other. Furthermore, reach performance selection area ZH12A is diamond-shaped and arranged approximately in the center of reach performance selection areas ZH8A, ZH9A, ZH10A, and ZH11A. These reach performance selection areas ZH8A, ZH9A, ZH10A, and ZH11A correspond to the reach performance selection areas ZH8, ZH9, ZH10, and ZH11 of the first area, respectively. The first area and the second area correspond to the entire areas of the display screen 7a, the left sub-display device 10L, and the right sub-display device 10R, respectively, and therefore have the same size. The reach performance selection area ZH8A is an area corresponding to the reach performance selection area ZH8 of the first area, and includes the characters "A reach", a first character, and one star mark. The characters "A reach" suggest that an A reach will be performed in the reach performance when the reach performance selection area ZH8A is selected. The one star mark represents the jackpot expectation, and indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively low. The reach performance selection area ZH9A is an area corresponding to the reach performance selection area ZH9 of the first area, and includes the characters "B reach", a second character, and two star marks. The characters "B reach" suggest that a B reach will be performed in the reach performance when the reach performance selection area ZH9A is selected. The two star marks represent the likelihood of a jackpot, and indicate that the likelihood of a jackpot is relatively medium. The reach performance selection area ZH10A includes the characters "C reach", a third character, and three star marks. The characters "C reach" suggest that a C reach will be performed in the reach performance when the reach performance selection area ZH10A is selected. The three star marks represent the likelihood of a jackpot, and indicate that the likelihood of a jackpot is relatively high. The reach performance selection area ZH11A includes the characters "E reach", a fifth character, and four star marks. The characters "E reach" suggest that an E reach will be performed in the reach performance when the reach performance selection area ZH11A is selected. The four star marks represent the likelihood of a jackpot, and indicate that the likelihood of a jackpot is higher than that of three star marks. The reach effect selection area ZH12A includes the characters "D Reach", a fourth character, and five star marks. The characters "D Reach" suggest that when the reach effect selection area ZH12A is selected, a D Reach will be performed in the reach effect. The five star marks represent the probability of a jackpot, indicating that the probability of a jackpot is extremely high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158(D), a reach determination effect is performed. In this reach determination effect, one area is determined (selected) from the second area. In the figure, the reach effect selection area ZH12A is shown with hatching, and the state in which the reach effect selection area ZH12A has been selected is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158(E), in this reach performance, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the reach line LN as the same symbol (symbol 7 in the figure), and a reach display is performed in which the decorative symbol 8C changes at high speed. In this reach performance, the fourth character CRZH1 included in the reach performance selection area ZH12A determined in the reach determination performance performs various performances. After this reach performance, a losing symbol or a big win symbol is displayed.

[Reach development selection performance D]
FIG. 159 is a diagram for explaining the reach development selection performance D. In the reach development selection performance D, first, as shown in FIG. 159 (A), a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159(B), reach selection performance 1 is performed. In this reach selection performance 1, a first area formed by four reach performance selection areas (reach performance selection area ZH8, reach performance selection area ZH9, reach performance selection area ZH10, and reach performance selection area ZH11) is displayed. Reach performance selection areas ZH8, ZH9, ZH10, and ZH11 are triangular and arranged adjacent to each other. Reach performance selection area ZH8 includes the characters "A Reach", a first character, and one star mark. The characters "A Reach" suggest that when reach performance selection area ZH8 is selected, A Reach will be performed in the reach performance. The one star mark represents the jackpot expectation, and indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively low. Reach performance selection area ZH9 includes the characters "B Reach", a second character, and two star marks. The characters "B Reach" suggest that when the reach performance selection area ZH9 is selected, a B reach will be performed in the reach performance. The two star marks represent the expectation of a jackpot, and indicate that the expectation of a jackpot is relatively medium. The reach performance selection area ZH10 includes the characters "C Reach", a third character, and three star marks. The characters "C Reach" suggest that when the reach performance selection area ZH10 is selected, a C reach will be performed in the reach performance. The three star marks represent the expectation of a jackpot, and indicate that the expectation of a jackpot is relatively high. The reach performance selection area ZH11 includes the characters "E Reach", a fifth character, and four star marks. The characters "E Reach" suggest that when the reach performance selection area ZH11 is selected, an E reach will be performed in the reach performance. Four stars indicate the likelihood of a big win, and are relatively higher than three stars.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159(C), reach selection performance 2 is performed. In this reach selection performance 2, a second area formed from five reach performance selection areas (reach performance selection area ZH8A, reach performance selection area ZH9A, reach performance selection area ZH10A, reach performance selection area ZH11A, and reach performance selection area ZH12A) is displayed. Reach performance selection areas ZH8A, ZH9A, ZH10A, and ZH11A are trapezoidal and arranged adjacent to each other. Furthermore, reach performance selection area ZH12A is diamond-shaped and arranged approximately in the center of reach performance selection areas ZH8A, ZH9A, ZH10A, and ZH11A. These reach performance selection areas ZH8A, ZH9A, ZH10A, and ZH11A correspond to the reach performance selection areas ZH8, ZH9, ZH10, and ZH11 of the first area, respectively. The first area and the second area correspond to the entire areas of the display screen 7a, the left sub-display device 10L, and the right sub-display device 10R, respectively, and therefore have the same size. The reach performance selection area ZH8A is an area corresponding to the reach performance selection area ZH8 of the first area, and includes the characters "A reach", a first character, and one star mark. The characters "A reach" suggest that an A reach will be performed in the reach performance when the reach performance selection area ZH8A is selected. The one star mark represents the jackpot expectation, and indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively low. The reach performance selection area ZH9A is an area corresponding to the reach performance selection area ZH9 of the first area, and includes the characters "B reach", a second character, and two star marks. The characters "B reach" suggest that a B reach will be performed in the reach performance when the reach performance selection area ZH9A is selected. The two star marks represent the likelihood of a jackpot, and indicate that the likelihood of a jackpot is relatively medium. The reach performance selection area ZH10A includes the characters "C reach", a third character, and three star marks. The characters "C reach" suggest that a C reach will be performed in the reach performance when the reach performance selection area ZH10A is selected. The three star marks represent the likelihood of a jackpot, and indicate that the likelihood of a jackpot is relatively high. The reach performance selection area ZH11A includes the characters "E reach", a fifth character, and four star marks. The characters "E reach" suggest that an E reach will be performed in the reach performance when the reach performance selection area ZH11A is selected. The four star marks represent the likelihood of a jackpot, and indicate that the likelihood of a jackpot is higher than that of three star marks. The reach performance selection area ZH12A includes the characters "D Reach," a fourth character, and five star marks. The characters "D Reach" suggest that when the reach performance selection area ZH12A is selected, a D Reach will be performed in the reach performance. The five star marks represent the likelihood of a jackpot, and indicate that the likelihood of a jackpot is extremely high. In addition, the fourth character included in the reach performance selection area ZH12A advances into the reach performance selection area ZH8A and reach performance selection area ZH9A, which are adjacent to the reach performance selection area ZH12A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159(D), a reach determination effect is performed. In this reach determination effect, one area is determined (selected) from the second area. In the figure, the reach effect selection area ZH12A is shown hatched, and the state in which the reach effect selection area ZH12A has been selected is shown.

Next, as shown in Fig. 159 (E), in this reach performance, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the reach line LN with the same symbols (symbol 7 in the figure), and the decorative symbol 8C is displayed with high-speed fluctuations. In this reach performance, the character CRZH1, which is the fourth character included in the reach performance selection area ZH12A determined in the reach determination performance, performs various performances. After this reach performance, a losing symbol display or a big win symbol display is performed.
In addition, the above-mentioned reach development selection performances A to D are performed in the same variation.

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of the reach development selection presentation.
[Effect 1]
In the above-mentioned reach development selection performance, a first area formed of a plurality of reach performance selection areas ZH1, ZH2, ZH3 is displayed, and then a second area formed of a plurality of reach performance selection areas ZH1A, ZH2A, ZH3A is displayed. According to this configuration, two areas including different reach performance selection areas are displayed in sequence, so that it is possible to give the player a sense of excitement when selecting a reach. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the above-mentioned reach development selection performance, a first area formed of a plurality of reach performance selection areas ZH1, ZH2, ZH3 is displayed, and then a second area formed of a plurality of reach performance selection areas ZH1A, ZH2A, ZH3A is displayed, and the first area and the second area are the same size. According to this configuration, since two areas including a plurality of different reach selection areas and having the same size are displayed in sequence, it is possible to easily recognize the difference between the plurality of reach selection areas in the first area and the second area, and it is possible to give the player a sense of excitement when selecting a reach. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the above-mentioned reach development selection performance, the plurality of reach performance selection areas are areas including images indicating the likelihood of a big win. With this configuration, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of excitement when selecting a reach. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the above-mentioned reach development selection performance, each of the plurality of reach performance selection areas includes a character image. With this configuration, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of excitement when selecting a reach, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the reach development selection performance D, the character image included in the predetermined reach performance selection area advances into another reach selection area adjacent to the predetermined reach performance selection area. With this configuration, the character included in the predetermined reach selection area can be made to stand out, and when the predetermined reach selection area is selected, a greater sense of excitement can be given to the player. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect ZH-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display performance may be performed as one of the plurality of display performances,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a first area including a plurality of reach effect selection areas,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a second area including a plurality of reach effect selection areas,
The reach effect selection area is an area including a reach effect suggestion image suggesting a development to a predetermined reach effect,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZH-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZH-1,
The first region and the second region are the same size.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZH-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect ZH-1 or ZH-2,
The reach effect selection area is an area including a jackpot expectation suggestion image suggesting a jackpot expectation.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZH-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects ZH-1 to ZH-3,
The reach effect selection area is an area including a character image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZH-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZH-4,
the character image included in a predetermined reach selection area advances into another reach selection area adjacent to the predetermined reach selection area;
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the above embodiment, the following may be done.
The second area has a larger number of reach selection areas than the first area.
Each reach selection area in the second area is different in size or shape from each corresponding reach selection area in the first area (a reach selection area that includes the same reach performance suggestion image as the reach selection area in the first area).
○The probability of a jackpot and the character image do not change between a specific reach selection area in the second area and a corresponding reach selection area in the first area (a reach selection area that includes the same reach performance suggestion image as the reach selection area in the first area).
In the reach performance, a character image of the selected reach selection area appears.

The two-way group effects A to D are explained below using Figures 160 to 163. These two-way group effects can be executed during the decorative pattern variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a character display effect, it reads corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays images on the display screen 7a, left sub-display device 10L, right sub-display device 10R, illumination panel 18, etc. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is located closer to the player than the display screen 7a and the sub-display device 10.

[Two-way group performance A]
FIG. 160 is a diagram for explaining the two-way group performance A. In the two-way group performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 160(A), a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(B), an icon group display performance is performed. In this icon group display performance, a first group image including multiple heart images ZI1, which are icon images, is displayed in the left region of the display screen 7a, moves in that formation to the right region of the display screen 7a, and disappears outside the display screen 7a. The heart images ZI1 are heart-shaped icon images. Note that in the icon group display performance, the first group image is displayed in the left region of the display screen 7a, and instead of keeping the formation, each heart image ZI1 may move at a relatively different speed while moving to the right region of the display screen 7a, and disappear outside the display screen 7a. Also, instead of the heart images ZI1, circular icon images may be used as the icon images.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(C), a character group display performance is performed. In this character group display performance, a second group image including multiple smiling images ZI2, which are character images, is displayed in the right area of the display screen 7a, moves in that formation to the left area of the display screen 7a, and disappears outside the display screen 7a. The smiling images ZI2 are character images imitating a smiling face. Note that in the character group display performance, the second group image is displayed in the right area of the display screen 7a, and instead of keeping the formation, each smiling image ZI2 may move at a relatively different speed while moving to the right area of the display screen 7a, and disappear outside the display screen 7a. Also, instead of the smiling images ZI2, a character image imitating a whole body wearing combat uniform may be used as the character image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(D), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed temporarily stopped at the same symbol (symbol 7), and a reach display is performed to indicate a reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C changes. In addition, in the reach effect, a character image CRZI that is an enlarged version of the smiley face image ZI2 is displayed, and a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by this character image CRZI. Note that in this reach effect, a heart image ZI1 may also be used to perform a predetermined action.

[Two-way group performance B]
FIG. 161 is a diagram for explaining the two-way group performance B. In the two-way group performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 161(A), a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(B), group display performance 1 is performed. In this group display performance 1, a first group image including multiple heart images ZI1, which are icon images, is displayed in the left region of the display screen 7a, multiple smiley faces images ZI2, which are character images, are displayed in the right region of the display screen 7a, and then the first group image moves in a first direction (toward the right region of the display screen 7a, i.e., rightward), while the second group image moves in a second direction (toward the left region of the display screen 7a, i.e., leftward), which is the opposite direction to the first direction. The heart image ZI1 is a heart-shaped icon image. The heart image ZI1 has low transparency. The smiley face image ZI2 is a character image that resembles a smiling face. The smiley face image ZI2 has low transparency. In this case, in group display performance 1, the first group image (multiple heart images ZI1) and the second group image (multiple smiley images ZI2) move in a fixed formation. This is not limited to the above, and instead of a fixed formation, the heart images ZI1 may move at relatively different speeds when the first group image (multiple heart images ZI1) moves. Also, instead of a fixed formation, the smiley images ZI2 may move at relatively different speeds when the second group image (multiple smiley images ZI2) moves. Instead of a fixed formation, a circular icon image may be used as the icon image. Also, instead of a smiley image ZI2, a character image modeled after a full body wearing combat uniform may be used as the character image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(C), group display performance 2 is performed. In this group display performance 2, the first group image (multiple heart images ZI1) and the second group image (multiple smiley images ZI2) move to overlap near the center of the display screen 7a, and then the first group image moves in the first direction and disappears from the right edge of the display screen 7a, and the second group image moves in the second direction and disappears from the left edge of the display screen 7a. When the heart image ZI1 and the smiley image ZI2 overlap, the heart image ZI1 is displayed in front of the smiley image ZI2. Therefore, since the transparency of the heart image ZI1 is low, when the heart image ZI1 is in front of the smiley image ZI2, the smiley image ZI2 is hidden by the heart image ZI1. Note that when the heart image ZI1 and the smiley image ZI2 overlap, the smiley image ZI2 may be displayed in front of the heart image ZI1. In this case, if the smiley image ZI2 is in front of the heart image ZI1, the heart image ZI1 will be hidden by the smiley image ZI2. Also, in this group display performance 2, the first group image (multiple heart images ZI1) and the second group image (multiple smiley images ZI2) may pass each other without overlapping near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(D), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed temporarily stopped at the same symbol (symbol 7), and a reach display is performed to indicate a reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C changes. In the reach effect, a character image CRZI that is an enlarged version of the smiley face image ZI2 is displayed, and a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by this character image CRZI. Note that in this reach effect, a heart image ZI1 may also be used to perform a predetermined action.

[Two-way group performance C]
FIG. 162 is a diagram for explaining the two-way group performance C. In the two-way group performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 162(A), a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(B), group display performance 1 is performed. In this group display performance 1, a first group image including multiple heart images ZI1, which are icon images, is displayed in the left region of the display screen 7a, multiple smiley faces images ZI2, which are character images, are displayed in the right region of the display screen 7a, and then the first group image moves in a first direction (toward the right region of the display screen 7a, i.e., rightward), while the second group image moves in a second direction (toward the left region of the display screen 7a, i.e., leftward), which is the opposite direction to the first direction. The heart image ZI1 is a heart-shaped icon image. The heart image ZI1 has high transparency. The smiley face image ZI2 is a character image that resembles a smiling face. The smiley face image ZI2 has low transparency. In this case, in group display performance 1, the first group image (multiple heart images ZI1) and the second group image (multiple smiley images ZI2) move in a fixed formation. This is not limited to the above, and instead of a fixed formation, the heart images ZI1 may move at relatively different speeds when the first group image (multiple heart images ZI1) moves. Also, instead of a fixed formation, the smiley images ZI2 may move at relatively different speeds when the second group image (multiple smiley images ZI2) moves. Instead of a fixed formation, a circular icon image may be used as the icon image. Also, instead of a smiley image ZI2, a character image modeled after a full body wearing combat uniform may be used as the character image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(C), group display performance 2 is performed. In this group display performance 2, the first group image (multiple heart images ZI1) and the second group image (multiple smiley images ZI2) move to overlap near the center of the display screen 7a, and then the first group image moves in the first direction and disappears from the right edge of the display screen 7a, and the second group image moves in the second direction and disappears from the left edge of the display screen 7a. When the heart image ZI1 and the smiley image ZI2 overlap, the heart image ZI1 is displayed in front of the smiley image ZI2. However, since the transparency of the heart image ZI1 is high, even if the heart image ZI1 is in front of the smiley image ZI2, the smiley image ZI2 can be seen through the heart image ZI1. Note that when the heart image ZI1 and the smiley image ZI2 overlap, the smiley image ZI2 may be displayed in front of the heart image ZI1. The heart image ZI1 may have low transparency and the smiley image ZI2 may have high transparency. In this case, if the smiley image ZI2 is in front of the heart image ZI1, the heart image ZI1 will be visible through the smiley image ZI2. Also, in this group display performance 2, the first group image (multiple heart images ZI1) and the second group image (multiple smiley images ZI2) may pass each other without overlapping near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(D), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed temporarily stopped at the same symbol (symbol 7), and a reach display is performed to indicate a reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C changes. In the reach effect, a character image CRZI that is an enlarged version of the smiley face image ZI2 is displayed, and a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by this character image CRZI. Note that in this reach effect, a heart image ZI1 may also be used to perform a predetermined action.

[Two-way group performance D]
FIG. 163 is a diagram for explaining the two-way group performance D. In the two-way group performance D, first, as shown in FIG. 163(A), a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(B), group display performance 1 is performed. In this group display performance 1, a first group image including multiple heart images ZI1, which are icon images, is displayed in the left region of the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L, multiple smiley faces images ZI2, which are character images, are displayed in the right region of the display screen 7a, and then the first group image moves in a first direction (toward the right region of the display screen 7a, i.e., rightward), while the second group image moves in a second direction (toward the left region of the display screen 7a, i.e., leftward), which is the opposite direction to the first direction. The heart image ZI1 is a heart-shaped icon image. The heart image ZI1 has high transparency. The smiley face image ZI2 is a character image that imitates a smiling face. The smiley face image ZI2 has low transparency. In this case, in group display performance 1, the first group image (multiple heart images ZI1) and the second group image (multiple smiley images ZI2) move in a fixed formation. This is not limited to the above, and instead of a fixed formation, the heart images ZI1 may move at relatively different speeds when the first group image (multiple heart images ZI1) moves. Also, instead of a fixed formation, the smiley images ZI2 may move at relatively different speeds when the second group image (multiple smiley images ZI2) moves. Instead of a fixed formation, a circular icon image may be used as the icon image. Also, instead of a smiley image ZI2, a character image modeled after a full body wearing combat uniform may be used as the character image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(C), group display performance 2 is performed. In this group display performance 2, the first group image (multiple heart images ZI1) and the second group image (multiple smiley images ZI2) move and overlap near the center of the display screen 7a, on the left sub-display device 10L, and on the right sub-display device 10R, and then the first group image moves in the first direction and disappears from the right edge of the display screen 7a, and the second group image moves in the second direction and disappears from the left edge of the display screen 7a. When the heart image ZI1 and the smiley image ZI2 overlap, the heart image ZI1 is displayed in front of the smiley image ZI2. However, since the transparency of the heart image ZI1 is high, even if the heart image ZI1 is in front of the smiley image ZI2, the smiley image ZI2 can be seen through the heart image ZI1. Note that when the heart image ZI1 and the smiley image ZI2 overlap, the smiley image ZI2 may be displayed in front of the heart image ZI1. The heart image ZI1 may have low transparency and the smiley image ZI2 may have high transparency. In this case, if the smiley image ZI2 is in front of the heart image ZI1, the heart image ZI1 will be visible through the smiley image ZI2. Also, in this group display performance 2, the first group image (multiple heart images ZI1) and the second group image (multiple smiley images ZI2) may pass each other without overlapping.

Next, as shown in Fig. 163(D), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed as the same symbol (7 symbol) and a reach display is performed to indicate a reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C changes. In the reach effect, a character image CRZI that is an enlarged version of the smiley face image ZI2 is displayed, and a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by this character image CRZI. In this reach effect, a heart image ZI1 may be used to perform a predetermined action.
The above two-way group performances A to D are performed in the same movement.

[Modification]
In the above two-way group performance, the first group image moves in a first direction (rightward), and the second group image moves in a second direction (leftward) opposite to the first direction, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first group image and the second group image may move in different directions other than the opposite directions. For example, the first group image may move upward, and the second group image may move leftward.
In the above-mentioned two-way group performance, the first group image is formed with an icon image and the second group image is formed with a character image, but this is not limited to this, and the first group image and the second group image may be formed with an icon image, or the first group image and the second group image may be formed with a character image, or the first group image and the second group image may be formed with an image other than an icon image or a character image.
In the above two-way group presentation, when the character group display presentation, group display presentation 1, or group display presentation 2 is being performed, a predetermined image may be displayed on illumination panel 18. In this case, the predetermined image on illumination panel 18 displays the first group image and/or the second group image so that they can be seen. For example, the predetermined image may be displayed on illumination panel 18 while avoiding an area corresponding to an area where the first group image and the second group image overlap on display screen 7a.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of two-way group performance.
[Effect 1]
In the two-way group presentation, a first group image including a plurality of heart images ZI1 is displayed in the same movement, and a second group image including a plurality of smiley faces ZI2 is displayed. With this configuration, two group images are displayed in the same movement, so the group presentation can be livened up and the interest of the group presentation can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the two-way group presentation, when a first group image including a plurality of heart images ZI1 is displayed in the same change, a second group image including a plurality of smiley faces ZI2 is displayed. With this configuration, two group presentations are performed simultaneously in the same change, so that the group presentation can be livened up and the interest of the group presentation can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the two-way group presentation, in the same movement, a first group image including a plurality of heart images ZI1 moves in a first direction, and a second group image including a plurality of smiley faces ZI2 moves in a second direction different from the first direction. With this configuration, since the two group images move in different directions in the same movement, the group presentation can be made dynamic and gorgeous, and the interest of the group presentation can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the two-way group presentation, in the same movement, a first group image including a plurality of heart images ZI1 moves in a first direction, and a second group image including a plurality of smiley faces ZI2 moves in a second direction opposite to the first direction. With this configuration, the two group images move relatively closer and farther away in the same movement, so that the group presentation can be made dynamic and gorgeous, and the interest of the group presentation can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the two-way group presentation, the heart image ZI1 of the first group image is an icon image, and the smiling face image ZI2 of the second group image is a character image. With this configuration, group presentations using group images of different categories are performed in the same change, so the group presentation can be made more spectacular and the interest of the group presentation can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect ZI-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display performance may be performed as one of the plurality of display performances,
The first display performance is a performance in which a first group of images including a plurality of images is displayed in a moving manner,
The second display performance is a performance in which a second group of images including a plurality of images is displayed in a moving manner,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination performance, the first display performance and the second display performance are performed in the same variation.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZI-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZI-1,
In the combination performance, when the first display performance is being performed in the same variation, the second display performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZI-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZI-2,
In the combination performance, in the first display performance, the first group image moves in a first direction, and in the second display performance, the second group image moves in a second direction different from the first direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZI-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZI-3,
The first direction is opposite to the second direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZI-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect ZI-4,
the plurality of images of the first group of images are icon images;
The plurality of images of the second group image are character images.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the above embodiment, the following may be done.
The first and second group images overlap. The images of the first group image have at least partially transparent portions. The images of the second group image may also have transparent portions.
A reach effect is created using images (e.g., icon images, character images) constituting the first group of images or the second group of images.
The first and second group images pass through the main display and the sub-display: the first group image originates from the main display and the second group image originates from the sub-display.
A third display device is provided in front, and the first and second group images can be seen through the gaps in the displayed images.

The following describes the winning ball display effects A to D using Figures 164 to 167. These winning ball display effects can be executed during the decorative pattern variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a character display effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a, the left sub-display device 10L, the right sub-display device 10R, the illumination panel 18, etc. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is located closer to the player than the display screen 7a and the sub-display device 10.

[Earned ball display effect A]
FIG. 164 is a diagram for explaining the winning ball display performance A. In the winning ball display performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 164(A), a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(B), a jackpot pattern display effect is performed. In this jackpot pattern display effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as a jackpot pattern. In this figure, "7 7 7" is displayed as a jackpot pattern. When this jackpot pattern is displayed, various effects are performed by a specified character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(C), a display of the number of balls to be acquired is performed. In this display of the number of balls to be acquired, a display of the number of balls to be acquired ZJ1, a display of the number of balls to be acquired ZJ2, a display of the number of balls to be acquired ZJ3, and a display of the number of balls to be acquired ZJ4 are displayed. The display of the number of balls to be acquired ZJ1 is displayed with the characters "+15", suggesting that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "15 balls". The display of the number of balls to be acquired ZJ2 is displayed with the characters "+105", suggesting that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "105 balls". The display of the number of balls to be acquired ZJ3 is displayed with the characters "+150", suggesting that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "150 balls". The display of the number of balls to be acquired ZJ4 is displayed with the characters "+300", suggesting that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "300 balls". These expected number of balls to be acquired displays ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 are displayed in the same manner when they represent the same number of acquired balls, and are displayed in different manners when they represent different numbers of acquired balls. In this case, the "same manner" means, for example, the same color, and/or pattern, and/or size, and/or shape, and/or font. Also, the "different manner" means, for example, different color, and/or pattern, and/or size, and/or shape, and/or font. Also, in the expected number of balls to be acquired display performance, a jackpot pattern is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R. Note that, in this expected number of balls to be acquired display performance, the size of the expected number of balls to be acquired displays ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 may be made larger as the display represents a larger number of acquired balls. For example, the expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ4 may be displayed largest, followed by the expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ3, the expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ2, and the expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ1, the smallest. In the figure, various hatching methods are used to show the different colors and patterns of the expected number of balls to be won indicators ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(D), a maximum number of balls to be acquired display effect is performed. In this maximum number of balls to be acquired display effect, a maximum number of balls to be acquired display ZJ5 is displayed. The maximum number of balls to be acquired display ZJ5 indicates the maximum number of balls to be acquired in a big win game. The maximum number of balls to be acquired indicated by this maximum number of balls to be acquired display ZJ5 is equal to the total value of the number of balls to be acquired displays ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 displayed in the above-mentioned expected number of balls to be acquired display effect, or is greater than the total value of the number of balls to be acquired displays ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4. In the figure, the maximum number of balls to be acquired display ZJ5 is displayed as "MAX 2000", suggesting that the maximum number of balls to be acquired in a big win game is 2000 balls. In addition, in the maximum number of balls to be acquired display effect, a big win pattern is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.
The same change occurs from the decorative pattern change effect to the effect displaying the maximum number of balls expected to be won.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(E), a jackpot game display presentation is performed. This jackpot game display presentation is performed during a jackpot game, and displays a jackpot ball acquisition display ZJ6, a round display ZJ7, and a character image CRZJ. This ball acquisition display ZJ6 shows the number of balls acquired (the number of balls paid out) by the jackpot game (150 in the figure) and the maximum number of balls expected to be acquired (2000 in the figure). The round display ZJ7 shows the number of rounds in the round game. In the figure, it shows that there is one round. The character image CRZJ performs various presentations during a jackpot game. Also, during the jackpot game display presentation, a jackpot pattern is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.

[Earned ball display effect B]
FIG. 165 is a diagram for explaining the winning ball display performance B. In the winning ball display performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 165(A), a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(B), a jackpot pattern display effect is performed. In this jackpot pattern display effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as a jackpot pattern. In this figure, "7 7 7" is displayed as a jackpot pattern. When this jackpot pattern is displayed, various effects are performed by a specified character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(C), a display of the number of balls to be acquired is performed. In this display of the number of balls to be acquired, a display of the number of balls to be acquired ZJ1, a display of the number of balls to be acquired ZJ2, a display of the number of balls to be acquired ZJ3, and a display of the number of balls to be acquired ZJ4 are displayed. The display of the number of balls to be acquired ZJ1 is displayed with the characters "+15", suggesting that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "15 balls". The display of the number of balls to be acquired ZJ2 is displayed with the characters "+105", suggesting that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "105 balls". The display of the number of balls to be acquired ZJ3 is displayed with the characters "+150", suggesting that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "150 balls". The display of the number of balls to be acquired ZJ4 is displayed with the characters "+300", suggesting that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "300 balls". These expected number of balls to be acquired displays ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 are displayed in the same manner when they represent the same number of acquired balls, and are displayed in different manners when they represent different numbers of acquired balls. In this case, the "same manner" means, for example, the same color, and/or pattern, and/or size, and/or shape, and/or font. Also, the "different manner" means, for example, different color, and/or pattern, and/or size, and/or shape, and/or font. Also, in the expected number of balls to be acquired display performance, a jackpot pattern is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R. Note that, in this expected number of balls to be acquired display performance, the size of the expected number of balls to be acquired displays ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 may be made larger as the display represents a larger number of acquired balls. For example, the expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ4 may be displayed largest, followed by the expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ3, the expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ2, and the expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ1, the smallest. In the figure, various hatching methods are used to show the different colors and patterns of the expected number of balls to be won indicators ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (D), an enlarged display of the number of balls expected to be acquired is performed. In this enlarged display of the number of balls expected to be acquired, the displays ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 of the number of balls expected to be acquired move (in motion) and expand. In addition, in the enlarged display of the number of balls expected to be acquired, a jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(E), a maximum number of balls to be acquired display effect is performed. In this maximum number of balls to be acquired display effect, a maximum number of balls to be acquired display ZJ5 is displayed. The maximum number of balls to be acquired display ZJ5 indicates the maximum number of balls to be acquired in a big win game. The maximum number of balls to be acquired indicated by this maximum number of balls to be acquired display ZJ5 is equal to the total value of the number of balls to be acquired displays ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 displayed in the above-mentioned expected number of balls to be acquired display effect, or is greater than the total value of the number of balls to be acquired displays ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4. In the figure, the maximum number of balls to be acquired display ZJ5 is displayed as "MAX 2000", suggesting that the maximum number of balls to be acquired in a big win game is 2000 balls. In addition, in the maximum number of balls to be acquired display effect, a big win pattern is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.
The same change occurs from the decorative pattern change effect to the effect displaying the maximum number of balls expected to be won.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (F), a jackpot game display presentation is performed. This jackpot game display presentation is performed during a jackpot game, and displays a jackpot ball acquisition display ZJ6, a round display ZJ7, and a character image CRZJ. This ball acquisition display ZJ6 shows the number of balls acquired (number of balls paid out) by the jackpot game (150 in the figure) and the maximum number of balls expected to be acquired (2000 in the figure). The round display ZJ7 shows the number of rounds in the round game. In the figure, it shows that there is one round. The character image CRZJ performs various presentations during a jackpot game. Also, in the expected number of balls to be acquired display presentation, a jackpot pattern is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.

[Earned ball display effect C]
FIG. 166 is a diagram for explaining the winning ball display performance C. In the winning ball display performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 166(A), a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(B), a jackpot pattern display effect is performed. In this jackpot pattern display effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as a jackpot pattern. In this figure, "7 7 7" is displayed as a jackpot pattern. When this jackpot pattern is displayed, various effects are performed by a specified character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(C), a display of the number of balls expected to be acquired is performed. In this display of the number of balls expected to be acquired, a display of the number of balls expected to be acquired ZJ1, a display of the number of balls expected to be acquired ZJ2, a display of the number of balls expected to be acquired ZJ3, and a display of the number of balls expected to be acquired ZJ4 are displayed. The display of the number of balls expected to be acquired ZJ1 is displayed with the characters "+15", suggesting that the number of balls expected to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "15 balls". The display of the number of balls expected to be acquired ZJ2 is displayed with the characters "+105", suggesting that the number of balls expected to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "105 balls". The display of the number of balls expected to be acquired ZJ3 is displayed with the characters "+150", suggesting that the number of balls expected to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "150 balls". The display of the number of balls expected to be acquired ZJ4 is displayed with the characters "+300", suggesting that the number of balls expected to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "300 balls". These expected number of balls to be acquired displays ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 are displayed in the same manner when they represent the same number of acquired balls, and are displayed in different manners when they represent different numbers of acquired balls. In this case, the "same manner" means, for example, the same color, and/or pattern, and/or size, and/or shape, and/or font. Also, the "different manner" means, for example, different color, and/or pattern, and/or size, and/or shape, and/or font. Also, in the expected number of balls to be acquired display performance, a jackpot pattern is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R. Note that, in this expected number of balls to be acquired display performance, the size of the expected number of balls to be acquired displays ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 may be made larger as the display represents a larger number of acquired balls. For example, the expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ4 may be displayed largest, followed by the expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ3, the expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ2, and the expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ1, the smallest. In the figure, various hatching methods are used to show the different colors and patterns of the expected number of balls to be won indicators ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (D), an enlarged display of the number of balls expected to be acquired is performed. In this enlarged display of the number of balls expected to be acquired, the displays ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 of the number of balls expected to be acquired move (in motion) and expand. In addition, in the enlarged display of the number of balls expected to be acquired, a jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(E), a display of the reduced number of balls to be acquired is performed. In this display of the reduced number of balls to be acquired, the displays ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 of the number of balls to be acquired are reduced while moving (moving) toward a predetermined position (near the center of the display screen 7a). In addition, in the display of the enlarged number of balls to be acquired, a jackpot pattern is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R. Note that after the display of the enlarged number of balls to be acquired in FIG. 166(D), the display of the reduced number of balls to be acquired in FIG. 166(E) is performed, but this is not limited thereto, and the display of the enlarged number of balls to be acquired in FIG. 166(D) may be performed after the display of the reduced number of balls to be acquired in FIG. 166(E).

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(F), a maximum number of balls to be acquired display effect is performed. In this maximum number of balls to be acquired display effect, a maximum number of balls to be acquired display ZJ5 is displayed. The maximum number of balls to be acquired display ZJ5 indicates the maximum number of balls to be acquired in a big win game. The maximum number of balls to be acquired indicated by this maximum number of balls to be acquired display ZJ5 is equal to the total value of the number of balls to be acquired displays ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 displayed in the above-mentioned expected number of balls to be acquired display effect, or is greater than the total value of the number of balls to be acquired displays ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4. In the figure, the maximum number of balls to be acquired display ZJ5 is displayed as "MAX 2000", suggesting that the maximum number of balls to be acquired in a big win game is 2000 balls. In addition, in the maximum number of balls to be acquired display effect, a big win pattern is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.
The same change occurs from the decorative pattern change effect to the effect displaying the maximum number of balls expected to be won.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (G), a jackpot game display presentation is performed. This jackpot game display presentation is performed during a jackpot game, and displays a jackpot ball acquisition display ZJ6, a round display ZJ7, and a character image CRZJ. This ball acquisition display ZJ6 shows the number of balls acquired (number of balls paid out) by the jackpot game (150 in the figure) and the maximum number of balls expected to be acquired (2000 in the figure). The round display ZJ7 shows the number of rounds in the round game. In the figure, it shows that there is one round. The character image CRZJ performs various presentations during a jackpot game. Also, in the expected number of balls to be acquired display presentation, a jackpot pattern is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.

[Earned ball display effect D]
FIG. 167 is a diagram for explaining the winning ball display performance D. In the winning ball display performance D, first, as shown in FIG. 167(A), a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change performance, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These reserved icons 9A and 9C are white reserved icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(B), a jackpot pattern display effect is performed. In this jackpot pattern display effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as a jackpot pattern. In this figure, "7 7 7" is displayed as a jackpot pattern. When this jackpot pattern is displayed, various effects are performed by a specified character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(C), a display of the number of balls expected to be acquired is performed. In this display of the number of balls expected to be acquired, display ZJ1, display ZJ2, display ZJ3, and display ZJ4 are displayed while moving and overlapping each other. Display ZJ1 is displayed with the characters "+15," suggesting that the number of balls expected to be acquired in a jackpot game has increased by "15 balls." Display ZJ2 is displayed with the characters "+105," suggesting that the number of balls expected to be acquired in a jackpot game has increased by "105 balls." Display ZJ3 is displayed with the characters "+150," suggesting that the number of balls expected to be acquired in a jackpot game has increased by "150 balls." The expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ4 is represented by the characters "+300", suggesting that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "300 balls". When the expected number of balls to be acquired displays ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 indicate the same number of balls to be acquired, they are displayed in the same manner, and when they indicate different numbers of balls to be acquired, they are displayed in different manners. In this case, "the same manner" means, for example, the same color, and/or pattern, and/or size, and/or shape, and/or font. Also, "different manner" means, for example, different color, and/or pattern, and/or size, and/or shape, and/or font. Also, in the expected number of balls to be acquired display performance, a jackpot pattern is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R. Note that, in this expected number of balls to be acquired display performance, the size of the expected number of balls to be acquired displays ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 may be made larger as the display indicates a larger number of balls to be acquired. For example, the expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ4 may be the largest, followed by the expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ3, then the expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ2, and finally the expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ1, which is the smallest. In the figure, the different colors and patterns of the expected number of balls to be acquired displays ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 are shown using various hatchings.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167 (D), an enlarged display of the number of balls expected to be acquired is performed. In this enlarged display of the number of balls expected to be acquired, the displays ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 of the number of balls expected to be acquired move and expand, and overlap with each other. In addition, in the enlarged display of the number of balls expected to be acquired, a jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(E), a reduced number of balls to be acquired display is performed. In this reduced number of balls to be acquired display, the displays ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 of the number of balls to be acquired move and shrink toward a predetermined position (near the center of the display screen 7a) and overlap with each other. In addition, in the enlarged number of balls to be acquired display, a jackpot pattern is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R. Note that after the enlarged number of balls to be acquired display in FIG. 167(D), the reduced number of balls to be acquired display in FIG. 167(E) is performed, but this is not limited thereto, and the enlarged number of balls to be acquired display in FIG. 167(D) may be performed after the reduced number of balls to be acquired display in FIG. 167(E).

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(F), a maximum number of balls to be acquired display effect is performed. In this maximum number of balls to be acquired display effect, a maximum number of balls to be acquired display ZJ5 is displayed. The maximum number of balls to be acquired display ZJ5 indicates the maximum number of balls to be acquired in a big win game. The maximum number of balls to be acquired indicated by this maximum number of balls to be acquired display ZJ5 is equal to the total value of the number of balls to be acquired displays ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 displayed in the above-mentioned expected number of balls to be acquired display effect, or is greater than the total value of the number of balls to be acquired displays ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4. In the figure, the maximum number of balls to be acquired display ZJ5 is displayed as "MAX 2000", suggesting that the maximum number of balls to be acquired in a big win game is 2000 balls. In addition, in the maximum number of balls to be acquired display effect, a big win pattern is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.
The same change occurs from the decorative pattern change effect to the effect displaying the maximum number of balls expected to be won.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(G), a jackpot game display presentation is performed. This jackpot game display presentation is performed during a jackpot game, and displays a jackpot ball acquisition display ZJ6, a round display ZJ7, and a character image CRZJ. This ball acquisition display ZJ6 shows the number of balls acquired (number of balls paid out) by the jackpot game (150 in the figure) and the maximum number of balls expected to be acquired (2000 in the figure). The round display ZJ7 shows the number of rounds in the round game. In the figure, it shows that there is one round. The character image CRZJ performs various presentations during a jackpot game. Also, in the expected number of balls to be acquired display presentation, a jackpot pattern is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.

[Modification]
In the above-mentioned winning ball display effect, the decorative pattern change effect to the maximum number of balls expected to be won display effect are performed in the same change, and the jackpot game display effect is performed during the jackpot game, but it is not limited to this, and the number of balls expected to be won display effect, the enlarged number of balls expected to be won display effect, the reduced number of balls expected to be won display effect, and the maximum number of balls expected to be won display effect may be performed during the jackpot game.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the winning ball display.
[Effect 1]
In the above-mentioned winning ball display presentation, a presentation is performed in which a big win pattern is displayed to notify a big win, then a presentation is performed in which a number of balls to be won are displayed ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4, then a presentation is performed in which the maximum number of balls to be won is displayed ZJ5, and then a big win game presentation is performed. With this configuration, the number of balls to be won in a big win game can be recognized piecemeal by the number of balls to be won displays ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4, and then the maximum number of balls to be won in a big win game can be recognized by the maximum number of balls to be won display ZJ5, so that it is possible to enjoy a small joy followed by a big joy, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the above-mentioned ball acquisition display performance, when a performance is performed in which multiple expected number of balls ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 are displayed, the expected number of balls displayed that represent the same number of balls among the multiple expected number of balls ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 are displayed in the same manner (for example, the same color, and/or pattern, and/or size, and/or shape, and/or font). According to this configuration, it is easy to recognize the expected number of balls displayed with the same expected number of balls among the expected number of balls displayed ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4. In other words, it is easy to find the expected number of balls displayed with different expected number of balls, and the interest of the display performance related to the expected number of balls can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the above-mentioned ball acquisition display performance, when a performance is performed in which multiple expected number of balls ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 are displayed, the expected number of balls displayed among the multiple expected number of balls ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 that represent different numbers of balls are displayed in different ways (for example, different colors, and/or patterns, and/or sizes, and/or shapes, and/or fonts). According to this configuration, it is easy to recognize the expected number of balls displayed among the expected number of balls ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 that have the same expected number of balls to be acquired, in other words, it is easy to find the expected number of balls displayed that have different expected numbers of balls to be acquired, and the interest of the display performance related to the expected number of balls to be acquired can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the above-mentioned winning ball display presentation, before the big win game presentation, a presentation is performed in which the multiple expected winning ball number displays ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 are enlarged. With this configuration, the expected winning ball number displays ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 are emphasized, making it easier to recognize the expected winning ball number displays that are displayed one after another, and the interest of the display presentation related to the winning ball number can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the above-mentioned winning ball display presentation, before the big win game presentation, a presentation is performed in which the multiple expected winning ball number displays ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 are moved to a predetermined position and reduced in size, and then the maximum expected winning ball number display ZJ5 is displayed. With this configuration, the expected winning ball number displays ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 become difficult to recognize, causing anxiety for the player, and then the player recognizes the maximum expected winning ball number display, which gives the player a great sense of excitement. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect ZJ-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display performance may be performed as one of the plurality of display performances,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a jackpot symbol to notify a jackpot,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a number of media to be acquired, which represents the number of game media that can be acquired in a big win game,
The third display effect is an effect of displaying a maximum number of media expected to be acquired, which represents the maximum number of media that can be acquired in a big win game,
The fourth display effect is an effect for performing a jackpot game effect during a jackpot game,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect may be performed,
In the combination performance, the first display performance is performed, and then the second display performance is performed, and then the second display performance is performed, and then the third display performance is performed, and then the third display performance is performed, and then the fourth display performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZJ-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZJ-1,
In the combination presentation, in the second display presentation, among the plurality of media number displays to be acquired, displays of the number of media to be acquired that represent the same number of media are displayed in the same manner.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZJ-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZJ-2,
In the combination presentation, in the second display presentation, among the plurality of media number displays to be acquired, displays of the number of media to be acquired that represent different numbers of media are displayed in different manners.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZJ-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZJ-3,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is an effect of enlarging the display of the number of media to be acquired,
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination performance, the fifth display performance is performed after the second display performance, and the fourth display performance is performed after the fifth display performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZJ-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect ZJ-3 or ZJ-4,
A sixth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The sixth display effect is a effect of moving the display of the number of media to be acquired to a predetermined position while shrinking the display,
The combination effect may include the sixth display effect,
In the combination performance, the sixth display performance is performed after the second display performance, and the third display performance is performed after the sixth display performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the above embodiment, the following may be done.
○The multiple media acquisition numbers will be displayed in a moving, overlapping manner.
○The number of media expected to be acquired is displayed in three dimensions.

[Other Modifications]
The various display effects described above may not include some of the effects, or may include effects other than those described above.

The gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment has been described using a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of a pachinko gaming machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel-type gaming machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball gaming machine, or a mahjong ball gaming machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the gaming medium can be changed from gaming balls to gaming medals.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect button 63 is provided as an operation unit operated by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a lever, trigger, etc. may also be used as an operation unit operated by the player. Also, in the display effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display effect may be executed using a button image representing the effect button 63, but instead of this, the display effect may be executed using an image representing the select button 68, or the display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or trigger.

The gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that does not have a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

As shown in Figures 60 to 167, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured to execute various effects using the display devices (main display device 7, sub display device 10, etc.). In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, these effects may be combined with each other to form a single display effect. In other words, two or more of the above-mentioned multiple effect examples and/or modified examples may be combined.
Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 is equipped with a sub-display device 10 in addition to the main display device 7 (display screen 7a), and the display effects performed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 may be performed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10, and the display effects performed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10 may be performed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Although the present aspect has been described above based on the embodiment and modified examples, the above-mentioned embodiment of the aspect is intended to facilitate understanding of the present aspect and does not limit the present aspect. The present aspect may be modified or improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and equivalents thereof are included in the present aspect.

1: Gaming machine 3: Playing area 5: Board lamp 7: Main display device 10: Sub-display device 9A, 9B: Hold image (hold icon)
9C…Relevant hold image (hold icon)
14 ... First movable part 15 ... Second movable part 17 ... Big prize opening start hole 20 ... First start hole (first ball entry hole)
21...Second starting port (second ball entry port)
64: Sub-display screen 66: Frame lamp 81: Game control microcomputer 91: Presentation control microcomputer 101: Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

a first display area capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A gaming machine including a second display area capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, the second display area being an image display area different from the first display area and not overlapping with the first display area,
When the first display area is located inside the second display area,
A first effect in which a plurality of hold icons are displayed in a first direction in the first display area;
A second effect is performed after the first effect, in which the direction in which the plurality of reserved icons are arranged is changed from the first direction to a second direction while maintaining the display of the plurality of reserved icons;
After the second performance, a third performance is executed in which the direction in which the plurality of reserved icons are arranged is changed from the second direction to the first direction while maintaining the display of the plurality of reserved icons.
The third performance is executed in a manner in which all of the reserved icons displayed in the first display area including the plurality of reserved icons are not pre-read.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images